Store
 

equinux HQ

Frequently Asked Questions

The VPN seems connected but I can't connect to my server or transfer data. What is wrong?
 

There are a number of possible causes for such a behavior. This FAQ will help you to find out what is causing the problem in your specific situation. In this FAQ we will be using destination device as a generic term for the device you are trying to connect to. The destination device can be anything from a normal computer, to a server, to a network printer.


1. Are you trying to connect to the destination device using a host name?

If you are using a host name, please try once using its IP address instead. If that works, the problem has to do with DNS resolution. Please make sure DNS is enabled for the VPN connection and correctly configured. Note that using Bonjour or NETBIOS hostnames is generally not possible over VPN.


2. Is the IP address you are connecting to really part of the remote network?

For example, if your remote network is 192.168.13.0/24, you should be able to connect to IPs starting with 192.168.13.x, but connections to IPs starting with 192.168.14.x will not work as they are outside the address range of traffic tunneled through the VPN.


3. Is the local address in VPN Tracker part of the remote network?

Using a local address in VPN Tracker (Basic > Local Address) that is part of the remote network is not possible with most VPN gateways. Please use a local address that is outside all remote networks. For example, if your remote network is 192.168.13.0/24, do not use an address starting with 192.168.13. If you are using an automatic configuration method (e.g. Mode Config, EasyVPN, DHCP over VPN) you may be able to assign a local address to VPN Tracker that is part of the remote network. Refer to the configuration guide for your VPN gateway for more information.


4. Could multiple VPN users use the same local address?

If multiple VPN users exist, pleas make sure no two users are using the same local address (Basic > Local Address), otherwise one of them will not be able to use the tunnel anymore whenever both of them are connected. If that field is empty in your configuration, VPN Tracker will just use the IP address of your primary network interface as local address, and of course, this can also cause an address conflict with another user, that’s why we do not recommend to leave that field empty if there are multiple VPN users.


5. Can you ping the LAN address of the VPN gateway?

You can find a ping tool directly in VPN Tracker under Tools > Ping Host. The LAN address of the VPN gateway is special in the regard that this address doesn’t need to be routed at all. So if you can ping that address but no other remote address, it is most likely a routing issue at the remote end.


6. If you can't ping anything, try re-running the VPN Availability Test

The VPN Availability Test can be found in the menu: Tools > VPN Availability Test. Then try connecting the VPN again. The results of this test depend on the capabilities of your local Internet router/modem or the Internet connection itself and they influence how the VPN tunnel is established. VPN Tracker automatically runs the test for every new Internet connection it is able to detect but even if a connection has been tested before, there are various reasons why the behavior of that connection may have changed in the meantime.


7. Is your VPN gateway the default gateway (router) of its network?

If the VPN gateway is not the default gateway, you will in many cases need a suitable routing setup in order for responses to reach you. Whenever a device doesn’t know how to reach an IP address directly, it forwards its reply to its default gateway and if that isn’t the VPN gateway, it won’t know what to do with that reply data. In that case its important to configure the default gateway to forward replies to VPN users to the VPN gateway.


8. Is your VPN gateway the default gateway (router) of its network?

For more details, we would like to direct you to the following FAQ entry.

What is the Pre-Shared key and how do I get it?
 
The Pre-Shared Key (sometimes called shared secret) is basically a form of password for your VPN gateway which is set up on your device.

Configuring the Pre-Shared Key for a new VPN connection


VPN Tracker provides setup guides for all major gateway manufacturers. In these setup guides, you will also find information on how to set up a secure Pre-Shared Key for your specific device.

You can access all guides on this page.

I have lost my Pre-Shared Key - how can I get it back?


Here are a few tips for you to try and restore your Pre-Shared Key:
  1. Check if you have stored the affected connection in your Personal Safe. If so, you may be able to download the connection again.
  2. Check the Keychain (Applications > Utilities > Keychain Access). The Pre-Shared Key is usually saved here. Enter "Shared Secret" into the search bar to view a list of all your saved PSKs.
  3. Are you using Time Machine Backup? You could try restoring an older connection with the Pre-Shared-Key.
  4. Check your firewall or ask the relevant VPN Administrator. Refer to your device handbook to find out where to obtain this information on your specific firewall.
How do I fix issues with random MAC Addresses under macOS Sequoia
 

After upgrading to macOS 15 Sequoia, you might notice that your Mac constantly changes its MAC address, affecting your ability to connect to your VPN. This behavior is due to macOS 15’s new privacy features, which can assign randomized MAC addresses for network connections. However, you can configure your network settings to always use a fixed MAC address, which can resolve issues with VPN connectivity, such as DHCP reservations failing due to MAC address changes.

How to Set a Fixed MAC Address in macOS 15 (Sequoia):

  1. Open System Settings:
    • Click the Apple logo in the top-left corner of your screen.
    • Select System Settings from the dropdown menu.
  2. Go to Wi-Fi Settings:
    • In the left sidebar, click Wi-Fi.
    • Select the Wi-Fi network you usually connect to for VPN access and click on "Details...".
  3. Configure the MAC Address:
    • Look for the option labeled Private Wi-Fi Address.
    • Change this option to "Fixed" to use a fixed MAC address instead of a randomized one.
    • In some cases, the Fixed Setting may still cause issues. If this is the case, change the setting to "Off"
    • Your network will now always connect using the same MAC address, helping maintain your VPN connection stability.
  4. Re-establish VPN Tracker Connection:
    • Once you've set a fixed MAC address, ensure that your VPN’s DHCP reservation or configuration aligns with this MAC address.

This process will restore the VPN Tracker’s ability to connect reliably using a consistent MAC address, resolving issues caused by macOS 15 Sequoia’s default MAC address randomization feature.

How do I activate my VPN Tracker license?
 

  • If you haven't already, you can download VPN Tracker using this link.
  • After the download has completed, launch the app and click the "Login" button in the top left-hand corner of the app home page.
  • Enter your equinux ID and password in the space provided. Hint: This is the login you first created when purchasing VPN Tracker in our online store.

Are you a World Connect User?

You will need to download VPN tracker World Connect. You can do so using this link. VPN Tracker World Connect must be installed using the App Store. Once you've installed the app on your device, sign in with your equinux ID and password.

My Office network uses the same IP range as my home network. What can I do?
 
There are two types of IP addresses:
  • Private IP Addresses, and
  • Public IP Addresses

Private IP addresses can be used by any person or organisation for their private network.

The two most commonly used private network ranges (range of IP Addresses) are:
  • 192.168.0.x, and
  • 192.168.1.x

When for example your home network and your company network both use the same Private IP Range, there will be problems because you will see multiple devices with the same IP Adress and your computer will get confused.

Your Company Network:
When setting up a company network, most companies try to avoid the above listed IP ranges, which is also recommended by us, in order to not cause conflicts with people connecting over VPN. However, there are still some companies that use one of these popular network ranges.

Your Home Network:
A lot of popular home routers like Netgear, Asus, Google, D-Link, TP-Link, Linksys, Trendnet, AVM all use an IP Range of 192.168.0.x.

If your company Network uses the same IP Range as your home network you are going to run into problems.


Here are two possible solutions:
  1. Change your local network to a different range (Preferred)


    Possible Ranges are:
    • 10.250.250.x
    • 172.30.30.x
    • 192.168.250.x

    Advantage: Once you have made this change on your home network, you will never have conflicts in this network.
    Disadvantage: You will need to change the settings on your private network router once, this requires access and can take some time.
    What to do:
    • Login to your home router
    • Find the setup section with “DHCP” settings.
    • Change your router to a different IP adress (for example an address from one of the ranges listed above, for example 172.30.30.1)
    • Change the DHCP Server Settings to the same range of your router (If your router IP is 172.30.30.1, your range could be 172.30.30.10 to 172.30.30.253)

    After you have made these changes, there will be no more conflicts between your home and company network.
  2. Force Traffic over VPN


    There may be situations where it's not possible to use the first option (for example if you're in a coffee shop or hotel) In this case you have the option to force the traffic over your VPN Network, this means your VPN Network (company network) will always win.
    Advantage: This setting is global, meaning no matter what network you are in you will always be able to connect.
    Disadvantage: Once you are connected to your company’s VPN, you can not access local service, like home router, local storages or printers.
    What to do:
    • Configure your VPN Tracker connection
    • Select the "Advanced" Tab at the top
    • In the "Traffic control" section, activate the Checkbox "Force traffic over the VPN if remote networks conflict with local networks"


Download VPN Tracker free

VPN Tracker is asking for my password. Why? Which password do I need to enter?
 

There are multiple passwords that VPN Tracker may require: Your admin password for installation, passwords needed for connecting to your VPN or accessing your Keychain, etc.

This guide shows all password prompts you may encounter in VPN Tracker, explains why they are needed and lets you know which password should be entered.

Administrator password prompts

VPN Tracker will occasionally require you to enter an administrator password - for example during the macOS installation process in order to approve the System Extension needed to allow VPN Tracker to work effectively.

Account + licensing

To log in to VPN Tracker on Mac or iOS, or to log in to your account on my.vpntracker.com, you will need to enter your equinux ID and password. This password gives you access to your VPN Tracker account where your plan, team data, connections and device information is stored.

Pre-Shared Key

Many VPN connections are secured using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) or Shared Secret which is set on the VPN gateway during the configuration process. You need to enter the PSK in VPN Tracker in order to connect to your VPN.

If you are not the administrator of your VPN gateway, contact the admin for assistance. Tip: Admins can share pre-configured VPN connections using TeamCloud to avoid PSK confusion at enduser level.

Extended Authentication (XAUTH)

Most VPNs have a list of permitted VPN users - e.g. members of staff. Each VPN user has their own unique username and password which they need to enter in order to connect to the VPN. These are often the same credentials you use to sign in at the office. If you're not sure, get in touch with your admin who can advise you further.

How do I make all traffic go through the VPN tunnel?
 

Such a setup is called “Host to Everywhere” in VPN Tracker. All non-local traffic will be sent through the VPN. For this setup to work, it must be properly configured in VPN Tracker and on the VPN gateway:

  1. The Network Topology must be set to “Host to Everywhere” in VPN Tracker
  2. The VPN gateway must accept an incoming VPN connection with a 0.0.0.0/0 (= everywhere) endpoint

Once these are configured, it should already be possible to establish the VPN connection. However, it is very likely that Internet access will not yet work. For Internet access to work, several more things need to be configured on the VPN gateway:

  1. The VPN gateway must route VPN traffic not destined for its local networks out on the Internet
  2. This traffic must be subject to Network Address Translation (NAT) in order for replies to reach the VPN gateway
  3. In many cases, a suitable remote DNS setup is necessary for DNS resolution to continue to work

Note that not alll VPN gateways can be configured for Host to Everywhere connections. Most devices designed for small office or home networks (e.g. devices by NETGEAR or Linksys) are not capable of dealing with Host to Everywhere connections.

Why is file access so much slower over VPN?
 
To access volumes and files hosted on a file server, one of several available distributed file system protocols must be used. As of 2018, the most common protocols are SMB/CIFS (default for Windows and macOS 10.9 or newer), AFP (default for macOS prior to 10.9), NFS (default for Linux and most UNIX operating system), WebDAV (based on HTTP, vendor neutral). All these protocols, except for WebDAV, have originally been designed to access files hosted on a file server located in the same network as the client accessing it. This can often lead to issues when using these protocols over a VPN connection.

A VPN connection typically runs over the Internet and the Internet has quite different network characteristics than a company or home network. Local networks typically offer a high amount of symmetric (upload equals download) bandwidth, very low and stable latency, very litte packet loss, almost no data corruption and a rather high and always constant maximum transmission unit size (MTU). Contrary to that, Internet connections offer a lot less bandwidth, usually asymmetric (much more download than upload) and the Internet has a rather high, very fluctuating latency, typically at leas some packet loss, data corruption can happen as well and the maximum transmission unit size can be much lower and is subject to change at any time even during an active transmission. Some of the protocols above can cope better with these conditions than others.

Issues to expect: Slow to very slow directory browsing (because of the large latency), copying a file from remote is slow (limited by the upload of the other side), copying a file to remote is slow (limited by the upload of the local side), directly opening a file directly is even slower (caused by limited upload bandwidth but also large latency and small packet sizes can play a role), and file access failures are possible (caused by packet loss and/or data corruptions). Please note that none of these is the fault of the VPN itself, even when running these protocols over the same Internet line without any VPN, the results would only be marginally better or not better at all.

Unfortunately there is little that can be done about these problems. There is nothing users can do to improve latency. Improving upload bandwidth will always help if such an option does exist as if bandwidth is the problem, it's almost always upload and not download bandwidth. Switching the protocol may help, as especially SMB/CIFS doesn't work very well over Internet lines with bigger latency and if it has to fall back to an older protocol version (one older than SMB 3.0), it will be a catastrophe (up to not working at all anymore). A problem is that SMB and WebDAV are the only protocols that Windows supports natively, whereas macOS supports all the protocols named above natively, thus it's required to resort to third party products to teach Windows alternative protocols. In a pinch one can try to use WebDAV, but WebDAV has a rather poor performance even when used in local networks. Dedicated NAS devices usually support NFS when enabled, which could yield a better performance than SMB.
How do I access files over VPN on a Mac?
 
Opening files over VPN on your Mac is easy with VPN Tracker:
  1. Start your VPN connection in VPN Tracker
  2. Go to the Finder > Go To >Connect to Server
  3. In the Server Address field, enter the name or IP address of the server you want to connect to
  4. Click on the Connect button.

Create a VPN Shortcut:


VPN Tracker offers convenient shortcut options for frequently used connections. You only have to set up the shortcut once. Afterwards you will be able to connect to your VPN and open your files with just one button click.
Find out more:

I accidentally deleted or changed my VPN connection? Where can I access backups?
 

VPN Tracker automatically stores a backup of all your VPN connections on your Mac. If you have inadvertently deleted a connection, or wish to revert to an earlier copy of a connection, you can manually restore the backup copy.

1. Turn off Personal Safe syncing

You need to deactivate Personal Safe for the connections you're trying to restore from your backup, to prevent unwanted changes being synced:

  • Open VPN Tracker 365
  • From the menu bar, choose: VPN Tracker 365 > Preferences > Personal Safe
  • Uncheck the connections you want to restore from your backup
  • Quit VPN Tracker 365

2. Restore from your Backup

  • Open Finder and choose "Go" > "Go to Folder…" from the menu bar
  • Enter this path and press Return:
    /Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365
  • Rename your "etc" folder to "etc-backup" – for safekeeping
  • Go into the "backup" folder

Here you'll see a number of backup folders, all organized and named by date.

  • Move the "etc-date" folder you want to restore up one level into the main "VPN Tracker 365" folder
  • Rename the folder your just moved to just "etc" (deleting the date)
  • Open VPN Tracker 365

All of your connections will now be restored to their backed-up state.

3. Re-activate Personal Safe

  • Choose: VPN Tracker 365 > Preferences > Personal Safe from the menu bar
  • Check your connections, to add them to Personal Safe

Download VPN Tracker free

How do I set up a VPN connection to my Sophos XG Firewall?
 
Setting up a VPN connection to your Sophos XG Firewall is easy with VPN Tracker. The Sophos XG has its own unique device profile in the app with many of the required settings already in place; making configuration super straightforward. Use the Sophos XG configuration guide as a step-by-step walkthrough on how to set up a VPN on your device.
What is NAT-Traversal and how do I rule out problems with NAT-Traversal?
 

IPsec VPN uses a different protocol (ESP) for the actual data transfer than for establishing the connection (IKE). Since the ESP protocol does not use network ports, NAT (Network Address Translation) routers may have difficulties handling it correctly. Only NAT routers that support "IPSec Passthrough" (sometimes also named "VPN Passthrough" or "ESP Passtrhough") and where this option is also enabled, can handle ESP data packets.

To work around this problem, two alternative tunneling methods exist:

  • NAT-Traversal (old, RFC draft version)
  • NAT-Traversal (new, RFC standard version)

Which of these methods will work with your connection depends on two properties:

  1. Which of these methods allows traffic to pass through your local Internet router.
  2. Which of these methods are supported by your VPN remote gateway.

To test for the first property, VPN Tracker will automatically establish three VPN test connections to a VPN gateway hosted by us whenever it detects a new router that has not been tested before. One connection uses plain ESP, the other two either NAT-T method mentioned above. It will remember the test results for this router and take them into account whenever you start a connection from the network location. The reason we are testing with our own gateway is simply that the test requires a gateway supporting all three methods, with a known configuration and a simply way to verify if traffic did arrive at that gateway.

The second property is not tested in advance, VPN Tracker will become aware of that information when it actually tries to connect to your VPN gateway. VPN Tracker will compare the methods your gateway supports with the stored test results. If there is a match, a method that your gateway supports and that was also working during the test, this method will be used. If there is no match, VPN Tracker will immediately stop and show an appropriate error in the log, explaining the situation.

If you suspect a NAT-Traversal issue or you think the previous test results may be wrong or outdated, simply re-run the test:

‣ Make sure NAT-Traversal (Advanced tab) is set to Automatic
‣ Go to "Tools" > "Test VPN Availability"
‣ Click "Test Again"
‣ Wait until the test has completed, then connect to your VPN

The test dialog also allows you to tell VPN Tracker to not test the current location and forget any previously created test results. This is rarely needed and also not recommended but there might be situation where the test results are wrong because access to our VPN gateway is not possible (e.g. it is blocked) and thus the test result are just bogus and say nothing about the true capabilities of your VPN gateway.

How can I save my password for Cisco AnyConnect VPN client?
 
Unable to save your AnyConnect VPN password in the Cisco VPN client?

Here's the fix:


That's it! VPN Tracker will store your login details securely via end-to-end encryption so you can get connected faster – for the best VPN experience on Mac and iOS.
macOS is saying a System Extension is blocked?
 

Setting up VPN on your Mac

VPN Tracker is the leading VPN client for macOS and works seamlessly on all the latest macOS operating systems.
You can download and test VPN Tracker here free.

Launching VPN Tracker for Mac

The first time you launch VPN Tracker on your Mac, you may need to grant it permission to create VPN connections for you.

First please make sure VPN Tracker is in your Applications folder and complete these steps locally on the Mac (e.g. not over Screen Sharing, Remote Desktop or other remote access tool).

IMPORTANT: macOS notices when you run remote desktop systems like TeamViewer, Apple Remote Desktop, VNC or similar. and hides these buttons. You MUST be local to the Mac.

Then do this:
‣Open System Preferences
‣Go to Security
‣Click "Allow"

Now you'll be able to set up VPN Tracker.

Troubleshooting VPN Setup on macOS

If the "Allow" button can not be clicked, please make sure you are not using a 3rd party mouse or tablet input device, as these can look like remote desktop software to your Mac. If you are using e.g. a Wacom input tablet or mouse utility tool, try disabling those, reboot your Mac and then try clicking the button again.

In case the button doesn't even appear in the dialog, please note that if your Mac has a MDM profile installed, the MDM profile can forbid users to approve their own System Extensions. In that case the profile itself has to approve our extension. Please see technical notes below.

Technical note for Enterprise Rollouts:
VPN Tracker for Mac uses a System Extension to create a secure VPN tunnel and manage network traffic. macOS High Sierra and newer macOS versions now require users to manually approve all System Extensions. For Enterprise rollouts via MDM, you can also pre-approve the VPN Tracker Kernel Extension using a special profile. Our Team IDs are CPXNXN488S and MJMRT6WJ8S.
Please see Apple's Support Document for more details.

Not using an MDM managed Mac?
If your Mac is not MDM managed, please try rebooting, as macOS occasionally can get tripped up with System Extensions. After the reboot, VPN Tracker should work fine.
What is a Hash Mismatch?
 
If you are trying to establish a VPN connection in VPN Tracker and you are getting a "Hash Mismatch" error, here is what you need to know:

Hash Mismatch usually means that the Pre-Shared Key (PSK) being used is wrong. When you get the "Hash Mismatch" error, the Hash algorithm is being rejected. However, this is not due to choosing an incorrect "Hashing" algorithm for Phase 1. If the Hashing algorithm chosen is actually wrong, then you would receive an error that would say "No Proposal Chosen" rather than a "Hash Mismatch" error. This would suggest that the client and gateway could not agree on common crypto settings. On the other hand, Hash Mismatch actually means that the hash your gateway calculated doesn't match the hash that VPN Tracker calculated (the two hashes are simply not matching). This hash is calculated out of values exchanged between the client and the gateway and the Pre-Shared Key. As all other values have just been exchanged and have been verified by both sides to be correct (so these cannot cause a different hash, not unless either side has a terrible bug). The only value that isn't exchanged and cannot be checked in advanced is the Pre-Shared Key (PSK).
Is the equinux Online Store secure?
 

Purchasing through our online store is perfectly safe. All transferred information is encrypted via HTTPS - so it is secured against any potential threats.

How does the order process work?
 

Once you have decided which product to purchase, the next step is to proceed to our Online Store and place your order. We accept all major credit cards, PayPal and bank transfers or checks, depending on your country.

After your order has been processed you will receive a confirmation for your purchase. This will confirm the items purchased, and additional payment instructions if you're paying via bank transfer or check (in those cases you will also receive an additonal email confirming your payment when it has been processed.)

In the purchase confirmation email you will also receive additional information like the download links for your purchased apps.

If I have entered my settings in the demo version, will I keep them when I activate my license?
 

If you have entered information or have started to apply settings in your application demo, those changes will remain unchanged - even after activating the software.

VPN Tracker says my local and remote networks conflict. How do I fix this problem?
 

By default, traffic to the remote network cannot be sent through the VPN tunnel if it is using the same network as the local network.

Resolving a Network Conflict using Traffic Control

You can use Traffic Control and VPN Tracker will send non-essential local network traffic over the VPN.

Activate Traffic Control:
> Go to Advanced > Traffic Control
> Check "Force traffic over the VPN if remote networks conflict with local networks"

Note that you will never be able to reach the following addresses over VPN: The IP address of your local router, your DHCP server, and your DNS server(s). If you need to reach those IPs over VPN, you will have to resolve the network conflict instead of using Traffic Control. The same applies for any IPs that you need to reach locally and over VPN.

Resolving a Network Conflict Manually

You have two basic options for resolving a conflict:

  1. Change the local network to use a different network address. In most situations, this will entail changing the LAN settings on the local router (including DHCP settings if DHCP is used).
  2. Change the remote network to use a different network address. With most setups, this entails changing the LAN on the VPN gateway (including DHCP settings if DHCP is used), and changing the IPs used by devices on the VPN gateway's LAN (or triggering a DHCP refresh, if DHCP is used). If the LAN is used in the VPN settings (such as for policies or firewall rules), these will need to be changed as well. Finally, change the remote network in VPN Tracker to match the new settings

If you decide to change the remote network, it makes sense to choose a private network that less commonly used. According to our informal statistics, conflicts are least likely using these networks:

  • Subnets of 172.16.0.0/12
  • Subnets of 192.168.0.0/16, excluding 192.168.0.0/24, 192.168.1.0/24 and 192.168.168.0/24

If these are not an option, use a subnet of 10.0.0.0/8, excluding 10.0.0.0/24, 10.0.1.0/24, 10.1.0.0/24, 10.1.1.0/24. However, since wireless network operators sometimes choose to use the entire 10.0.0.0/8 network, the first two options are preferred.

If you have a more sophisticated VPN gateway, in particular a SonicWALL, you may be able to set up an alternative remote network on the VPN gateway that is mapped 1:1 through Network Address Translation (NAT) onto the actual network. Users can then connect to this network instead if they have a conflict of networks. We have a guide available that describes this approach for SonicWALL devices.

If the conflict is caused by virtual network interfaces (e.g. Parallels, VMware), see here for more information.

I forgot my equinux ID and/or password. What's next?
 

You can retrieve your equinux ID or password using this form.

If you don’t receive the email* containing your information, please note that the email may have mistakenly been marked as spam or junk mail, so be sure to check your email filters.

If you are unable to retrieve your username and password using the retrieval form, please contact the support team for assistance. When contacting us, please provide your old and new email adresses.

* Please note that the email will be sent to the address active on account. If your email address has since changed and you no longer have access to the previous account, you will need to contact the support team for assistance.

Does all network traffic go trough the VPN tunnel after the connection has been established?
 

This depends on your settings. The most common setup is “Host to Network“, in which case only traffic to the specified remote network(s) will go through the VPN tunnel.

With a “Host to Everywhere” setup, all traffic – except traffic to the local network(s) – goes through the VPN. A Host to Everywhere connection requires a suitable setup on the VPN gateway.

Do I need VPN Tracker Pro?
 

VPN Tracker Pro is a great asset if you are a consultant, a system or network administrator, or are working with multiple VPN connections:

  • Export VPN connections for yourself and other users.
  • Scan the remote network for services or to assist users.
  • Connect to multiple VPNs at the same time.
  • Manage a large number of VPNs using search, a condensed layout, and connection groups.
  • Configure your Mac as a router to provide the entire network with a VPN tunnel using Network to Network connections.
Where can I enter the username I received from my network administrator?
 

By itself, the IPsec protocol does not support usernames. If you were given a username from your network administrator for connecting to your corporate VPN solution, there are generally two possibilities:

  • Your corporate VPN solution uses the term "username" for "identifiers". Please try to use your username as the "Local Identifier" in VPN Tracker.
  • Your corporate VPN solution is using Extended Authentication (XAUTH). You can enable XAUTH in VPN Tracker. The software will then prompt for your username and password when the connection is being established.
Why do I have to submit my email address to download software?
 

We ask for your email address in order to track the flow of our downloads and, if selected, send you news and updates about the product you've downloaded.

All information collected by equinux is used internally and will never be shared with any third parties without your permission. For more information about equinux's stance on privacy and security, please refer to the equinux Privacy Policy.

If you do not want to receive our newsletter, just unsubscribe using the link at the bottom of every newsletter you receive.

Does VPN Tracker support one-time passcode (OTP) tokens, such as CRYPTOCard or RSA SecurID?
 

Yes, as long as your VPN gateway uses Extended Authentication (XAUTH) to request the passcode, you can use any third party token with VPN Tracker.

Does VPN Tracker work on PC?
 
No, VPN Tracker is designed exclusively for the macOS platform.
Does VPN Tracker support XAUTH?
 
Yes, VPN Tracker does support Extended Authentication (XAUTH).
What are the system requirements for VPN Tracker?
 
VPN Tracker for Mac is fully compatible with:

  • macOS 15.0 Sequoia
  • macOS 14.0 Sonoma
  • macOS 13.0 Ventura
  • macOS 12.0 Monterey
  • macOS 11.0 Big Sur
  • macOS 10.15 Catalina
  • macOS 10.14 Mojave
  • macOS 10.13 High Sierra



What is the difference between VPN Tracker and the built-in VPN feature in macOS?
 
The VPN client in macOS supports the "L2TP over IPsec" standard, but it doesn't support the newer IPsec VPN or OpenVPN industry standards found on most third party VPN devices.

VPN Tracker supports IPsec (IKEv1 + IKEV2), L2TP, PPTP, OpenVPN, SSL, SSTP, and WireGuard® VPN and has predefined settings designed to work with the majority of VPN devices on the market. We also offer configuration guides that explain in detailed steps exactly how-to set up your VPN device.

In addition to being compatible with more devices than macOS, VPN Tracker also makes working over VPN much more comfortable: VPN Shortcuts make connecting to the file servers, applications and devices over VPN as easy as working locally.

Since macOS Sierra 10.12 the macOS built in VPN client no longer supports PPTP connections. In order to start a PPTP connection on a Mac running macOS High Sierra or newer, you will need to use an external VPN client like VPN Tracker.
Can I use VPN Tracker connections from Parallels, VM Ware Fusion or any other virtualization environments?
 

Yes, this is possible. If you set up shared networking for the guest operating system it shares the network connection of your Mac and you can access all network resources that are accessible from OS X.

Note that if you are using remote DNS for your VPN connection, you will need to manually enter the DNS server in your guest operating system in order for it to work – there is no way for VPN Tracker to “transmit” this setting to the guest operating system

For information on how to set up VPN Tracker with Parallels, check out our VPN Tracker with Parallels Configuration Guide.

Can you guarantee that VPN Tracker will work in my network?
 

Unfortunately, we cannot guarantee this. Secure networking is a complex subject. VPN Tracker is extremely reliable and is used by customers around the world. But there are some rare scenarios in which VPN connections cannot be established (e.g. when a firewall is set up to actively block VPN connections).

We recommend using the free trial version to test VPN Tracker with your particular network and usage scenario.

If you require any assistance setting up your VPN connection with VPN Tracker, you can contact equinux support at any time.

"> I am using the Option "comp-lzo no" in my OpenVPN connection and I have trouble creating a connection with VPN Tracker.
 
The option "comp-lzo no" is considered depricated and will not be supported by future OpenVPN clientsor servers. Don't use this option on your server.
The recommendation of the OpenVPN developers is to best not use this option at all anymore. It is better toeither activate compression ("comp-lzo yes"), or to not use any compression at all (in this case the option "comp-lzo" should not even appearin the configuration).
The Optiome "comp-lzo no" doesn't mean "no compression", it means "compression only if the server requests it." Because of this the "comp-lzo" option is being replaced by the new option "compress", which partially shows a different behavior and thus is not backward compatible.
Is it true that IKEv1 Aggressive Mode is less secure than IKEv1 Main Mode?
 

A couple of years ago, a team of security experts released a paper describing an attack that can break an IKEv1 Aggressive Mode Pre-Shared Key connection using an attack that would not equally have been possible with an IKEv1 Main Mode Pre-Shared Key connection, leading to the incorrect assumption that Aggressive Mode is inherently insecure. This claim, however, is not backed up by objective facts. What most people don't know, part of that attack was the ability to guess the Pre-Shared Key (PSK) using a brute force attack and such a brute force attack can only be successful if the PSK is weak. A PSK is also just a password and as with every password, choosing a weak password always leads to poor security. As long as your PSK is at least 14 characters long (the longer the better), consists out of lower case letters, upper case letters and digits, and was randomly generated, so it's impossible to somehow guess it, and as long as your Phase 1 hash algorithm is at least SHA1 (or better, we recommend SHA-256 if possible), there's absolutely no reason to consider IKEv1 Aggressive Mode with Pre-Shared Key as less secure than IKEv1 Main Mode with Pre-Shared Key. If you want to be even more secure, switch to certificate based authentication instead of PSK if possible as then the attack is not possible at all.

Technical background:

The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) is not a password used for encryption of any data, it's used for authentication, just when you log in to a website using a username and a password. During Phase 1, both sides must prove to each other to know the PSK. This cannot be done by just sending it to the other side, as if the other side didn't know it before, it will know it after receiving it. Instead both sides calculate a number (a hash digest) out of data they exchanged so far (data that will be different every time you start a new connection, which ensures the calculated value will be as well) and the PSK. Only this digest is send to other side. The other side can now verify that digest by performing the same calculations and comparing the result with the digest received. If both are equal, the sender must have used the same PSK in the calculation, which proves knowledge of the PSK. Then the receiver also calculates such a digest, using a slightly different formula as before, leading to an entirely different result, and sends it back in reply to also prove its knowledge.

The differences between Main Mode and Aggressive Mode is simply that in Main Mode the digest is exchanged encrypted because the session key exchange already negotiated a session encryption key when the digest is exchanged, whereas in Aggressive Mode it is exchanged unencrypted as part of the key exchange that will lead to a session key. By snooping the connection establishment of an Aggressive Mode connection, the attackers were able to get the digest as well as all values required to calculate that digest, except for the PSK itself. Please note that this alone doesn't mean the connection is broken already, it only means that the attackers now have enough data to start guessing the PSK using a brute force or dictionary attack. Only if the PSK is too weak to withstand those attacks and the attackers are able to correctly guess it, the connection will be broken. That's why a good, secure PSK is essential.

The same attack is in fact also possible with a Main Mode PSK connection, it just requires some extra work. For a Main Mode connection it's not enough to just snoop the traffic, the attackers would need to perform a so called Man-in-the-Middle (MitM) attack, allowing them to capture and manipulate all traffic exchanged. By performing a MitM attack, attackers can break the key exchange and thus will be able to decrypt all the exchanged packets. Doing so will not make it possible to break into your VPN, they still need to know the PSK for that, otherwise they cannot successfully authenticate to the other side and then Phase 1 will never complete, but that way they can get all the information required to start guessing on the PSK, just as in case of a an Aggressive Mode connection. And if an attacker is already able to snoop on your VPN traffic (which is required to attack Aggressive Mode), it's very likely that attacker is equally possible to perform a MitM attack and in that case using Main Mode will not offer you any additional protection.

A PSK out of 11 random alphanumeric characters offers an entropy of approx. 64 bits, that's 2^64 possible values. Modern high end graphics adapter (as of 2015) can calculate in the order of 1 billion SHA-256 hashes a second. On average one has to try 50% of all possible values to find a match, wich would be about 292 years. Yet if the attackers have an array of 100 such graphics adapters, it would "only" be around 3 years. If the PSK is 14 characters, the entropy is about 80 bits and you are already at 19,154,798 years. Now even having 10,000 graphics adapters would help a lot. Also one must consider the costs of such an attack, which is not so much the cost of buying all these graphics adapters, rather their power consumption when all these graphics adapters run at maximum current 24 hours a day and that for years, decades, or even centuries. The power costs will be billions of dollar and all that to just break one single PSK connection in the entire world. And whenever you change the PSK, an attacker must start all over, so if you change the PSK regularly, let's say once a year, an attacker has at most one year to find it; that's very ambitious, even for a weak PSK.

Why is Skype unable to make calls as soon as my VPN Tunnel is up?
 

Symptom

As soon as you connect your VPN tunnel, Skype is not able to make calls any longer, however calls started prior to connecting the VPN continue to work.

Solution

Make sure the field Local Address is not empty. If it is, fill in a private IP address. A private IP address has the following form:

  • 192.168.x.x
  • 10.x.x.x
  • 172.y.x.x

x: A number of the range 0 to 255.
y: A number of the range 16 to 31.

Only rule: It must not be an IP address from a remote network on the other side of the VPN tunnel (must not partially match an entry of the field "Remote Networks"), as choosing such an address will make the tunnel stop working (it will connect, but you cannot really reach anything over it).

Alternate Solutions

If the solution above does not fix your issues, make sure that

  • DNS resolution still works once the VPN tunnel is up.
     
  • Public Internet servers are still reachable once the VPN tunnel is up.
     
  • In case of a Host to Everywhere connection, make sure the VPN gateway does not block any network traffic that is crucial for Skype to work.
     

Explanation

VPN Tracker creates a virtual tunnel interface for every VPN tunnel. Like any network interface, this virtual tunnel interface requires an IP address to be functional as an IP network interface. If your VPN gateway assigns you an IP address, the assigned address is applied to the tunnel interface. If not, the address you put into Local Address will be used. If you leave local address empty, the IP address of your primary network interface will be used.

In the last case, your system ends up with two interfaces with identical IP addresses. This is allowed and usually not a problem, unless a software does “stupid things”, like querying the network interface for a given IP address and then ignoring the order of precedence of the returned results.


What do I have to consider for the "Lifetime" settings for IKE/IPSec tunnels?
 
The main reason why the lifetime of IPSec tunnels is limited is security. The longer a tunnel is alive, the more time an attacker has for an attack and the more data is encrypted with the same session key, which reduces the effort for attackers to find the key.

The IKE Phase 1 tunnel is only used to ensure a secure connection between VPN client and VPN gateway, comparable to a TLS connection (i.e. HTTPS instead of HTTP). Only IKE messages are exchanged via the Phase 1 tunnel, which are used to keep the Phase 1 connection alive and to negotiate Phase 2 tunnels if necessary. The Phase 1 tunnel has no influence on the VPN speed, only on the initial connection setup, so there is never any reason why you should not always work with the strongest protection in Phase 1, that both sides can support. Since very little data is ever sent through the Phase 1 tunnel, there is no reason not to choose a very long lifetime.

The Phase 2 tunnels are used to encrypt the actual data traffic, so the settings here directly influence the overhead, latency and speed of the VPN connection and must be weighed against the security. Also, large amounts of data are encrypted via the Phase 2 tunnels, so you should not set their lifetime too high. If possible, it is always recommended to use Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) in Phase 2, which slows down the Phase 2 connection setup a bit, but completely decouples Phase 2 cryptographically from Phase 1, since an independent session key is negotiated and not derived from the session key of Phase 1.

The lifetimes of the two phases are basically independent of each other. A Phase 2 tunnel may continue to exist, even if the Phase 1 tunnel over that it was negotiated no longer exists. Thus, Phase 1 may have a shorter lifetime than Phase 2. VPN Tracker always negotiates new tunnels in time before the lifetime expires, so that the connection is normally never interrupted. With Phase 2, the tunnels are seamlessly connected, meaning that not a single data packet is lost during the exchange. This is why even with a very short lifetime of just a few minutes, the impression of an uninterrupted connection is created. Frequent changes of Phase 2 tunnels only lead to a little more data traffic and a little more computing work on both sides of the connection.

Important Notes


The lifetime of the tunnels is explicitly not negotiated. The standard allows that a tunnel has different lifetimes on both sides of the connection. The side, where the lifetime expires first, determines the further procedure. Only if VPN Tracker is that side, it can determine what happens next, otherwise VPN Tracker can only react passively. The latter will always result in a short interruption or even a complete loss of the connection in case of Phase 1. For Phase 2, it depends on whether the other side wants to actively negotiate new Phase 2 tunnels or only deletes the existing ones; the latter also leads to a short-term connection loss.

It's always best to set VPN Tracker to the same lifetime as the other side, because VPN Tracker will always try to intervene in time to avoid a connection loss.

Since there are also IKE/IPSec implementations that delete all Phase 2 tunnels as soon as the corresponding Phase 1 tunnel is deleted, it's always a good idea to select Phase 1 on devices to match the maximum VPN session time expected.
My VPN connection isn’t working over my TP-Link router at home
 
If you have a TP-Link router for your local internet access and are having trouble connecting to a VPN with a connection that works at other locations, please try the following.
Sign in to your TP-Link router admin webpage
Find the VPN passthrough settings
Uncheck and then re-check all the VPN passthrough options
Apply the settings

This should reset an internal parameter and allow your connection to work as expected.
I've lost my equinux ID or my password!
 

Don't worry – it happens to all of us!

Just head on over to our login retrieval page, enter your equinux ID or email address and we'll send you your details.

Recently changed your e-mail address? Send us a message!

How do I improve the performance of file sharing (AFP or SMB) over VPN?
 

With both SMB (Windows File Sharing) and AFP (Apple File Sharing), low latency connections are key to achieving good performance. This is of course assuming that you already have a connection with reasonable bandwidth in between the two VPN endpoints (this can be easily verified by transferring a larger file through HTTP or FTP).

Using SSL VPN? Switch to IPSec

In comparison to SSL VPN, IPSec is able to offer much faster connection speeds as it runs on the network layer – level 3 of the OSI – meaning it’s much closer to the physical hardware. This will give you a faster VPN performance.

Learn more in this blog post.

Finder Settings

If you are using the Finder and the issue is mostly with listing folders (but not so much when actually copying files), try turning off icons/icon previews in the Finder's View Options (Cmd-J).

Reducing Latency

If you experience performance issues both when listing folders and when transferring files, your aim should be to reduce latency. Some ways to reduce latency include:

  • Avoid high-latency Internet uplinks (e.g. satellite, some types of wireless providers, line aggregation, ...).
  • When using a DSL line, see with your ISP if you can get "fast path" enabled (= interleaving turned off). ISPs sometimes market this as an option for online gaming, but it's also very helpful for AFP/SMB or connecting to some types of database backends.
  • Make sure VPN traffic is appropriately prioritized in order not to be slowed down by someone else using the same Internet connection.

To measure latency between the two endpoints of the VPN, use ping to a host on the other end of the connection (or, when pinging from the client end, ping the VPN gateway). For your convenience, VPN Tracker has a ping utility built right in, it can be found in the Tools menu.

To measure latency of each endpoint's individual uplink, it's often helpful to do a ping the local router (to make sure there are no unnecessary latencies introduced in the local network) and the ISP's first router (to get an idea if enabling fast path or switching ISPs may be a suitable measure to decrease latency).

If you cannot reduce latency any further:

If you are in a situation where you cannot reduce latency any further (or where the base latency from the distance between the two endpoints itself is so large local measures won't make much difference), consider switching to a file transfer protocol that is less vulnerable to latency, e.g. WebDAV or FTP, or use measures such as reducing the number of files and folders in a hierarchy to increase performance.

How can I connect to my WatchGuard Firebox Edge device with VPN Tracker?
 

Current Firmware (Fireware XTM)

WatchGuard Firebox X Edge e-Series devices with Fireware XTM (Fireware 11) are fully supported in current versions of VPN Tracker. For details please see our configuration guide.

Older Firmware

Devices running an older firmware may often work using the following setup. Please note however that we can't guarantee that this setup will work in all cases.

Start by creating a new user on the Firebox Edge and then configure MUVPN support for this user.

In VPN Tracker, use a "Custom Connection" device profile as the basis for your new connection.

Map the WatchGuard settings to your VPN Tracker configuration as shown in the table below:

WatchguardVPN Tracker
Account NameLocal Identifier
Shared KeyPreshared Key
Virtual IP AddressLocal Address
Authentication AlgorithmPhase 1 and Phase 2 Hash/Authentication Algorithms
Encryption AlgorithmPhase 1 and Phase 2 Encryption Algorithms
Key expiration in hoursPhase 1 and Phase 2 Lifetime

The following settings are independent of your specific MUVPN configuration:

  • Local Identifier Type: Email (even if it is a name and not an email address)
  • Exchange Mode: Aggressive
  • Phase 1 Diffie-Hellman Group: Group 2 (1024 bit)
  • Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS): off

Finally make sure the that VPN Tracker's "Network" setting is set to "Host to Network", and the correct Remote Network (i.e. the network that you want connect to through the VPN) is used (e.g. 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0).

How do I set up a VPN Shortcut?
 
Setting up Shortcuts to your most important services in VPN Tracker 365 is easy and will drastically improve your workflow.

To get started, go to "File" > "New" > "VPN Shortcuts"

Open the Shortcuts Dock by clicking on the arrow to reveal all available Shortcuts in VPN Tracker 365. Then, drag out the icon for the application or service you would like to configure (e.g. internal website).



Now configure your Shortcut by filling in all the requested information as prompted by VPN Tracker 365. If you are unsure of any details, your network admin or a member of our support team will be able to help you get set up.



Continue this process until you have built up a collection of Shortcuts for all your most-used external services. Then, exit the editing mode by clicking again on the arrow at the bottom of the window to close the Shortcuts Dock:



To test your Shortcut, simply click on the icon. This should launch your VPN connection and instantly start up your service.

Want to see Shortcuts in action? This 2 minute video tutorial shows you how to set up VPN Shortcuts in VPN Tracker 365:




Does VPN Tracker for Mac support macOS Sequoia?
 

VPN Tracker for Mac fully supports all the latest macOS versions, including macOS Sequoia

Starting from macOS 11, Apple have made some key changes to the macOS security architecture. VPN Tracker for Mac offers full support for all the latest macOS versions. This includes support for: IPsec VPN, IKEv2 (Beta), OpenVPN, L2TP VPN, PPTP VPN, SonicWall SSL VPN, Fortinet SSL VPN, Windows SSTP VPN, Cisco AnyConnect VPN and WireGuard® VPN.

Tip: Sign up for VPN Tracker Insider Updates to get Beta releases as soon as they are available.

WireGuard® is a registered trademark of Jason A. Donenefeld.

How to migrate a Windows PPTP VPN connection to a Mac
 
Migrating an existing Windows PPTP VPN connection to a Mac may sound daunting, but with VPN Tracker 365 the process is quick and easy. By the end, you will be able to connect your Mac to your PPTP VPN connection and continue working as normal.

Here's how it works:
  1. Find your PPTP VPN connection settings in the Control Panel of your Windows PC
  2. Start VPN Tracker 365 on your Mac and click the "+" to create a new PPTP connection
  3. Copy the connection settings from the first step into the configuration window
  4. Finally, start up your PPTP connection to test


You can now use your Windows PPTP VPN connection on your Mac, thanks to VPN Tracker 365. If you require a more detailed walkthrough, please check out this step-by-step PDF guide: Migrating a Windows PPTP VPN Configuration

Find out more about PPTP VPN under macOS Big Sur
How can I upgrade to the latest VPN Tracker version?
 

If you are an existing VPN Tracker customer and want to upgrade to VPN Tracker 365, you can simply install VPN Tracker 365 and your connections will automatically be imported:

Download VPN Tracker 365

Once you have VPN Tracker 365, you can purchase a VPN Tracker 365 plan.

Kann ich mein Fritzbox VPN so konfigurieren, dass nicht der gesamte Internetverkehr darüber geht?
 
Sie können mit VPN Tracker 365 Ihre VPN Verbindung so konfigurieren, dass nur Verbindungen ihr Ihr Netzwerk darüber geht. Normales Surfen im Web nutzt dann Ihre ganze normale Internetverbindung.

Sie können mit unserer VPN Wizard App für FritzBox eine neue Verbindung entsprechend konfigurieren.



Ihre neue VPN Verbindung für Fritzbox können es mit der kostenlosen VPN Tracker 365 Demo testen:
http://www.vpntracker.com/de/download.html#vpnt365
What ist XAUTH? What do I have to enter there?
 
The XAUTH password is generally your company login. It is NOT your equinux ID. Your XAUTH is stored on your VPN gateway or on some remote server your VPN gateway asks for authentication (LDAP server, RADIUS server, Active Directory Server, etc.). If you do not know it, or need to reset it, ask your System Admin for help on this.

VPN Tracker or equinux have nothing to do with this password. Your VPN gateway just tells VPN Tracker "Ask the user for a username and a password and tell me what the user has entered" and that is what VPN Tracker does and in respond to the information the gateway replies "Sorry, but that is not valid username-password-combination, I can't let you in, bye".
In VPN Tracker you can just click on the blue label next to the XAUTH setting and the XAUTH dialog will appear; just overwrite the existing values with new values.
See page 16 in our manual

How do I set up an OpenVPN connection to my NETGEAR Nighthawk device?
 
Setting up an OpenVPN connection to your NETGEAR Nighthawk device on Mac, iPhone or iPad is easy with VPN Tracker. VPN Tracker has a device profile specifically set up to work with the NETGEAR Nighthawk range, which means configuration is super straightforward.

With the help of this configuration guide, you'll be up and running with your NETGEAR Nighthawk in no time.
How can I get access to Beta updates for VPN Tracker 365?
 
Beta versions are soon to be released versions of VPN Tracker 365. We like to release beta versions to allow users to give us feedback on new features we've been developing before we roll them out to the general public.

If you would like to become part of our beta testing program, you will need to activate access to early release versions in the app.
  1. Open the VPN Tracker 365 app and go to "VPN Tracker 365" > "Preferences"
  2. Next to "Update", check the box "Get early access to Pre-Release versions"
  3. From the drop down menu, select "Beta versions"



Tip: Next to "Update" you can also check "Automatically check for updates". This way, VPN Tracker 365 will inform you whenever a new beta version is available for testing.

Are you an experienced IT admin wanting to take things one step further? Check out our Nightly builds...

If you run into issues on a beta version and want to get back to an older build, you can always find our latest official release on the version history page. Please also note that you can deactivate beta testing at any time by unchecking the box in your app preferences.
What is an equinux ID?
 

Your equinux ID is your personal account at equinux. You can use it to purchase and activate products & licenses.

The first time you shop in our online store, you'll be asked to create an equinux ID. After your purchase, software licenses are automatically linked to your equinux ID and can be activated by simply entering the same equinux ID and password you used during purchase.

Retail boxes and certain products may still require an Activation Code. Once entered, the product will be linked to your equinux ID.

If you have forgotten your equinux ID and/or password, use our login & password retrieval form.

I want to transfer my license to another person. How can I do that?
 

If you need to transfer a license to another equinux ID, you can easily do this yourself at my equinux.

‣ First log in with your equinux ID and password: http://my.equinux.com
‣ Click the checkboxes for each product that you want to transfer
‣ Click the "Transfer" button below and enter the equinux ID or email address of the new license owner and click next.       
‣ Finally click "Confirm" to complete the transfer. The system will transfer the license, display a message and email both the old and new license owner that the license has been transferred.

VPN Tracker 365 Plans cannot be transfered to another equinux ID. However, under https://my.vpntracker.com you can assign a plan to a colleague so they can use one of the VPN Tracker 365 plans that are connected to your account.
This is especially useful if you are the admin of all VPN Tracker licenses in your company and want to manage who can use one of the purchased plans.

How can I connect to a WireGuard® VPN server?
 
To connect to a WireGuard® VPN server - e.g. in order to remotely connect to your home network -, you need a VPN client app. VPN Tracker supports WireGuard® VPN connections on Mac, iPhone and iPad!

To get connected, follow these 3 steps:
  1. Open VPN Tracker and add a new WireGuard® connection
  2. Upload your WireGuard® configuration file or scan your QR code
  3. Save your connection to your account using secure end-to-end encryption



You can now connect to your WireGuard® VPN server on Mac, iPhone or iPad.

→ More information on connecting to WireGuard® VPN in VPN Tracker

WireGuard® is a registered trademark of Jason A. Donenfeld.
What are the requirements for SonicWALL Simple Client Provisioning with VPN Tracker?
 

SonicWALL Simple Client Provisioning with VPN Tracker is available with all SonicWALLs running SonicOS 4.0 or newer and all editions of VPN Tracker.

If you are still using VPN Tracker 6 or earlier, Professional or Player Edition is required.

I have a PPTP connection setup and can not connect. What can I do?
 
If you see this error: "LCP timeout" or "LCP: timeout sending Config-Requests", here are two things to check:
1. To use PPTP behind a NAT router, your router must support "PPTP Passthrough" and this option also needs to be enabled.

Please ensure that your router supports "PPTP Passthrough" and please ensure it is also enabled. Check your router's manual. If your router has no support for it, you may have to replace it if you require to use PPTP.

2. Please also check if your ISP is running "DS Lite" connection to you. With "DS Lite", users only get private IP addresses that are network address translated at the provider and this is usually incompatible with PPTP. You require a public IPv4 address or switch to a different VPN protocol. Call your ISP and ask for "a public IPv4 address".
How to connect to a company VPN
 
If you are working from home and need to connect to VPN, your admin will send you a connection file which you can import into the VPN Tracker 365 app.



This is the pre-configured VPN connection that you need in order to connect your Mac to your office network and access your internal services.

Here's how it works:

  • Double click the connection file to import into VPN Tracker 365.
  • Enter the import password - your network admin will give this to you.
  • Now, click the toggle switch to connect to your VPN. Note: If you are asked to enter user credentials, your admin will tell you which login you need to use.


This video tutorial shows you how to get started with your company VPN:



Which hardware (MAC) address will be used for DHCP over VPN with SonicWall devices?
 

When connecting via SonicWall SCP or SonicWall IKEv1 with DHCP, VPN Tracker 365 for Mac requests an IP address from the SonicWall gateway using the DHCP protocol. For this request, VPN Tracker 365 modifies the MAC address slightly, making it different from the actual MAC address of your device. This allows administrators to assign a fixed IP address when your Mac is connected via LAN or WiFi and a different IP when it’s connected through VPN.

This modification sets a specific bit in the MAC address, marking it as a self-assigned address rather than a factory-assigned one.

Example:
Original MAC address: 00:1B:63:B7:42:23
VPN Tracker MAC address: 02:1B:63:B7:42:23

Starting with macOS 15 Sequoia, Apple defaults to using a rotating MAC address for WiFi connections, labeled as a “Private Wi-Fi Address” in System Settings. To prevent connectivity issues related to this feature, VPN Tracker 365 reports the actual hardware address (with the minor modification described above) instead of the one used in “Rotating” or “Fixed” modes.

On iOS, VPN Tracker cannot retrieve a MAC address directly. Instead, it generates a random value once and stores it for future use. VPN Tracker for iOS then uses this stored value as the MAC address.

Which VPN Protocols does VPN Tracker support?
 
VPN Tracker for Mac, iPhone and iPad support all major VPN-Protocols, including:
  • IPsec
  • IKEv2 (Beta)
  • L2TP (only macOS)
  • PPTP (only macOS)
  • OpenVPN
  • SSTP VPN
  • Cisco AnyConnect SSL VPN
  • SonicWall SSL VPN
  • Fortinet SSL VPN
  • WireGuard® VPN
Note that protocol support may vary by edition, check our online store for details.
How can I get access to Nightly updates for VPN Tracker 365?
 
Nightly builds are exclusive early preview versions of cutting edge, new features that the development team has been working on. We release these to give experienced IT admins the chance to work alongside us and test our latest work even before the beta release.

If you would like access to Nightly builds, you need to activate access to early release versions in the app.
  1. Open the VPN Tracker 365 app and go to "VPN Tracker 365" > "Preferences"
  2. Next to "Update", check the box "Get early access to Pre-Release versions"
  3. From the drop down menu, select "Nightly Builds"



Tip: Next to "Update" you can also check "Automatically check for updates". This way, VPN Tracker 365 will inform you whenever a new Nightly build is available for testing.

Not sure you're up for Nightly testing? If you want to test a more ready-to-launch version of VPN Tracker before it goes live, our beta testing program is another great alternative.

If you run into issues on a Nightly version and want to get back to an older build, you can always find our latest official release on the version history page. Please also note that you can deactivate Nightly testing at any time by unchecking the box in your app preferences.
I’m having trouble connecting to my Sonicwall using the “Sonicwall Mobile Connect for Mac and iOS” client on my Mac and iOS devices. Every time I try to establish a connection, I receive the message “This is not a SonicWall SSL VPN server.” What should I do?
 
Sonicwall has been experiencing various issues with its iOS and Mac VPN client ("„Sonicwall Mobile Connect") recently.

An error message appears during setup:
'Your Sonicwall' is either currently unreachable or is not a valid SonicWall appliance. Would you like to save this connection anyway?

When starting the connection, the following appears:
Connection Error
'Your Sonicwall' is not a SonicWall SSL VPN server.

In such cases, we recommend switching to VPN Tracker. VPN Tracker is available for both Mac and iOS. An added advantage is that once a connection is set up, it’s immediately available on both devices, as VPN Tracker securely syncs the settings through the Personal Safe.

Update September 2024: SonicWall has introduced another update with SonicOS 6.5.4.15-116n, which has rendered SSL VPN functionality non-operational for many SonicWall devices.

Update November 2024: This issue seems to be addressed by the SonicOS 6.5.4.15-117n update. For more information, please visit:
https://www.sonicwall.com/support/knowledge-base/mobile-connect-breaks-after-upgrade-to-sonicos-6-5-4-15/240903132324983
How to set 'Use default gateway for remote network' for VPN on a Mac
 
Importing your Windows SSTP connection into VPN Tracker 365 to use on your Mac? VPN Tracker 365 supports all the custom configuration options you need to use your VPN flexibly.

Don't want to run all your traffic through the VPN? You can configure the connection to "Host to Network" to only send network-relevant traffic through the VPN.

Once you have selected "Host to network", you can connect and VPN Tracker 365 will automatically set a route to just send data for the network behind your VPN and route all other traffic (i.e. personal traffic) separately through your normal internet connection.



Note, this will give you the same behaviour as unchecking the "use default gateway on remote network" option on Windows.
Importing existing VPN Connections from your Mac
 
Importing a pre-existing VPN connection from your Mac to use in VPN Tracker 365 is straightforward.

Open the VPN Tracker 365 app, then go to File > Import > System VPN Connections.



VPN Tracker will then search your Mac for compatible VPN connections which you can use in VPN Tracker 365.
What is Personal Safe? Why should I use Personal Safe?
 

VPN Tracker Personal Safe is secure encrypted cloud storage for your personal VPN connections and shortcuts.

How to save a connection in Personal Safe

Not sure if your VPN connection is backed up? The safe icon in the connection list indicates whether a connection has been stored in your Personal Safe:

To add a connection to your Personal Safe, simply right click the connection and select 'Add to Personal Safe' for access across all your devices.

Why should I use Personal Safe?
VPN Tracker Personal Safe makes using VPN more reliable and secure:

Security
Personal Safe adds an additional level of security to your connections: all your connection details are encrypted using a highly-secure key (Argon3 + PKTNY) that only you can unlock.

Backup
Lost iPhone? Broken Mac? Personal Safe keeps your connections safe, so you can instantly get them on your replacement device. Sign in with your secure key and they are instantly downloaded and ready to go.

Use your connections on all your devices
iMac at home and iPad for the road? Your Personal Safe keeps your connections synced across all your devices – securely and effortlessly.


How are connections stored?
When you add a connection to your Personal Safe, it is encrypted using your personal encryption keys and then uploaded to a secure cloud storage location. It can only be accessed with your user credentials and encryption key.


Is Personal Safe secure?
Personal Safe has been designed from scratch for VPN connections. Unlike other storage systems that rely on passwords and leave files unencrypted, Personal Safe encrypts all your connections with keys that only you can use.

That means connections are

• Encrypted on your device and
• Stored on encrypted storage at my.vpntracker.com that only you can access

Even if someone could get access to your Personal Safe, the key-based security means they can't access the encrypted connection information without your password.

We've designed the system so no-one (including the VPN Tracker team) can access or unlock your connections.

How can I connect to a Cisco VPN?
 

Configuration guides for configuring VPN Tracker with Cisco devices are available here.

Configuration guides for Cisco Small Business (Linksys) devices are available here.


Import of Cisco IPsec VPN Client Configuration Files (.pcf)

Cisco VPN Client configuration files that use group password authentication can be imported into VPN Tracker:

‣ "File" > "Import 3rd Party Configuration" > "Cisco .pcf"
Having issues with my VPN connection. How do I create a Technical Support Report (TSR) on Mac, iPhone &iPad?
 

A Technical Support Report contains your VPN Tracker settings and relevant network and system settings that our technical support team needs to be able to assist you quickly. Confidential data (e.g passwords, pre-shared keys, private keys) are not included in a Technical Support Report (TSR).

How to create a Technical Support Report on a Mac:

‣ Click on your VPN connection in VPN Tracker 365.
‣ In the bottom right corner under the "Status" tab, you will see the TSR button.
‣ Click the button to generate the report and follow the instructions to send to our support team.
How to create a Technical Support Report on an iPhone/iPad:
‣ Tap on the connection. The connection card appears.
‣ Tap on “Feedback”
‣ Provide a short description of the connection problem
‣ Tap on Send

If you have an issue connecting to the VPN in the first place, please make a connection attempt right before creating the Technical Support Report, then create the Technical Support Report as soon as the connection attempt has failed.

If you can connect to the VPN, but something is not working right after the connection has been established, please establish the VPN connection, then create the Technical Support Report while the VPN is connected.

You can either email the report directly to our support team from VPN Tracker 365, or save it to email later or from a different computer, or to upload it using the contact form on our website:

Whenever possible, also include screenshots of the VPN setup on your VPN gateway.



My credit card is not being accepted. What can I do?
 

If your credit card is being refused, please check the following information, for possible mistakes or mismatches :

  • Please check the credit card number you have entered carefully for possible typos
  • Make sure the expiration date entered is correct
  • Check whether the security code you entered matches the code on your card: American Express cardholders can find the 4-digit code on the front of their card, other cardholders can usually find a 3-digit code on the back.
  • Try another credit card, if you have access to one
  • If you are certain your information is correct and your card is still not being accepted, it might be due to a technical issue with our credit card gateway. Please try again later.

How can I uninstall VPN Tracker 365?
 

VPN Tracker strictly follows Apple’s recommendation regarding where to place its files, so you will find VPN Tracker files only in standard system locations where they belong. Depending on the fact if these are system-wide or per-user files, they are either found in /Library (system-wide) or ~/Library (per-user), where ~ is a placeholder meaning "home of the current active user".

To access the system-wide library folder:

    ‣ In Finder Choose "Go" > "Go to Folder ..." 
    ‣ Enter /Library

To access the user library folder:

    ‣ In Finder Choose "Go" > "Go to Folder ..." 
    ‣ Enter ~/Library
To Remove VPN Tracker, remove the following files and folders:

  • /Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365
     
  • ~/Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365
     
  • /Library/Preferences/com.vpntracker.365mac.plist
     
  • ~/Library/Preferences/com.vpntracker.365mac.plist
     
  • /Library/PrivilegedHelperTools/com.vpntracker.365mac.agent
     
  • /Library/PrivilegedHelperTools/com.vpntracker.365mac.connectiond
     
  • /Library/LaunchDaemons/com.vpntracker.365mac.plist
     
  • All system extensions are found in the folder /Library/Extensions/com.vpntracker.365mac.*
     
  • Tip: Also remember to check your Keychain for VPN Tracker items (search for "VPN Tracker")

    Note: Some of these files may be currently loaded by the system, and some may be cached. To make your system as clean as if VPN Tracker had never been installed on it, you will also need to uninstall the application itself and then reboot your system. After the reboot, the system will automatically remove any remaining VPN Tracker components not mentioned above, as those reference the application itself and will vanish as soon as the application is gone (some of those can otherwise not be deleted).

    Mac OS X: VPN Tunnel Setup
     
    In order to set up a VPN Tunnel under Mac OS X, you will need the following:
    • VPN Tracker 365: Download here
    • An internet connection
    • A VPN Router/Gateway


    Create a new connection


    In VPN Tracker 365, try the following:
    ‣ Click on the plus symbol in the bottom left corner:

    ‣ Choose: "New Company Connection"


    Choose your VPN Router


    ‣ In the list of VPN Gateway vendors, choose the manufacturer and model of your VPN router. In case your VPN router does not appear in the list, try the following:
    ‣ Choose "Use custom device profile."
    ‣ Click on "Create" to add your VPN connection.

    Your configuration guide


    Our engineers have tested a large number of VPN gateways with VPN Tracker. For many of these, detailed configuration guides are available. In the newly created connection, you will be able to find the router specific configuration guide:



    Alternatively you will be able to find the configuration guides on our website at http://vpntracker.com/interop


    Further details for creating your VPN connection on Mac OS X can be found in the configuration guide or in the VPN Tracker handbook.

    What is a good way to benchmark VPN throughput?
     

    Testing VPN throughput using a remote file share is usually not a good idea for two reasons:

    The first reason is the file sharing protocol itself. File sharing protocols like SMB, AFP, or NFS have been designed for local networks that are fast, reliable, and have a very low latency. The Internet on the other hand is slow (at least the connection to it), unreliable and has a very high latency. For realistic results, you need to use a protocol that was optimized for such a situation, like HTTP or FTP.

    The second reason is the implementation of the file sharing protocol. Today most file shares use SMB, the Windows file sharing protocol. Apple has its own implementation of that protocol but this implementation is anything but good. While the SMB 3.x implementation is already poor, the SMB 1.x/2.x implementation (compatibility mode) is horrible, and for several reasons macOS will often fall back into that compatibility mode. When testing with a local NAS file share, we got 28 MBps using SMB 3 and only 18 MBps using SMB 1, compared to 50 MBps using AFP.

    If you have a Mac at the remote side, it’s pretty easy to setup a benchmark HTTP server. All you need is to open the standard application “Terminal” (use spotlight to find it) and then run the following set of commands (every command is confirmed by Return/Enter):

    mkdir /tmp/www-bench
    cd /tmp/www-bench
    dd count=1048576 bs=1024 if=/dev/random of=1GiB.dat
    php -S 0.0.0.0:8080

    The First command creates a new directory, the second one enters that directory, the third one creates a 1 GiB data file filled with random data, the last one starts a primitive HTTP server that serves the content of the current directory at port 8080. Now your VPN users can just open this address in Safari (or any other browser):

    http://a.b.c.d:8080/1GiB.dat

    Where “a.b.c.d” is the IP address of the Mac where you just typed the commands above. By watching the transfer speed in browser, you get a good idea of how capable your VPN is. Of course, this is limited by many factors, like the speed of your local Internet connection, the speed of the remote Internet connection, and the CPU power of the VPN gateway (which is usually far less than the CPU power of a Mac).

    To clean up after the test, activate the terminal window again and hit CTRL+C to stop the HTTP server, and finally run the following two commands:

    cd
    rm -r /tmp/www-bench

    How do I use VPN Tracker to connect to a server?
     
    When connected to a VPN, your network shares won't show up in the Finder sidebar menu:


    To access your file server via VPN, you have two options...

    Option 1: Manual Access:

    1. Open Finder.
    2. Open the "Go" menu.
    3. Choose "Connect to Server..."
    4. Enter the IP address (e.g."192.168...")
    5. Click "Connect".



    That's it! Now you have access to your files in Finder for this session. Please note, you will have to carry out these steps each time you need to connect.


    Option 2: Creating a Shortcut:
    You can also create a shortcut to your server within the VPN Tracker app, meaning it will be saved for whenever you need to access the server.

    1. Go to "VPN Shortcuts" in the app menu.

    2. In the shortcuts section, click on the bottom menu and drag out the File Server icon.

    3. Choose a VPN connection and a server to create your shortcut. If your chosen server does not appear on the list you can also enter it manually.


    After you have completed these steps your connection will be saved in the shortcuts section for whenever you need to use it.

    This video tutorial shows you how to quickly create a VPN Shortcut to a file server...





    I'm getting "VPN Gateway Not Responding (Phase 1)" and use a service like DynDNS
     
    If you use a dynamic DNS service (e.g. DynDNS, NoIP, DynU, FreeDNS) and your VPN gateway is not responding, please check that your DynDNS service has updated with your current IP address.

    If it is not up-to-date, please check the dynamic DNS configuration on your VPN gateway.
    Wie verbinde ich mich mit meiner Telekom Digitalisierungsbox über VPN?
     
    Mit Hilfe von VPN Tracker 365 können Sie sich mit Ihrem Telekom Digitalisierungsbox über VPN verbinden. Die Telekom Digitalisierungsbox Firewall hat ein eigenes Geräte-Profil in der App. Dies bedeutet, dass es vereinfachte Konfigurationseinstellungen gibt die bereits auf das Gerät vorkonfiguriert sind. Für weitere Hilfe mit der Konfiguration, sehen Sie sich Telekom Digitalisierungsbox Konfigurationsanleitungan.
    What do I need to use 2FA for my VPN connection?
     
    Two-factor authentication (also known as 2FA or Multi-Factor authentication or MFA) is a way to increase login security.

    Once 2FA has been enabled on the VPN gateway, VPN Tracker will automatically respond to the request when connecting:
    Most VPN connections will automatically prompt you to enter your 2FA code in a separate step after the username and password have been verified.

    In some cases, you may need to add your 2FA code directly after your regular password. There's an option under Configure > Advanced to tell VPN Tracker to always prompt you for the XAUTH username and password dialog, instead of attempting to automatically sign in with your saved credentials.
    OpenVPN connection to Ubiquiti Unifi Gateways does not work
     
    In order to get OpenVPN connections from Ubiquiti Unifi to work correctly with VPN Tracker, the following change must be made to the config file before importing it into VPN Tracker:

    - Download the OpenVPN configuration file from the Unifi console.
    - Open the configuration file with a text editor.
    - Identify this line:
    Cipher AES-256-CBC
    - Change the line to:
    AES-256-GCM
    - Save the file.
    - Import the file into VPN Tracker
    Why is it so important that a certificate is stored correctly on the VPN gateway?
     
    A certificate is like an identity document; you send it to the other party to identify yourself as authorized or to confirm your identity. However, since anyone can create a certificate with any content on their computer, it is important that a trustworthy CA confirms the information in the certificate by signing the certificate. This also prevents the certificate from being changed later. The CA certificate is only needed to be able to later check the validity of this signature and to see which CA is responsible for this information, so that I can decide whether I want to trust this CA.

    Each certificate has a private key. This serves as proof that you are the owner of the certificate or are authorized to identify yourself with this certificate, since only authorized people are ever allowed to have access to the private key, while the certificate can and often is accessible to everyone. So I can easily get the certificate of any web server or OpenVPN gateway, because both send me the certificate when I try to connect to them, but without a private key I cannot identify myself with the certificate .

    If an attacker wants to pretend to be a specific OpenVPN gateway, e.g. to get passwords from users, then he has to set up his own OpenVPN gateway and redirect his victim's data traffic there, both of which are quite possible. But then he has a problem: he also has to identify himself as the correct gateway. However, if the client does not check whether the gateway address is in the certificate, it can simply use a user certificate from a VPN user, because this is also signed with the same CA as the gateway certificate.

    It is much easier to get a user certificate and its private key than the gateway certificate.

    To get the gateway certificate, you have to hack into the gateway directly, but if I have unrestricted access to the gateway, then I no longer need the certificate because then I can intercept passwords directly at the gateway and have full access immediately to all private networks behind it.

    Gateways are of course designed to be as difficult to attack as possible, in contrast to users' work computers, which can be much more easily foisted with a Trojan. And it's even easier if a VPN user wants to act as a hacker himself, because he has regular access to a valid user certificate including a matching private key and can thus get other users' passwords, which may grant him extensive access rights Passwords are often managed centrally and the same password is also used for other company services.

    That's why it's not enough that a certificate is valid and signed with the appropriate CA, it also has to be ensured that the gateway certificate is really the gateway certificate and also matches the gateway you're currently talking to, anything else undermines the whole thing Security concept of certificates.
    My VPN Tracker plan expired. How can I renew it?
     
    To renew your expired VPN Tracker plan, please follow these steps:
    • Log in to your account at my.vpntracker.com
    • In the Teams view under "Subscriptions", you will see a list of both your active and your expired plans
    • To renew an expired plan, please click on: “Reactivate license
    • You will then be shown your available plan options

    Please note:
    • Grandfathering pricing is exclusively available for customers using the automatic renewal option. If your plan has expired, you can re-obtain VPN Tracker for the current price tier
    • After starting your new plan, you will regain full access to your account including your Personal Safe and Team Management features.
    Can you help me set up a VPN connection?
     
    VPN Tracker is aimed at making a complex technical matter like Virtual Private Networks (VPN) simple and user-friendly. The software is distributed with device profiles and configuration guides for many popular IPSec VPN gateways. These resources should provide all you need to establish a VPN tunnel successfully. You can find a list of devices and configuration guides here:

    http://www.vpntracker.com/interop

    For a general introduction to computer networking, VPNs and IPsec, there are several excellent introductions available online or as books, see for example here.

    If you experience specific configuration problems, our technical engineers are happy to provide support for setting up VPN connections with VPN Tracker. In many cases, connection problems are related to misconfiguration of either VPN Tracker or the VPN gateway.

    If you provide

    • A problem description and information on what you've already tried
    • A Technical Support Report from VPN Tracker ("Help" > "Generate Technical Support Report")
    • Screenshots of the VPN gateway configuration
    • A log from the VPN gateway

    we can usually quickly spot the cause for a problem and provide advice on how to resolve it.

    As there are several factors unrelated to VPN Tracker or the VPN gateway that can influence connectivity (e.g. firewalls/routers in between VPN Tracker and the VPN gateway), we cannot guarantee that a connection can be established under any circumstances.

    While we try our best, our support options may be limited if

    • you use a device which we did not test ourselves (most devices work just fine with VPN Tracker, though, and we're happy to take a look even at issues with untested VPN gateways)
    • you do not provide the information we need in order to assist you (see above)
    • your network administrator does not cooperate
    • you change connection parameters while we're trying to debug the settings
    My connection request in VPN Tracker is rejected with "No Proposal Chosen". What can I do?
     
    This message in VPN Tracker means that the VPN gateway isn't willing to accept any of the proposals that VPN Tracker has offered.

    As the proposals have not changed since the last successful connect (VPN Tracker always keeps record of the last successful settings, so we were able to compare your current settings to them), somebody must have changed the settings on the gateway side and now your client settings don't match any longer.

    No proposal chosen means that your VPN gateway could not agree to any of the Phase 1 proposals that VPN Tracker sent to it. Phase 1 proposals include:
    - Exchange mode (main/aggressive)
    - Encryption (3DES, AES-128, etc.)
    - Hashing (SHA-1, SHA-256, etc.)
    - Diffie-Hellman Group (Group 2, Group 5, etc.)

    Please double check which values are currently set on the VPN gateway. You need to offer at least the same values in VPN Tracker for Phase 1.

    Also please double check your local identifier in VPN Tracker. If a VPN gateway supports multiple VPN tunnels and your client settings are correct for tunnel A, however the gateway thinks you want to connect to tunnel B, then this can also explain a configuration mismatch. With aggressive mode connection, the local identifier in VPN Tracker is used to select a remote tunnel, so in case there are multiple remote tunnels, please ensure you are targeting the correct one at the moment. The local identifier in VPN Tracker must match the tunnel name or remote identifier on the VPN gateway (remote as local and remote swap roles on the gateway side - for the gateway you are remote).
    What is a VPN Tracker?
     
    VPN Tracker is the #1 VPN software client for Macs. It’ll allow you to connect securely to your home or office network over the internet.
    I can't sign in – "Authorization failed"
     

    Recently, root certificates for "Let's Encrypt" expired. Apple has decided not to update root certificates for OS X versions older than macOS 10.12. This means that when apps or Safari on your Mac access websites using Let's Encrypt root certificates, they will not load correctly.

    Note: this is a general OS X issue that you will want to address to ensure you can access all websites and services.

    This issue also affects the secure communication between VPN Tracker and the my.vpntracker.com account service.

    How to fix this issue
    1. Download the latest VPN Tracker version for your system:
    2. Install the root certificate fix

    3. Re-launch VPN Tracker and sign in again

    If you are still experiencing the same problem, please try this:

    • Open Safari
    • Go to Preferences > Privacy > Manage website data
    • Search for 'equinux' and 'vpntracker' and choose 'Remove all'
    VPN Tracker 9 & VPN Tracker 10

    Older VPN Tracker versions may also have issues due to certifcates as described above. As these versions are end-of-life, we can no longer offer support for them. The steps above should also apply to these versions. For support and to use VPN Tracker on the latest macOS versions, please switch to a new VPN Tracker plan.

    I'm given a 'Server Certificate error' during Activation?
     

    Are you seeing a 'Server certificate' error message whilst activating your equinux software?

    One likely cause is your system's date & time: Make sure your system clock is set correctly by checking 'Set date & time automatically' under System Preferences > Date & Time.

    We also use a fairly new security certificate to protect your data. However, older versions of OS X might not immediately recognize the certificate.

    To make sure OS X will recognize the certificate, you could try one of the following two fixes:

    Run Software Update

      ‣ Go to the System Preferences and select "Software Update"
      ‣ Install any available system updates 
      ‣ Afterwards, restart and try activating again

    Disable your firewall

    Please make sure you are not running any firewalls which may block access to our activations server. Applications you may wish to disable temporarily include:

    • Mac OS X Firewall
    • LittleSnitch (Litte Snitch Configuration - Preferences … - General - Stop)
    • Intego NetBarrier

    Disable your proxy

    In some cases the use of proxies may interfere with certain certificates stored in your Keychain.

      ‣ Open System Preferences
      ‣ Go to the "Network" section
      ‣ Choose your network connection and click "Advanced…"
      ‣ Uncheck any proxies you may have configured and click "Ok"

    Check your Keychain

      ‣ Open: "Application" > "Utilities" > "Keychain Access" 
      ‣ Select "Keychain Access" > "Keychain First Aid"
      ‣ Enter your OS X account password, select Repair on the right and hit Start

    Install the root certificate manually

    • Download the latest Let's Encrypt root certificates
    • Double-click to add the certificate to your Mac's keychain
      Tip: If you have multiple users on the Mac, add it to the 'System' keychain to fix this problem for all users
    • Double-click the new entry "ISRG Root X1" to open the trust settings



    • Under "Trust", choose "Always trust"



    • Close the window and confirm with your Mac user password

    You should now be able to activate your software using your equinux ID and password.

    VPN Tracker 9 & VPN Tracker 10

    Older VPN Tracker versions may also have issues due to certifcates as described above. As these versions are end-of-life, we can no longer offer support for them. The steps above should also apply to these versions. For support and to use VPN Tracker on the latest macOS versions, please switch to a new VPN Tracker plan.
    Why is VPN Tracker prompting me for user login credentials on each connect?
     
    Please go to"Configure" > "Advanced" > "Additional Settings"
    and make sure
    • Always prompt for XAUTH credentials is not checked.
      If this option is checked, VPN Tracker will in fact always prompt you, whether it finds credentials in your keychain or not.
       
    • Use stored XAUTH password as passcode is not checked.
      If this option is checked, VPN Tracker assumes that the password stored in keychain is in fact a passcode and it will only hand it out to the gateway if the gateway asks for a passcode. If it asks for a password instead, VPN Tracker doesn’t have any such info and thus asks you to please provide one.
    How can I set up a SonicWALL SSL VPN connection on my Mac?
     
    VPN Tracker 365 makes it really easy to set up a SonicWALL SSL VPN connection on your Mac. Just enter the Host name and VPN Domain into the VPN Tracker settings - and you are ready to go! Please check our Configuration Guide for more detailed instructions.
    Do L2TP connections support 2-Factor Authentication?
     
    The L2TP protocol standard officially only supports username & password authentication, so 2-factor is not supported. Some vendors have added non-standard L2TP authentication variants, but these are not supported by VPN Tracker at this time.
    How do I delete my account?
     

    Please don't go! :-(

    If you're sure that your time with us is at an end then we've made it nice and easy to remove all your info from our database so that you don't need to wait for us to do it.

    Just log in at your License Manager, click 'Edit your Account' on the left hand navigation panel and, after a tearful farewell, click 'Delete Account'.

    If you do leave then we'd like to say thank you, bye and come back soon!

    Why can't I assign myself an IP address that lies within the remote network?
     
    An established VPN connection causes your system to obtain a new virtual network interface. All traffic sent over this network interface arrives at the other side of the VPN tunnel and all traffic sent back arrives at that interface. Like any interface, this interface needs an IP address to be functional. Either the VPN gateway assigns you an IP address using a client provisioning method or you need to assign one to yourself. In the later case, the IP address of the field "Local Address" is used as IP address for the virtual interface or, in case that field is left blank, the IP address of your primary network interface is used, since it is allowed to assign the same IP address to more than one interface.

    Basically you are free to assign yourself any IP address you like, albeit it should usually be a private IP address and you need to make sure it does not conflict with the IP address other VPN users are using. There is just one exception to that rule: Usually you cannot assign yourself an IP address that lies within the remote network itself, as if you do, the connection may come up but it cannot be used productively.

    The reason for that is very simple. If you assign yourself an IP address from within the remote network, servers and hosts at the remote side will think you are also a local host whenever they see a packet from you. So they will try to contact you directly over the local network but that cannot work, as in fact, you are not a local host. The only way to contact you is by going over the VPN gateway and remote hosts won't try to do that for hosts they consider local.

    To make such a configuration possible, the VPN gateway must support ARP Proxying and most gateways will only support that, if they themselves have assigned the IP address to the client. If you assign IP addresses using a form of client provisioning, then some gateways will allow you to assign IP addresses that lie within one of the remote networks and the connection will wok normally.
    Where can I manage my VPN Tracker Plans?
     

    You can manage all of your VPN Tracker plans after logging in to our website https://my.vpntracker.com using your existing equinux ID and password.

    Here you will find all information about your subscriptions and payments and can manage your colleagues' VPN Tracker plans.

    I need to enter my Macs password each time I connect an openVPN tunnel. Why?
     
    The private key of your personal certificate could be located in the systems keychain instead of your personal keychain. The personal certificate as well as the corresponding private key has to be located in your login keychain to get constant access. Please try to drag and drop both to your login keychain or delete them and import them to the login keychain.
    My password is being rejected in the application, but it works on your website?
     

    You need to enter your equinux ID and password to activate most equinux applications. However sometimes applications will also require you to enter your Mac OS X user password in order to access certain required system components.

    So if you see a window like the one below, you'll need to enter the username and password of an Administrator account on your Mac to proceed, not your equinux ID and password.

    What is SonicWALL Simple Client Provisioning?
     

    SonicWALL Simple Client Provisioning enables VPN Tracker to automatically retrieve the settings for the VPN connection from supported SonicWALL VPN gateways. For most users, it is only necessary to configure the SonicWALL's WAN IP address in VPN Tracker – everything else happens automatically.

    For a list of supported SonicWALL devices, please refer to this FAQ.

    VPN Tracker 365: Constantly improving
     

    We use analytics in VPN Tracker 365 to help us improve the app and your overall VPN experience. All measurements are completely anonymous and we never evaluate any personal information or any data going through your connection.

    What is measured

    • Generic connection settings (e.g. what type of connection it is, which options are being used etc.)
    • Which features are used (e.g. is auto-connect enabled, are any actions configured etc.)
    • How many connections you have

    Your data, your privacy

    • Your authentication details and credentials are never read, captured or transmitted
    • Your VPN traffic is never analyzed, captured or accessible

    You’re in control

    If you’d prefer not to share any anonymous usage information with equinux, you can deactivate this option at any time in VPN Tracker’s preferences by unchecking 'Share diagnostics data'.

    Does VPN Tracker work on Macs with Apple M2 chips?
     
    New Mac? No problem. The latest version of VPN Tracker for Mac offers full support for Macs with M2 chips, as well as compatibility with the latest macOS versions, including macOS 15 Sequoia.

    Download the latest version here.
    Is there a free trial for VPN Tracker?
     

    We offer a free trial version of all available VPN Tracker plans so you can test your VPN connections with VPN Tracker before purchasing. VPN Tracker Mac Trial licenses are valid for 7 days and offer the exact feature set of the appropriate plan so you can fully test all features of the plan. You're able to test all connections and protocols to ensure your connections works before purchasing. If you are happy with VPN Tracker, you won't need to do anything to continue using it. All your created connections and settings will remain in the app and the trial license will convert to a paid license after the trial period. Otherwise you can cancel your trial license up to 24 hours before the end of the trial period.

    Get the free VPN Tracker trial

    Can I create L2TP VPN, PPTP VPN, SSL VPN or OpenVPN connections with VPN Tracker?
     

    Yes, VPN Tracker supports IPsec (IKEv1 + IKEv2), L2TP (Mac only), PPTP (Mac only), OpenVPN, SonicWALL SSL VPN, Cisco AnyConnect SSL VPN, Fortinet SSL VPN, SSTP VPN, and WireGuard® VPN (Beta - learn more). Additional protocols are on our roadmap.

    WireGuard is a registered trademark of Jason A. Donenfeld.

    What data does a Technical Support Report (TSR) contain? Is the TSR encrypted?
     
    Technical Support Report (TSR) is generally not encrypted. The data transmission is preformed directly from your computer to our internal servers and will never be shared with third parties.

    The TSR contains connection logs, application logs, screenshots of the app and information on installing and configuring VPN Tracker. In addition, the current system and network configuration of the computer, as well as precise filtered log messages from the console and a heavily filtered system profile, but always only information that is relevant for VPN use or use of VPN Tracker itself. In addition, there may be crash logs of the VPN Tracker system components, if available.

    The TSR does not contain any passwords (pre-shared key, key file, XAUTH or other login data), even if they have been saved in the connection. It does not contain any keys or certificates of connections. It does not contain an unfiltered system log with log messages of irrelevant applications. It does not contain a complete system profile and no file content, except for files that VPN Tracker has created and managed itself. It is not possible to set up a VPN tunnel with the data from a TSR alone, since all the security-relevant information that would be required for this is not available.

    What does Extended Diagnostics mean?


    If you activate extended diagnostics, you give us permission to request additional TSRs for the duration of the permission. This has the same security parameters as described abobve. With this option selected, we can check if reported problems still exist and provide faster support without additional user interaction.

    To send us a TSR, open the VPN Tracker App and choose "Help">"Contact Support" in the top menu bar.
    Mac OS X: How to configure a VPN Connection / establish a connection to a VPN Network under macOS (Virtual Private Network)
     
    For the configuration of a VPN connection under Mac OS X, you will need the following:
    • VPN Tracker 365: Download here
    • An internet connection
    • A VPN Router/Gateway

    Create a new connection

    In VPN Tracker 365, try the following:
    ‣ Click on the plus symbol in the bottom left corner:
    
    ‣ Choose: "New Company Connection"

    Choose your VPN Router

    ‣ In the list of VPN Gateway vendors, choose the manufacturer and model of your VPN router. In case your VPN router does not appear in the list, try the following:
    ‣ Choose "Use custom device profile." 
    ‣ Click on "Create" to add your VPN connection.
    

    Your configuration guide

    Our engineers have tested a large number of VPN gateways with VPN Tracker. For many of these, detailed configuration guides are available. In the newly created connection, you will be able to find the router specific configuration guide:

    Alternatively you will be able to find the configuration guides on our website at http://vpntracker.com/interop

    Further details for creating your VPN connection on Mac OS X can be found in the configuration guide or in the VPN Tracker handbook.
    System Components can't be loaded?
     

    In certain circumstances, due to a bug in macOS, the Kernel Extension required by VPN Tracker may not be installed correctly by your System.

    If that happens, you may see the error above.

    To fix the problem, please try this:

    • Go to Macintosh HD/Library/Extensions and delete the file com.vpntracker.365mac.kext
    • Then open the Terminal app (under Applications > Utilities) and enter the following command:
      sudo kextcache --clear-staging
    • Then reboot your Mac and try launching VPN Tracker 365 again

    If the problem is not fixed, please try this:

    • Restart your Mac and hold down Command+R to boot into Recovery Mode
    • Choose "Disk Utility"
    • Choose your harddrive and click "Mount"
    • Exit Disk Utility
    • Go to the menu bar and choose "Utilities > Terminal"
    • Enter the following commands:
      cd /Volumes/Macintosh\ HD/Library/StagedExtensions/Library/Extensions/
      rm -rf com.vpntracker.365mac.kext
    • Restart your Mac and try launching VPN Tracker 365 again
    When logging in, I get the error "License fetch failed"
     
    Please check if it is possible to open the address https://my.vpntracker.com in Safari. This Problem tends to ocurr if our Website is blocked through the firewall or another content filter.
    How can I enable Cookies on my System?
     

    Our activation process requires that your Mac accepts cookies.

    ‣ To check this, please open up Safari. 
    ‣ Click on "Safari" in the main menu at the very top of the screen.
    ‣ Choose "Preferences." 
    ‣ Select the "Privacy" tab and verify that cookies are always accepted. 
    ‣ Make sure JavaScript at "Security" is also activated. 
    ‣ Please close Safari.
    ‣ Restart the application and retry the activation.
    My Cisco EasyVPN connection initially works fine, but then disconnects or reconnects unexpectedly.
     
    First of all, make sure phase 1 and phase 2 lifetimes in VPN Tracker (Advanced > Phase ...) match the values selected on the VPN gateway.  Please also check, that no session time limit is configured on the Cisco device.

    Please follow these steps, to prevent idle timeouts with split-tunneling, and to generally increase connection reliability:

    1. Uncheck the option "Establish a separate phase 2 tunnel for each remote network" (Advanced > Phase 2)
    2. Afterwards, check the box "Establish a shared tunnel to 0.0.0.0/0 for split-tunneling" (Advanced > Interoperability > Cisco)
    Can I use the Personal Hotspot on my iPhone or smartphone to connect to VPN on the Mac?
     
    If you need internet on your Mac while traveling, you can activate the personal hotspot feature on your iPhone or Android smartphone in order to share a 4G/LTE/5G mobile connection with your Mac.

    In general, this will work fine for the majority of VPN connections. However, there are a few points to be aware of:

    • PPTP VPN connections are not supported, as iOS and Android do not support PPTP passthrough
    • For IPsec VPN connections, it's possible you may have to adjust your settings for NAT-T.
    Which ZyXEL Routers are supported and tested with VPN Tracker?
     
    For a list of tested ZyXEL devices, please refer to this page VPN Tracker may also work with additional IPsec capable devices from ZyXEL, please contact support if you have any questions.
    Where can I manage my VPN Tracker accounts?
     
    Which is faster: IPSec or SSL VPN?
     
    For a faster VPN connection that is just as secure, we recommended changing from SSL VPN to IPSec VPN.
    In comparison to SSL VPN, IPSec is able to offer you much faster connection speeds as it runs on the network layer – level 3 of the OSI model – meaning it’s much closer to the physical hardware.

    Check out this post to find out more about how to improve your VPN performance.
    Why do I receive the following error message when logging in to VPN Tracker? "Authorization failed. The identity of the authorization server could not be verified."
     
    For security reasons, VPN Tracker only permits you to log in to the software via a direct connection between your computer and our server.

    This error message advises you that another program is blocking communication between your computer and our server. Here are some examples of programs which could cause this:

    • Security software (e.g. virus scanners, Malware blockers)
    • Malware or Adware

    If you need to add the domains used by VPN Tracker to your security solution, please add vpntracker.com (plus its subdomains) and equinux.com (plus its subdomains).

    Following this, you should be able to log in to VPN Tracker with no problems at all.

    Tip: A known cause for this error is:
    • Kaspersky
    I am seeing a message "account locked for security reasons"?
     

    VPN Tracker is licensed per user. That means each person using VPN Tracker needs their own license.

    To prevent security issues, account sign-ins are checked by an automatic system. There are multiple possible causes that can trigger an account lock:

    • Sharing one account with other people
    • The account is being used as a "generic" account (e.g. "Lab computer 1"), instead of being personalized for one person
    To fix a locked account being shared with other people
    • Go to my.vpntracker.com
    • Sign in with your equinux ID
    • Go to "My Subscriptions" and choose "Add plans…"
    • Add additional licenses for each person that needs VPN access and complete your order
    • Once you have the correct number of licenses for your team, assign the new licenses to your co-workers – check out our Team Setup Guide for step-by-step instructions

    Once you have completed these steps, please contact our support team and include your equinux ID and order confirmation number. A team member will review your details and will be able to lift the restrictions on your account.

    For any other questions, please reach out to our Account Security Team.

    Can I use my software on multiple computers?
     
    You purchased VPN Tracker 365, VPN Tracker World Connect or Mail Designer 365? You can use the app on up to three personal devices per license.

    To do so, simply sign in to your account to use your plan on your Macs (or your iOS device where applicable) using just your equinux ID and password.

    You may use the software in parallel on one computer per license.

    If you want to use the software on multiple devices in parallel, or other family members or colleagues also want to use the software on their computers, you will need a separate license for each person or each parallel use.

    A VPN Tracker 10, VPN Tracker 9 or Spot Maps license can be active on one Mac at the same time. If you want to use the Software on multiple devices, you will need an separate license per device.



    Why does SonicWall log “Land attack dropped” on some connections from VPN Tracker 365?
     
    In some versions of macOS (10.14 and 10.15), Apple’s support for SMB network shares may send packets over a VPN tunnel interface that can trigger this warning. These packets have the same source and destination address which is what triggers the LAND attack warning.

    These messages can be ignored, or, if you have the option, you can disable the NetBIOS daemon that is sending out these packets on the Mac using the following command:
    launchctl unload -w /System/Library/LaunchDaemons/com.apple.netbiosd.plist

    Please note that disabling the NetBIOS daemon may affect your network file shares.
    What are VPN Shortcuts?
     
    Configuring VPN Shortcuts allows you and your team members to use VPN Tracker 365 to get quick and easy access to your most important internal services, including:
    • File Servers
    • Company intranet & internal websites
    • Company email accounts
    • Internal databases
    • Remote Desktop
    • Internal calendars

    When you click on a Shortcut in VPN Tracker 365, your VPN will connect automatically and your chosen service will be launched:



    To learn how to set up VPN Shortcuts in VPN Tracker 365, check out this 2 minute video tutorial:




    Why are some services displaying the wrong country and not the one selected in VPN Tracker?
     
    The only information available for every IP address is the continent it belongs to, as the registrar that assigned it is known, and its current owner. There is no reliable or authoritative source for the exact geographic location of a computer currently using the address.

    Various private companies try to fill this gap by offering GeoIP databases. These databases store a geographical location for any IP address. Some of these databases are just more accurate than other and some of them are just more up-to-date than others. As it's not always possible to determine the exact geographic location of a host and as IP addresses can change owner at any time without further notice, errors in these databases are pretty much unavoidable.

    As some content providers tend to block IP addresses as soon as they know these are used by a VPN service, companies offering VPN services have to change IP addresses on a regular basis. Unfortunately IPv4 addresses have become rare and thus companies started to sell so far unused addresses to third parties. This is a common source of errors in the databases which often still attribute these addresses to their previous owner and location. Nonetheless we can assure you that all our servers are really physically located in the country and city they claim to be, regardless what any GeoIP database believes where they are.

    If you see errors in a GeoIP database, please drop us a short note, so we can get in contact with the company operation that database to have them fix this mistake. Of course, if you know the company , feel free to also drop them a line, which is often enough to have the error fixed in a timely manner.
    How can I set up two-factor authentication for my VPN Tracker account?
     
    You can add two-factor authentication to your equinux ID at id.equinux.com.

    Visit our step-by-step guide to 2FA for more details.

    To sign-in to your equinux ID with two-factor authentication, please make sure you're using the latest version of VPN Tracker for Mac or VPN Tracker for iPhone & iPad.
    What do the different roles in my.vpntracker do?
     

    You can assign different roles to Team members, which give them access to certain features.

    Note: Roles are currently being rolled out – if you do not see the role dropdown option in your Team, please reach out and we can set your team up.

    You can assign the following roles:

    Manager Organizer Member Billing
    Purchase and manage subscriptions Yes - - Coming soon
    Invite and remove Team members Yes Yes - -
    Change roles Yes - - -
    Add, edit and remove TeamCloud connections Yes Yes - -
    Receive TeamCloud connections Yes Yes Yes -
    Download invoices Yes - - Yes
    How do I set up a PPTP connection with VPN Tracker?
     
    To set up a connection to a remote server via PPTP VPN on your Mac, please carry out the following steps:

    • Open the VPN Tracker Connection Creator for PPTP VPN
    • Enter the IP address or Host Name of the PPTP server you want to connect to, then follow the remaining steps in the setup wizard
    • Save your new VPN connection in your account using secue end-to-end encryption to start using on your Mac

    What additional settings are available for connections to Cisco devices?
     

    VPN Tracker has three settings that can speed up connecting to Cisco devices and improve compatibility.

    • Establish a shared tunnel to 0.0.0.0/0 for split-tunneling
    • Send Cisco firewall attribute
    • Use ... as the application version during Mode Config

    Note: All settings described on this page require VPN Tracker 6.2 or newer.
     

    Establish a shared tunnel to 0.0.0.0/0 for split-tunneling

    What does this setting do?
    In a split-tunneling setup using EasyVPN, VPN Tracker will no longer establish an IPsec Security Association (SA) to each remote network, but establish a single SA to 0.0.0.0/0. Split-tunneling is achieved only through an appropriate routing setup. This can speed up the connection processes significantly for connections with multiple remote networks.

    When should I use this setting?
    The setting works with most Cisco devices that use EasyVPN and a split-tunneling setup.

    How can I try it?

    1. On the Advanced tab, uncheck the box “Establish a separate tunnel for each remote network” (see screenshot)
    2. Make sure the box “Establish a shared tunnel to 0.0.0.0/0 for split tunneling” is checked (see screenshot)

    If your connection does not work with this new setting, simply revert back to your previous setup by checking the box “Establish a separate tunnel for each remote network”.

    Send Cisco firewall attribute

    What does this setting do?
    This setting causes VPN Tracker to send a special attribute during EasyVPN indicating the presence of a firewall.

    When should I use this setting?
    You can try enabling this setting if your current EasyVPN-based connection to a Cisco device gets dropped at phase 2 (“The VPN gateway asked VPN Tracker to disconnect...” error).

    Use ... as the application version during Mode Config

    What does this setting do?
    This setting causes VPN Tracker to send a different application version than the default “VPN Tracker 6” during EasyVPN and Mode Config.

    When should I use this setting?
    You can try setting a different application version, e.g. “Cisco Systems VPN Client 4.8.0:Linux” if your current EasyVPN-based connection to a Cisco device gets dropped at phase 2 (“The VPN gateway asked VPN Tracker to disconnect...” error).



    How can I create a master password for VPN Tracker 365 with Personal Safe that's different from my equinux account?
     
    Currently, VPN Tracker does not support creating a custom password. We are planning on adding this feature in the future.

    Please note that your equinux password is not directly used as your VPN Tracker password. Instead, VPN Tracker automatically creates a strong password using key derivation for your added security.

    Please refer to the following pages for further information on VPN Tracker Personal Safe (formerly known as Connection Safe):



    Is VPN Tracker 365 compatible with new M1 Pro and M1 Max chips?
     
    Considering upgrading to a brand new MacBook Pro with M1 Pro or M1 Max? VPN Tracker 365 is fully compatible with the next generation of Macs - meaning you can continue working productively with your VPN on your new device.

    Don’t have a VPN Tracker 365 plan yet? Find an overview of all licensing options here.
    Using VPN Tracker in teams
     
    VPN Tracker is designed as a user license. One license can be used by only one person.

    A company counts as a group of users. Each user of the VPN Tracker software needs their own personal VPN Tracker user account as well as their own user license. The information about the VPN Tracker account, may only be used by the owner of the account. A sharing of login and password (for example between members of an organization or others) is not permitted.

    Managing multiple users in an organization via team management
    Employees or users in an organization are managed using VPN Tracker Team Management. With this, an administrator can assign VPN Tracker user licenses to individual VPN Tracker user accounts and also withdraw them. Usage of the team management is mandatory for the use of VPN Tracker in organizations. It is designed to meet the security demands in organizations.

    Team Management Guide →

    Accounts with suspicious behavior
    VPN systems are security systems which regulate confidential access on a personal level. The sharing of logins and passwords will inadvertently lead to an insecurity in the entire system, for example when an employee leaves the company. An ex-employee would still be able to gain full access to the VPN Tracker main account. Accounts which display suspicious behavior may be automatically blocked by our system. This is to safeguard the security of your account.
    How do I set up VPN Tracker Team Management?
     
    VPN Tracker is fully optimized for both small teams and larger enterprise teams. You can set up and manage your team at my.vpntracker.com.

    Our extensive Team Management Guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for the following team-related topics:
    • Creating a VPN Tracker team
    • Inviting team members
    • Assigning VPN Tracker plans to team members
    • Using the package installer and onboarding tools
    • Sharing VPN connections
    • Managing billing and invoices for your team
    Why is VPN Tracker permanently prompting me to install an update?
     

    There are three possible causes for this:

    1. equinux is constantly improving VPN Tracker 365 and as a result VPN Tracker has a high update frequency. Especially if you don’t use VPN Tracker on a daily basis, it’s not unlikely that we already released an update since the last time you were using VPN Tracker. Sometimes there are less than 24 hours between updates, especially with security fixes where it's critical they are released as soon as possible.
       
    2. If you were using an older VPN Tracker version, it may be required to install an intermediate update first before you are be able to install the most up-to-date version. In that case you may install an update and directly on next launch VPN Tracker may offer another update.
       
    3. You might have multiple copies of VPN Tracker installed on your system. For technical reasons updates to VPN Tracker 36517.0.6 and below have to be installed using the system installer and if multiple copies of VPN Tracker exist on your system, the installer may choose to update the wrong copy. To solve that problem:
       
        ‣ Place a copy of VPN Tracker into a dedicated folder (we recommend the Applications folder).
          ‣ Use Spotlight to find copies in other folders.
        (Hold down the CMD key in Spotlight to quickly see the location of a hit)
          ‣ Delete all copies that are not in the dedicated folder.
          ‣ Finally start VPN Tracker from the dedicated folder and re-apply the update.
         

       
    How can I move my VPN connections to a new Mac?
     
    Just purchased a new Mac and want to wipe your old device? VPN Tracker 365 makes it easy to move all your existing connections over so you continue connecting seamlessly:
    1. Make sure your connections are stored in your Personal Safe or in TeamCloud (look for the safe or cloud icons in the Status tab)



    2. Sign out of VPN Tracker 365 on your old Mac (choose "VPN Tracker 365 > Sign out… " from the menu bar)
    3. Sign in to VPN Tracker 365 on your new Mac with your equinux ID and password

    Give your connections a test and once you're satisfied, you can go ahead and wipe your old Mac.
    Where can I assign my team members a VPN Tracker plan?
     
    As an admin in your company you can manage all VPN Tracker plans for your team members.

    You can assign a plan to a new member and also revoke a plan if a colleague leaves your team.

    To do so visit my.vpntracker.com and log in using your equinux ID and password.

    In the "Team Management" section you can create a team, invite new team members and change VPN Tracker plans for each colleague.

    Get step-by-step instructions for this in our Team Management Guide.
    How can I cancel my VPN Tracker renewal?
     
    To deactivate your VPN Tracker renewal, please follow these steps:
    • Log in to you your account at my.vpntracker.com
    • Go to "My Plans and Billing" in the sidebar, where you will see your current active plan(s), in case your plan is a team plan, please go to "Team Plans and Billing" in the sidebar
    • To deactivate your renewal, flip the switch from blue to grey
    • After deactivating auto renewal, you will receive an email confirming the deactivation.

    Please be aware that by deactivating automatic renewals you will lose pricing benefits. The possibility of grandfathering pricing is exclusively available for customers who keep automatic renewals activated at my.vpntracker.com once this option has been deactivated, any associated pricing benefits (e.g. discounts, special offers, etc.) will be lost.



    How can I sort my VPN connections?
     
    Your VPN connections are initially arranged by creation date. You can easily sort and rearrange them by dragging and dropping.


    It’s also possible to create Groups of VPN Connections by clicking on the plus symbol in the lower right and selecting “New Group”. Just drag your connections into the appropriate group.

    VPN Tracker Connection Checker - What Do the Results Mean?
     

    The VPN Tracker 365 Connection Checker helps determine which VPN protocols your current internet connection supports. This is particularly useful in places like hotels, cafés, or offices, where network restrictions may apply.

    Understanding the Results

    • Green Check Mark: The protocol was successfully tested and is expected to work on your current network.
    • ⚠️ Yellow Exclamation Mark: The test was inconclusive. The protocol may or may not work due to network restrictions or unstable conditions. You can try connecting, but success isn't guaranteed.

    Why is a VPN Protocol Not Working?

    If a protocol gets a ⚠️ yellow exclamation mark, possible reasons include:

    • Network Restrictions – Some Wi-Fi networks (hotels, workplaces) limit or block certain VPN protocols.
    • Firewall Rules – A firewall may be filtering VPN traffic, preventing stable connections.
    • ISP Limitations – Some internet providers restrict or throttle VPN usage.
    • Router Settings – Your router may not allow VPN passthrough for certain protocols (e.g., PPTP, L2TP).
    • Double NAT Issues – If you're behind multiple routers (common in hotels, mobile networks), VPN connections can be disrupted.
    • Unstable Internet Connection – High packet loss or weak connectivity can interfere with VPN protocols.

    Explanations for the VPN Connection Test for IPsec

    For IPsec, at least the ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) or NAT-T (Network Address Translation Traversal) protocol must function to establish a stable VPN connection. Often, ESP is not usable in certain environments, such as due to firewall settings or network configurations. However, as long as NAT-T is available, the connection can still be established.

    What to Do If a Protocol Fails?

    • Switch networks – If possible, test from a different Wi-Fi Network
    • Try a mobile hotspot – Create a hotspot with your mobile phone and test if you get a different result
    • Try a different protocol (e.g., if IKEv2 is unstable, try OpenVPN).
    • Check router settings if you're on a home or office network.
    • Use VPN Tracker's built-in troubleshooting tools for more insights.

    With the VPN Tracker Connection Checker, you can quickly identify network issues and choose the best protocol for a stable connection.


    I have bought a personal license of VPN Tracker. Can I use this on multiple computers at the same time?
     
    A VPN Tracker license does not permit the simultaneous use on multiple computers. In this case each computer that is connecting simultaneously will need a unique license. For this we offer the convenient Team store, which allows convenient purchasing for multiple people. Go to Team Store
    Which countries can I connect to with VPN Tracker World Connect?
     
    You can connect to the following 21 countries:
    1. Germany
    2. Austria
    3. United States
    4. Australia
    5. Brazil
    6. Canada
    7. France
    8. Japan
    9. Luxembourg
    10. Netherlands
    11. New Zealand
    12. Singapore
    13. Spain
    14. Sweden
    15. Switzerland
    16. United Kingdom
    To choose the country you want to connect to, try the following:
    ‣ Choose "File" > "New" > "World Connect Destination"

    ‣ Then, choose "World Connect" and "Countries"

    ‣ Check your country of choice:



    Backend components are disabled in the system. How can I enabled them again?
     

    Please try this:

    Open the Terminal app (from Applications → Utilities → Terminal) and paste in this command:

    sudo launchctl enable system/com.vpntracker.365mac.agent
    Confirm it with your password (note you won't see the password being typed).

    The problem should be resolved.

    Does VPN Tracker support SSL connections?
     
    VPN Tracker offers complete support for SSL VPN connections - including SonicWALL SSL, Cisco AnyConnect SSL, and Fortinet SSL, as well as for OpenVPN, IPsec (IKEv1 + IKEv2), PPTP (Mac only), L2TP (Mac only), SSTP, and WireGuard®.

    To find out how to set up an SonicWALL SSL VPN connection, please refer to our SonicWALL SSL VPN configuration guide.

    Find out more about our VPN Tracker plan options here

    WireGuard is a registered trademark of Jason A. Donenfeld.
    How many VPN Tracker licenses do I need?
     

    VPN Tracker is licensed per user. That means each person using VPN Tracker needs their own license.

    If colleagues or other team-members also need to use VPN Tracker, you can upgrade your subscription with additional licenses and assign these using Team Management.

    I am working from home. How do I use VPN to connect my Mac to my office network?
     
    VPN Tracker is the best choice for professionals looking to connect a Mac or MacBook remotely to the company network. As well as the highest security standards, VPN Tracker offers a complete service specifically tailored to the needs of business users.

    This guide tells you all you need to know about getting VPN Tracker set up for remote work on your Mac.

    P.S. VPN Tracker now also works on iOS so you can connect to your company VPN on the go on iPhone and iPad! Find out more.
    I'm getting a Keychain error message when signing in
     

    In some circumstances, VPN Tracker may not be able to store your account login credentials in your Keychain.

    To fix this issue, please try the following:

    • Quit VPN Tracker
    • Open Keychain Access from Applications > Utilities
    • Select your login keychain
    • Choose File > Lock Keychain “login”
    • Then choose File > Unlock Keychain “login”

    On newer macOS releases, you may not see the option to lock/unlock your Keychain. In that case, please enter the following command via the Terminal:

    security lock-keychain ~/Library/Keychains/login.keychain
    
    Once it has been locked, you can then unlock your Keychain again:
    security lock-keychain ~/Library/Keychains/login.keychain
    
    (You will need to enter your macOS login password to confirm).

    Now re-open VPN Tracker and try signing in again.

    If the problem still pops up, try this:

    • Quit VPN Tracker
    • Go back to Keychain Access
    • In the search box enter “VPN Tracker User Auth”
    • Delete the VPN Tracker User Auth Token entry

    Now re-open VPN Tracker and try signing in again.

    Last resort: Reset your keychain

    If none of the tips above work, macOS has an option to reset your Keychain. Note that this should only be tried as a last resort, as it completely resets your login Keychain:

    • Open Keychain Access
    • Go to Keychain > Preferences
    • Choose "Reset Default Keychains…"
    Afterwards, open VPN Tracker 365 and try signing in again.

    If there are any further issues, please contact our support team and include the application logs from this location:
    /Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365/var/log.

    How do I share a connection using TeamCloud
     
    To share a connection using TeamCloud
    A note on new users

    The person receiving the connection needs to be a member of your VPN Tracker team and has to have set up their TeamCloud encryption keys.
    This happens automatically when they open VPN Tracker and other Team members are online. If another team member is not available, their TeamCloud setup can also be confirmed by a Team manager under my.vpntracker.com.

    Why does VPN Tracker say my local network is the same as the remote network? I am certain it is not!
     

    Are you using virtualization software, such as VMware, Parallels or VirtualBox? These software products create network interfaces for their internal networking needs, and sometimes the network addresses they choose happen to conflict with the remote network of a VPN connection. Even if you are not currently using this software (but have it installed or not completely uninstalled) their network interfaces exist and can cause conflicts.

    To find out which network interface is causing the conflict:

    1. Attempt to connect to your VPN (so the error message appears in the VPN Tracker log)
    2. Set the log level in VPN Tracker to “verbose”
    3. Look for a line that says
      Remote network ... conflicts with local network ... of interface ...

    This is the network interface that is causing the problem. On most Macs, “en0” will correspond to the Ethernet interface and “en1” to the AirPort interface. Any other enX interfaces are either from virtualization software, or from additional network hardware (e.g. USB network adapters/modems). Network interfaces whose names start with “vboxnet” generally belong to VirtualBox and network interfaces starting with “vmnet” to VMware.

    • If the network interface is a "real" interface, see this FAQ for more information.
    • If the interface is virtual, change the network address(es) used by the virtualization software. More information can be found in this FAQ.
    Do you offer monthly VPN Tracker 365 plans?
     
    All VPN Tracker 365 plans are available with a yearly commitment.
    Why do I have to confirm the VPN gateway certificate every time?
     
    If you keep getting a dialog “VPN Tracker can't verify the identity of the VPN gateway [your host]”, the certificate of the gateway is probably not set up correctly. Since it's important for your privacy and security, VPN Tracker does not connect to VPN gateways with invalid certificates by default.

    There are two ways to ignore certificate verification:

    1. Trust the certificate in VPN Tracker manually

    You can make VPN Tracker always accept the certificate if you know that the certificate belongs to your device and are willing to accept the risk: in the warning dialog, click on “Show certificate” and verify that the certificate is the one you expect. Then check the “Alway trust …” checkbox and press “Continue”. Subsequent connection attempts should then skip this dialog.




    2. Turn off the certificate warning in the connection settings

    If you are rolling out a connection to a team and you want to avoid each user having to trust the certificate manually, you can deactivate the verification in the connection settings.

    To do this, edit the connection, navigate to the “Advanced Options” section, expand the “Certificates” section and uncheck “Verify Remote Certificate”. Then save the connection and restart it.
    Which routers can I connect to with VPN Tracker?
     

    For a list of compatible devices, please refer to this page.

    If you router is not in the list please refer to this FAQ and the VPN Tracker manual for help determining compatibility.

    Please note that the local router (i.e. the router at the location where your Mac with VPN Tracker is) in most cases does not have to be specifically compatible with VPN or VPN Tracker. Almost all routers work fine with VPN Tracker.

    How to create an in-email link to a calendar event
     
    Using your emails to link out to an upcoming calendar event is a great way to ensure that attendees don't forget to add the event to their calendar.

    Below, you will find easy-to-follow instructions on how to link out to events created with Google, Apple and Outlook calendars in your Mail Designer 365 email designs.

    Google Calendar


    If you've created a Google Calendar event which you want to share with your email subscribers, you will need to create an event link to include in your email.

    Here's how:
    1. Set up your event in your Google Calendar.
    2. Click on "Options" > "Publish Event"
    3. Copy the event link to include in your email template. Important: Make sure your calendar is set to public to ensure all recipients will be able to view the event.



    Now you can insert the link into your Mail Designer 365 template; either as a text link, or attached to a call to action button:



    Apple and Outlook Calendar


    For Apple and Outlook calendars, you will need to create an .ics file for the calendar event.

    Simply set up your event in the calendar, then drag it on to your desktop to create the file:



    Now, upload the file to an online file hosting service (in this example, we will use Google Drive.) Right click the file to create a shareable link which you can insert into your email design:



    Remember to set the file to public if you are sharing it:



    You can now send a link to the calendar event to your subscribers, who can simply download the .ics file to add to their own calendar.

    Tip: This tool is another great way of creating custom add to calendar links. Fill out your event's details and select the calendar service you wish to generate a link for (i.e. Google, Office 365, Outlook or Yahoo.) You can then copy the result to use in your Mail Designer 365 design.
    Will all of my previous connections and settings be migrated when I upgrade?
     
    Yes! When you upgrade to VPN Tracker 365, all of your previous settings and connections will be automatically migrated after you install VPN Tracker 365.
    Does VPN Tracker support OpenVPN connections?
     
    VPN Tracker offers complete support for OpenVPN connections, as well as IPsec (IKEv1 + IKEv2), PPTP, L2TP, SSL (including SonicWALL, Cisco AnyConnect & Fortinet), SSTP (Windows) and WireGuard® (Beta - learn more).

    To find out how to set up an OpenVPN connection on your Mac, iPhone or iPad, please refer to our OpenVPN configuration guide.

    WireGuard is a registered trademark of Jason A. Donenfeld.

    I want to manage the renewal settings for my VPN Tracker plan. How does this work?
     
    Managing your VPN Tracker account is easy!
    • Go to my.vpntracker.com and sign in with your equinux ID and password.
    • Under "My Subscriptions" in the sidebar menu, you'll see a list of your current VPN Tracker 365 plans.
    • Activate automatic renewals to ensure your license is renewed at your current rate.
    • Alternatively, you can let your current license expire and then purchase a new plan at the new customers rate from our online store.
    We generally recommend leaving auto-renewal enabled to prevent any disruption to your VPN service: Our system always sends a reminder before your plan will auto-renew to give you plenty of time to deactivate auto-renewal if it's no longer required.
    How do renewals of my VPN Tracker 365 plans work?
     
    We'll send you an email with all of the details two weeks before your plan is due for renewal. When your plan renews, your preferred payment method will be be billed and we'll send you an email with your invoice.

    Your VPN Tracker 365 app will just continue working as before and any plans that are assigned to team-members will remain assigned as well. Simple, automatic, secure.
    Is there a deadline for canceling my subscription if I wish to opt out?
     

    Renewals can be canceled up until 10 days before their renewal date. The cancelation will take effect on the next possible renewal date. You can continue to use the software until the end of your term, at which point your subscription will end.



    OpenVPN connection works in general but disconnects after a while
     

    If your OpenVPN connection drops after a while, it may be due to the rekeying period. Test whether extending the period can solve the problem.

    Proceed as follows:

    • Edit your OpenVPN connection in VPN Tracker
    • Navigate to "Advanced Settings > Phase 2"
    • Change the Lifetime value to 28800 (which corresponds to a period of 8 hours)

    If this doesn't resolve your issues, may also want to check your interoperability keep-alive, activity, and dead peer detection settings.

    If you continue to have problems with your VPN connection, please send us a TSR report.

    Why can’t VPN Tracker obtain an IP address from my SonicWall?
     

    SonicWalls distribute IP addresses using the DHCP protocol. Once the VPN tunnel itself has already been established, the VPN client must perform a DHCP exchange to obtain an IP address and use this IP address for all traffic sent over the VPN tunnel. There are two reasons why this can fail:

    1. The SonicWall never received your DHCP request (DHCP-Discover). That would be the case if there is an issue with the VPN tunnel itself not working properly.

      Try these:
      • Re-run the VPN Tracker Connection Checker from the "Tools" menu. Then try connecting the VPN again. This will let VPN Tracker automatically detect the best settings for your internet connection.
         
      • Make sure that you have no software installed that blocks VPN traffic in general. Please see this FAQ entry for more details.
         
    2. The SonicWall doesn’t want to reply to your DHCP request. The DHCP protocol is designed in such a way that there can be multiple DHCP servers per network and only those who think they can fulfill a request will also respond to it, all others will stay silent (there is no “negative” response for discover requests).

      Try these:
      • Try rebooting the SonicWall. SonicWalls are pretty stable but we’ve seen it a couple of times that the DHCP server is acting strange, as if all IP addresses are reserved, yet that’s not what you will see in the web interface. Rebooting will fix that behavior at once.
         
      • Make sure you have sufficient addresses left in the address pool. If the pool is too small and all addresses are in use or reserved, it is expected behavior that the SonicWall doesn’t respond.
         
    Why can't I authorize VPN Tracker in System Preferences?
     
    In order to install VPN Tracker on newer macOS versions, you need to "allow" the app in System Preferences under "Security".

    To do this:
    - Make sure the VPN Tracker app is in the Applications folder
    - You will need to complete this step locally on the Mac. It is not possible to do this step over Remote Desktop or Screen Sharing tools.

    Tip: If you have Full keyboard access enabled, you may be able to use the tab key (↹) to highlight "Allow" and then confirm it with the Space bar.
    Do I need to download SonicWall VPN Client for Mac to connect to my SonicWall device?
     
    VPN Tracker fully supports SonicWall VPN connections on Mac, iPhone and iPad, allowing you to securely connect to your SonicWall IPsec or SSL VPN from macOS or iOS devices. Download VPN Tracker to get started.
    TeamCloud settings
     

    When you share a connection using TeamCloud, it is encrypted and then shared with members of your VPN Tracker Team.

    General Security Information
    • TeamCloud uses strong encryption to protect all data
    • The connection is encrypted using end-to-end encryption for each Team member individually
    • End-to-end encryption means that we can never access your encrypted connection

    Here's a brief overview of how the following security settings are handled by TeamCloud:

    Pre-Shared Key
    • Pre-shared keys for a connection are automatically included, so your team members can connect right away
    • The pre-shared key will not be added to a team member's Keychain, so they cannot access it
    XAUTH
    • Your username and password are not shared with your team, they are removed before the connection is shared
    • Each Team member can enter their own username and password
    • These can be stored inside their Keychain and additionally will be added as user-specific credentials to TeamCloud (only available to that team member)
    Security
    • Remote Connection Wipe: By removing a team member from your Team, their access to TeamCloud is also immediately revoked. Any connections they have on their Macs will be removed automatically.
    • Don't allow settings to be changed prevents users that aren't Team managers or owners from editing a connection
    VPN Shortcuts
    • VPN Shortcuts can be shared to TeamCloud directly

    If you have any feedback regarding these settings, please get in touch and let us know your requirements.

    Why am I experiencing DNS issues in Firefox when connected to VPN?
     
    Since 2019, Firefox have been rolling out DNS over HTTPS (DoH) by default in several countries, including the USA, Canada, Russia and Ukraine.

    What does this mean?


    When DoH is enabled, it bypasses your DNS server and instead, domains you enter into your browser are sent via a DoH-compatible DNS server using an encrypted HTTPS connection.

    This is intended as a security measure to prevent others (e.g. your ISP) from seeing the websites you are trying to access. However, if you're using a DNS server provided by your VPN gateway, it allows DNS queries to run outside the VPN tunnel. Moreover, if the VPN specifies a DNS server that resolves internal host names, these are either not resolved at all or resolved incorrectly when DoH is enabled.

    How to disable DNS over HTTPS in Firefox


    To ensure all your DNS queries run via your VPN's DNS, you will need to disable DoH in Firefox. To do so, open your Firefox browser, go to Firefox > Preferences > Network Settings and deselect the checkbox by "Enable DNS over HTTPS":


    Click OK to save your changes.
    I don't want to renew my VPN Tracker plan, what do I have to do?
     
    Just visit my.vpntracker.com to adjust your renewal options. Please note that you may lose pricing benefits ("grandfathered pricing") if you choose to deactivate auto-renewals.
    What is a purchasing account?
     
    A purchasing account is an account which is solely used for purchasing and distributing licesnes. This type of account cannot be used for the activation of software. Purchasing accounts are the only accounts which are not personalised and may in this form be managed by multiple people within one company.
    I changed my password and now get an error message when I try to use my Personal Safe
     
    When activating the Personal Safe feature, VPN Tracker generates a Personal Safe key which is encrypted with your equinux ID password and securely stored on our servers. When creating your safe, you are given a Recovery Key, which you should store and keep in a safe place.

    If you change your equinux ID password later on, VPN Tracker can no longer decrypt your Personal Safe. You will need to re-enter your original password so VPN Tracker can re-encrypt your connections.

    If you have forgotten your original password, you have the option of entering your recovery key, instead of the original password.

    If you have forgotten both your original password and your recovery key, the only way to gain access to your Personal Safe is by resetting it on the server.

    Note: Please check your keychain (possibly also on an old computer or a backup) to see if your original password is possibly saved there.

    Important: Please be aware that, as a security measure, you will lose all of your stored connections if you perform a server reset. This FAQ instructs you how to perform a reset of your Personal Safe if required.
    I don't see "Allow" for the System Extension in System Preferences
     
    If you have a company Mac that has been set up with Mobile Device Management (MDM) software, your IT administrator may have blocked installing System Extensions.

    (VPN Tracker 365 uses a System Extension to create a secure VPN tunnel and manage network traffic)

    Please ask your IT administrator to add the following Kernel and System Extensions to your list of permitted Extensions:

    Team IDs:
    CPXNXN488S
    MJMRT6WJ8S

    Kernel Extensions:
    com.vpntracker.365mac.kext
    com.equinux.vpntracker365

    System Extension:
    com.vpntracker.365mac.SysExt

    Please see Apple's Support Document for more details.
    Alternative to Shimo?
     
    VPN Tracker is a modern VPN solution with support for the latest macOS versions, including macOS 15 Sequoia. As a Universal app, VPN Tracker for Mac is also optimized for new Macs with Apple's M1 + M2 Chips.

    Start your free VPN Tracker trial today.

    Learn more about VPN Tracker as an alternative to Shimo
    Can I undo Remote Connection Wipe?
     

    No, you currently cannot undo remote connection wipe. However, you can reinstate a team member. Remember, you will need to redistribute your team’s VPN connections to the new user before they will be able to connect.

    What to do if "Shimo 5 can't be opened"
     

    If you use Shimo and have found that it has stopped working, check out VPN Tracker.

    Alternative to Shimo 5

    VPN Tracker supports many of the same VPN protocols as Shimo, but is built to support new Macs and macOS releases, including macOS Sonoma and new macOS Sequoia.

    Fix your VPN - download VPN Tracker free

    Install the free VPN Tracker 365 trial and set up your VPN connection. Once you're connected, choose a VPN Tracker plan for ongoing updates, compatibility with the latest macOS releases and professional support.

    Need help setting up your VPN? How to move your Shimo VPN connection to VPN Tracker

    First, start VPN Tracker and create a new free user account to start your trial. Now we can set up your VPN connection:

    • In VPN Tracker, go to File > New > Company Connection
    • Choose your VPN gateway manufacturer and device model
    • or
    • Go to Protocols and select your VPN protocol

    Now you have a connection, you'll need to enter the connection details. You can look up some connection details in your Mac's Keychain:

    • Go to Applications > Utilities > Keychain Access
    • Search for "Shimo" in the top right corner
    • You'll find entries named "Shimo: vpn.example.com" – where "vpn.example.com" is your VPN's gateway address
    • Double-click the entry to open its details
    • To find your pre-shared key: Locate the Shimo entry with an "Account" label ending with "groupPassword"
    • To find your login password: Locate a Shimo Keychain entry with the account label ending in "userPassword"
    • Click "Show password" and enter your macOS account password to reveal the password (note you may be prompted twice for it)
    Enter the details into VPN Tracker

    Choose "Configure" from the top right corner of your connection and put the details for your VPN connection in:

    • For VPN gateway address, enter the gateway hostname from the Keychain entry names ("vpn.example.com" in our example)
    • For the pre-shared key, enter the password from the Keychain labeled "groupPassword"
    • Enter your username and password
    • Start your connection and see if you're able to connect

    Choose your authentication options

    Information about certificates

    Please keep in mind that, as well as the public part of the certificate, you also need to export the private key.

    Important: Private keys cannot be imported into the Keychain alone and can only be imported together with the corresponding certificate. For this to occur, the certificate and private keys need to be in PKCS12 format. You can generate this format by entering the following command into the Terminal:

    openssl pkcs12 -export -in (example.com).user.crt -inkey (example.com).user.key -out (example.com).user.p12

    Following this, (example.com).user.p12 can be imported by a double click. When generating your keys, you will be asked to enter a password, as private keys in PKCS12 format are always encrypted. This can be a password of your choice but please be aware you will need to enter it again during the import.

    Troubleshooting

    What to do if you can't connect?

    You may need additional details that your VPN admin might have given you when you first set up your VPN connection. Check your emails (tip: try searching for the VPN gateway address).

    VPN Tracker 6: Internet connection blocking VPN connections?
     
    If you are still using VPN Tracker 6 or older and run the VPN Availability Test, you may get an incorrect test result, which can block your VPN connection.

    To fix the problem, please tell VPN Tracker to ignore the test result:
    - Go to Tools > Test VPN Availability
    - Check the box marked "Ignore Test result"
    - Close the window without starting a new test

    Now your connection will connect again.

    If you travel a lot and need a tool that can check VPN availability, we recommend upgrading to a Mac that can run VPN Tracker 365, which includes Connection Checker – a fast and modern solution for frequent travelers and remote workers.
    How do I upgrade my VPN Tracker edition to Pro or VIP?
     
    To upgrade an existing VPN Tracker license, please log in to your my.vpntracker portal and carry out the following steps...

    • Choose your team or your account in the sidebar menu and click on Subscriptions
    • Choose the plan you wish to upgrade and click on Upgrade edition



    You will then be taken to the checkout page. Here you can choose which edition to upgrade to. On the right hand side under New plan, select a product from the dropdown list (i.e. VPN Tracker VIP) to calculate your upgrade price.

    You can now review your new plan before purchasing. The Prorating Discount is the remaining value of your existing license(s) which is deducted from the yearly total to result in the Amount due now.


    How can I set up an OpenVPN connection on my Mac or iPhone?
     
    As the best VPN client for Mac, iPhone and iPad, VPN Tracker makes it really straightforward for you to set up an OpenVPN connection on your device. Thanks to support for .ovpn files, you can conveniently upload your device's unique OpenVPN settings into VPN Tracker and be up and running with your OpenVPN connection in no time.

    For more detailed instructions, check out the OpenVPN setup guide.
    Do I need an active VPN Tracker 365 plan to use VPN Tracker World Connect?
     
    VPN Tracker World Connect is an independent product you can use in the VPN Tracker 365 app.
    You can purchase your World Connect Pass independently of an active VPN Tracker 365 plan.

    Haven’t tried the demo yet? Download the VPN Tracker 365 app for free from our website and start your trial.
    Can I share VPN Shortcuts with my team?
     
    Yes! Pre-configuring VPN Shortcuts to share with your team is a productive way to ensure everyone can get connected to crucial internal services such as...
    • Network shares
    • Databases
    • Email accounts & calendars
    • Company intranet
    • Remote Desktop
    ...whilst working via VPN.

    How to share VPN Shortcuts with your team via TeamCloud
    TeamCloud enables you to instantly share pre-configured Shortcuts and VPN connections with your team members: Simply choose a custom Shortcuts collection and click "Share with Team" in the top right corner.

    You can then select your team, review your choice and click to share with everyone:



    Once a Shortcuts collection has been shared, it will be available for all of your team to access with no further action required.

    How to export VPN Shortcuts as a .zip file
    Alternatively, you can also opt to export VPN Shortcuts as a .zip file which users can manually import into VPN Tracker 365.

    Go to the VPN connection where your Shortcuts are configured and click "Configure" to open the configuration settings.

    At the bottom of this window, go to "Export Settings" here you will see a range of different settings for your connection export. Go to "VPN Shortcuts" and check the box next to the Shortcuts Collection you wish to share:



    Close the settings window, then click "Export". Select an export location and enter an import password for better security. Once you're ready, click "Export" to create a .zip file of the connection which you can send to your team members:



    Once a team member receives the file, they can double click it to open the connection in the VPN Tracker 365 app on their Mac, then enter your chosen import password. Following this, the VPN connection, along with all the Shortcuts you configured, will be ready to use straight away.
    Which WatchGuard Routers are supported and tested with VPN Tracker?
     
    For detailed information and list of compatible WatchGuard devices, please refer to this page.
    Guides for this router can be found in our Configuration Guides.
    Here is a list of products that are compatible with VPN Tracker:
    My Connections do not update from my Personal Safe after logging in on my Mac.
     
    VPN Tracker uses public key pinning for maximum data protection of your Personal Safe. As a consequence only the original certificate as sent by our servers is accepted by VPN Tracker.
    Some firewalls interfere in the exchange of TLS traffic.
    If that cert is replaced by a firewall or an anti-virus software in an attempt to decrypt the TLS traffic, then the replacement cert is negleceted by the system, even if it otherwise correctly validates.

    If you login on a Mac and you do not see your connections update from your Personal Safe, then check
    - if your firewall or anti-virus software is interfering the the TLS traffic to your Mac.
    - ask your administrator if there is any TLS traffic interfering
    I'm missing some configuration options, how can I see them all?
     
    When you choose your VPN device in VPN Tracker, you'll see the configuration options and features supported by that VPN gateway when we tested it.

    If you would like to choose other values, you can switch to a generic profile to reveal all the options VPN Tracker supports.
    Note: By doing so you will be able to select options that your VPN gateway may not support, so be sure to carefully check the settings match your VPN gateway's configuration.

    To see all options:

    • Go to Configure > Basic
    • Click on the currently selected Profile under "Connection based on"
    • Choose "IPsec/L2TP/OpenVPN/SSL/PPTP"
    • Choose your VPN protocol from the list and click Apply
    • Choose "Don't overwrite" to preserve the default settings for your device





    You'll now be able to choose all options supported by VPN Tracker 365 for your VPN protocol.
    What is a VPN?
     
    A VPN (virtual private network) is a communication method between two parties in the internet over a so called VPN tunnel.

    The VPN Tracker Software is a VPN tool, which can be used to create a VPN connection on Apple Mac computers.

    What's the point of a VPN?


    When you are travelling away from home or your office, for example the coffee shop around the corner or you're working from home, a VPN gives you the option to create a secure connection to a private or company network. This gives you access to Servers, Cameras or other services which are usually only accessible in your local network. We call this VPN Tracker Company Connect. With VPN Tracker Company Connect you can move about your company's network as if you are sitting at the desk in your office, no matter if you are in a different country, or visiting a customer a few miles away.

    Secure data


    VPN connections can also be used to generally secure a data connection (for example in a public WIFI network) or to simulate a connection from a different country. We call this VPN Tracker World Connect.

    How do you establish a VPN connection?


    In order to establish a VPN connection, you need a VPN software, also called VPN tool or VPN client. VPN Tracker is the leading VPN software for Apple computers. The VPN Software allows you to configure and establish a VPN connection to the remote network.
    Can I use VPN Tracker on my Mac with PPTP connecting to a personal hotspot?
     
    Using your iPhone's personal hotspot
    Unfortunately, as of iOS 10 or later, iPhone personal hotspots no longer support PPTP VPN connections.

    Can I use an Android phone instead?
    The restriction on PPTP over personal hotspot also applies to many Android phones, though it may vary by manufacturer and OS version. If you have an older Android device around, it might be worth testing with that first (we recommend holding off on any updates, that might disable PPTP support).

    Other options
    As an alternative, you may be able to use a personal WiFi hotspot device ("MiFi"), provided it supports PPTP passthrough. Check your device's specs for "VPN passthrough" or "PPTP passthrough".
    My DNS is not working correctly when I check it with NSLookup and other tools
     
    Please note that you cannot use nslookup to test if VPN Tracker has set DNS correctly, as nslookup talks directly to DNS servers and doesn’t use the standard system APIs.

    To verify your VPN is pushing DNS settings correctly, run "scutil --dns" in the Terminal once your VPN connection is up. The first resolver in the list (#1) is the primary resolver your system will usually query first; only if it receives no reply, the other resolvers are queried in order, unless there is a resolver specific to the domain you want to resolve (e.g. to resolve test.example.net the resolver with the domain example.net would be queried first).
    "> My connection times out at the beginning of connection establishment ("VPN Gateway not responding (Phase 1)") when using SonicWALL Simple Client Provisioning, but works fine using DHCP over IPsec.
     

    SonicWALL Simple Client Provisioning requires VPN Tracker to send an initial data packet to the VPN gateway that is so large that it may be split ("fragmented") into two IP packets. Some routers are known to not let these packets pass.

    If a router between VPN Tracker and the SonicWALL is affected by this problem, you (or your SonicWALL's admin) will notice no connection attempt arriving at the SonicWALL when Simple Client Provisioning is turned on (i.e. there will be nothing in the SonicWALL's log, and a packet trace will show no packets from VPN Tracker), but everything will work fine with DHCP over IPsec.

    Routers known to have these problems:

    • AirPort Extreme with firmware versions prior to 7.3.1, works when upgraded to 7.3.1
    How can I backup my VPN Tracker settings?
    How can I copy my VPN Tracker settings to my new Mac?
     

    The following article describes where VPN Tracker stores its data in case you need to make manual backups instead of using Time Machine.

    VPN Tracker stores all its data files in the standard system locations as recommended by Apple. Depending on the fact if these are system-wide or per-user files, they are either found in /Library (system-wide) or ~/Library (per-user), where ~ is a placeholder meaning "home of the current active user".

    To access the system-wide library folder:

    • In Finder Choose "Go" > "Go to Folder ..."
    • Enter /Library

    To access the user library folder:

    • In Finder Choose "Go" > "Go to Folder ..."
    • Enter ~/Library

    VPN shortcuts, all information related to your equinux ID, accounting data, scanner results, and window positions are per-user settings.

    For a full backup of all your settings, you need to backup the following files and folders:

    • /Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365
    • /Library/Preferences/com.vpntracker.365mac.plist
    • ~/Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365
    • ~/Library/Preferences/com.vpntracker.365mac.plist

    Backup your keychain
    Please note that passwords in VPN Tracker are usually not stored in any of the locations named above but in your keychain. If you have no external backup of all your passwords, be sure to also backup your keychains which can be found in ~/Library/Keychains

    Why use Remote Connection Wipe? Can’t I just lock a user out on my VPN gateway?
     

    Remote Connection Wipe offers additional security by removing information about your VPN infrastructure. You may also want to use Remote Connection Wipe for compliance purposes or when working with external contractors.

    Remote Connection Wipe also has the added benefit of working with any VPN connection, even those that don’t offer user authentication. This lets you to block VPN access for an individual user without having to distribute a new connection to your entire team.

    I'm a reseller. How can I transfer VPN Tracker 365 plans to my customers?
     
    License management for Resellers is performed as follows:
    1. Go to my.vpntracker.com and log in with your reseller ID
    2. Navigate to the Reseller section in the left hand menu, here you will see all of your orders and the plans you purchased with each order.
    3. Next to the license(s) you want to Transfer to a customer select "Transfer all..."
      Please note, this button will only appear if the license is available for transfer.
    4. Enter the email address of the customer you are transferring the licenses to and press "Transfer".


    My VPN gateway offers an IPsec and L2TP option. Which one should I choose?
     
    For performance reasons, we would recommend IPsec. L2TP only adds more overhead to the protocol stack for no real benefit.

    In network environments where IPsec won't work, L2TP over IPsec won't work either.
    How can I consolidate VPN Tracker 365 licenses?
     
    To combine multiple VPN Tracker 365 plans into one so they have the same expiration date, please follow these steps:
    • Log in to your account at my.vpntracker.com and select your team from the sidebar menu
    • Under Subscriptions, you can see an overview of your existing plans
    • At the top of the page you will see a "Merge Subscriptions" button. Press this.
    • Select the plans you would like to combine by clicking on the checkbox on the left side next to each plan
    • Once you have selected all plans, click Combine Subscriptions at the bottom of the window




    On the next page, you can preview the plans which will be merged and also have the option of upgrading to a different license type or adding new licenses, if needed.

    On the right, you will see your new plan. Your new plan will start from today’s date and will run for one year. Your existing licenses will also be renewed.



    The Yearly total is the total price for one year. The Prorating Discount is the remaining value of your existing licenses which gets deducted from the yearly total to make the Amount due now. Check the Terms and Conditions and click Pay now to finalise your changes.
    What is the difference between VPN Tracker and SonicWALL VPN clients?
     
    Although SonicWALL’s Mobile Connect and NetExtender offer great VPN user experience, they are designed to work only with SonicWALL devices. VPN Tracker 365 gives you an opportunity to create and use multiple VPN connections alongside SonicWALL SSL VPN. You can choose from more than 300 gateways of well-known brands, working with the major protocols - OpenVPN, IPSec, L2TP and PPTP.
    Do my colleagues get admin privileges for my equinux ID when I assign them a VPN Tracker 365 plan?
     

    With VPN Tracker 365 you can create a team under https://my.vpntracker.com and assign each team member a VPN Tracker 365 Plan.
    This will not give each team member access to your equinux ID. The team members will only see their assigned plan in their own equinux ID after logging in to https://my.vpntracker.com. You will stay the only admin of your equinux ID.

    Does VPN Tracker support SSTP?
     
    VPN Tracker offers support for SSTP (secure socket tunneling protocol)! SSTP support is available in all VPN Tracker plans for Mac, iPhone and iPad. Get the latest version here.
    How does Personal Safe deal with data conflicts?
     

    Symptom


    When using Personal Safe, a data conflict may arise. E.g. if a connection is altered on machine A and also updated in the safe, and then the same connection is altered on machine B before it had a chance to update the connection from the safe, VPN Tracker has a problem: The connection now exists in two different versions, the version in the safe and the local one.

    Solution


    We decided that at all times, there can only be one “truth”, and as VPN Tracker is not able to tell who’s speaking the truth, it will show a conflict state and ask the user to please resolve it. Three options are available.
    1. Do nothing; the conflict will persist until resolved.
    2. The safe is right; the version from the safe is downloaded.
    3. VPN Tracker is right; the version of VPN Tracker is written to the safe.

    Reasoning


    The reasoning behind that is in fact very simple. You can change option A of a connection without breaking it and that change may also be meaningful. You can also change option A of a connection without breaking it and that change may be meaningful, too. However, changing both of these option may not be meaningful at all, these options may now even contradict with each other and that can easily break the connection. That’s why we decided to never merge individual changes into a single one.
    Why am I getting an "Update error" message?
     
    If VPN Tracker 365 is in your Downloads folder, your Mac treats it with additional security and may not let it auto-update. In this case, you may receive the following message:

    "VPN Tracker can’t be updated when it’s running from a read-only volume like a disk image or an optical drive. Move VPN Tracker to the Applications folder using Finder, relaunch it from there, and try again."

    To resolve this issue, please download a fresh copy of VPN Tracker 365 directly from our website and then drag the app to your Applications folder.

    Can you help me set up a VPN connection for my Ubiquiti EdgeRouter?
     
    VPN Tracker offers support for countless VPN protocols and gateways, including support for VPN connections on the Ubiquiti EdgeRouter.

    Our detailed step-by-step guide shows you exactly how to set up a secure L2TP VPN connection to a Ubiquiti EdgeRouter on your Mac in VPN Tracker.

    Can I use certificates or smart cards in VPN Tracker?
     

    VPN Tracker supports X.509 certificates (RSA Signatures) and smart cards using X.509 certificates (PKI tokens) for authentication.

    For more information, see the VPN Tracker manual.

    Tips for file server access over VPN on iPhone and iPad
     

    You can access file servers on your iPhone and iPad using VPN Tracker for iOS and the Files app:

    • Connect to your VPN
    • Open the Files app
    • Tap the ··· icon in the top right corner
    • Choose 'Connect to Server'
    • Enter your file server hostname or IP address (e.g. fileserver.internal.example.com)
    • Sign in with your company login credentials when prompted

    You should now see your file server volumes as you do on macOS.

    Troubleshooting tips

    If you experience trouble listing your files, there are a few things to try:

    • Enter the full volume path, not just the server hostname: e.g. if you are connecting to the share called Marketing on your fileserver, enter files.internal.example.com/Marketing
    • Ask the person who manages the file server to enable SMBv2 as well as SMBv3 (iOS uses some v2 features to set up the connection)
    • Try a 3rd party file server app from the App Store. Some of them offer better compatibility with certain file server configurations
    How can I update my credit card details?
     

    Visit my.vpntracker.com, log in to your account, and go to "Subscriptions" to update your payment method.

    Go to your current subscription and click on "Edit" to change the payment method. Click "Choose another way to pay" to add a new credit card or alternatively, add a PayPal account. This will be used as your new default payment method for your plan.

    I own two computers and I want to use VPN Tracker on both of them at the same time. How many licenses do I need?
     
    For the simultaneous use on two computers, you will need two licenses of VPN Tracker. A VPN Tracker license does not permit the simultaneous use on multiple computers. In this case each computer that is connecting simultaneously will need a unique license.

    For this we offer the convenient Team store, which allows convenient purchasing multiple licenses. Go to Team Store
    My L2TP connection is giving a socket error message
     
    Please try this:
    • Open the Terminal app (from Applications → Utilities → Terminal)
    • Paste in this command: sudo rm -f /var/run/vpncontrol.sock
    • Confirm it with your password
    • Then reboot your Mac

    Then try connecting again. The problem caused by the underlying networking components should be resolved.

    Is VPN Tracker compatible with Open Core Legacy Patcher (OCLP)?
     
    VPN Tracker is generally compatible with Dortania's OCLP project. However, some users report that you have to set the "AMFI" setting to "disable" in order for VPN Tracker to start correctly:
    • Get the latest version of the OCLP:
      OpenCore Legacy Patcher Releases
       
    • Start and click Settings:
    • Check "Disable AMFI":
    • Then select "Post-Install Root Patch" in the main menu and restart the device.
    The downside of disabling AMFI is that some 3rd party applications may no longer be able to access the system camera or microphone. Should you experience such an issue, you can re-enable AMFI after you've started VPN Tracker once and VPN Tracker will continue to work. The AMFI fix seems permanent; at least until you update macOS, in which case you may have to repeat those steps.
    What hardware do I need for a VPN?
     

    To establish a VPN connection to a certain location (such as your office), you will need a VPN gateway at that location. This gateway could be a hardware VPN gateway device (see our compatibility page for compatible devices and setup guides).

    The VPN gateway needs to be connected to the Internet (e.g. to a DSL modem or similar), preferably with a static IP address or it should be capable of using a service like DynDNS.org to map its dynamic IP to a hostname. Configuration is easiest if the VPN gateway is also the router (default gateway) of its network. If the VPN gateway is not the router of its network, a suitable routing setup may be necessary for traffic over the VPN to be routed correctly.

    Configuration details can be found in the configuration guides for specific devices.

    I'm having problems with my OpenVPN connection, the connection keeps dropping out. I am using the “TLS-Crypt” option on the OpenVPN server.
     
    With TLS-Crypt the data is encrypted twice. Once with the connection key, which is renegotiated every connection, and once with a static key, which is part of the config and therefore never changes. In order to better secure this static key, with TLS-Crypt the packets contain an additional timestamp that is otherwise not needed and this causes the problem.

    We therefore recommend turning off TLS crypt on the server. TLS crypt is activated by the following entry in the server config: "tls-crypt ta.key".

    If you remove this, nothing changes except that TLS crypt is no longer used and must also be switched off in VPN Tracker. This still gives you an encrypted connection, it's just no longer double encrypted, but simply encrypted once.

    This makes the connection even faster and not more insecure. TLS-Crypt only serves to make it impossible for attackers to find an OpenVPN server on the network and, if necessary, to paralyze it via a DoS attack, because if the first packet is not correctly encrypted, the server will not respond to the packet at all.

    Without a TLS crypt it would respond and only the negotiation of the key would then fail, but then an attacker would know that an OpenVPN server is running there and could bombard it with requests until it collapses, since it is responsible for every request computing time has to be spent.
    Can I continue using VPN Tracker 365 after the expiration of my term?
     
    You need an active VPN Tracker 365 plan to connect to your VPN. If your plan expires, you can see your connections, but you will need to renew to continue using your VPN connections.
    How can I improve VPN Tracker's connection speed?
     
    VPN Tracker itself has little to no influence on your throughput speed. It will process data as fast as your system wants to send it out and it will process incoming data as fast as it comes in. The delay the actual data processing adds to the round-trip time is far below 0.1 ms, which is never noticeable.

    In most cases, the factor limiting your connection speed is actually the VPN gateway you are connecting to, as this must handle all VPN connections of all VPN users at the same time as performing other tasks (e.g. keeping the whole network behind the gateway with all its hosts connected to the Internet.)

    How to proceed


    Please verify that the remote side doesn't have any speed issues and then try to reboot your VPN gateway.

    If rebooting didn't help and someone at the remote side can confirm that their internet speed is working as normal, please consider the following two questions:

    1. Are you the only VPN user?
    2. What kind of service/protocol are you using over the VPN? (web, mail, file access, etc.)

    Both of these factors could also be affecting your connection speed.
    I got a "Legacy System Extension" warning?
     
    In macOS Catalina, a message may be displayed warning you about a Legacy System Extension. This message can be disregarded:

    Since macOS Big Sur, VPN Tracker uses a new System Extension that uses the very latest system APIs and is fully supported by newer macOS versions.

    Due to bugs with the way macOS Catalina loads newer System Extensions, VPN Tracker for Mac will continue to use the legacy System Extension under this and older macOS versions.

    Rest assured that when you choose to upgrade to the latest macOS version, VPN Tracker for Mac is ready with support for the new release.
    What is a VPN connection?
     
    A VPN (virtual private network) is a communication method between two parties in the internet over a so called VPN tunnel.

    The VPN Tracker Software is a VPN tool, which can be used to create a VPN connection on Apple Mac computers.

    What's the point of a VPN?

    When you are travelling away from home or your office, for example the coffee shop around the corner or you're working from home, a VPN gives you the option to create a secure connection to a private or company network. This gives you access to Servers, Cameras or other services which are usually only accessible in your local network. We call this VPN Tracker Company Connect. With VPN Tracker Company Connect you can move about your company's network as if you are sitting at the desk in your office, no matter if you are in a different country, or visiting a customer a few miles away.

    Secure data

    VPN connections can also be used to generally secure a data connection (for example in a public WIFI) or to simulate a connection from a different country. We call this VPN Tracker World Connect.

    How do you establish a VPN connection?

    In order to establish a VPN connection, you need a VPN software, also called VPN tool or VPN client. VPN Tracker is the leading VPN software for Apple computers. The VPN Software allows you to configure and establish a VPN connection to the remote network.
    Does VPN Tracker support 2-factor authentication?
     
    VPN Tracker supports two-factor authentication (2FA) for your equinux ID account, as well as for your VPN connection login.

    2FA for your equinux ID
    You can configure 2FA for your equinux ID to add additional security for your VPN connections. Learn more…

    2FA for your VPN connections
    VPN Tracker offers support for two-factor authentication (2FA) for certain VPN setups. Depending on your VPN gateway and protocol, you may be able to use 2FA based on OTP codes, X.509 certificates, smart cards or PKI tokens, as well as authenticator tokens such as RSA SecurID, CryptoCard, FortiToken etc.

    When you connect to your VPN, VPN Tracker will automatically ask you for your 2-factor code after signing in with your user credentials.
    Can I adjust the number of VPN Tracker 365 plans in my subscription?
     
    Sure! Just send us a quick message and we'll be happy to adjust your plans for you.
    Why can't I see our TeamCloud connection?
     

    If you're not able to access your team's VPN connection via TeamCloud, please check the following:

    • Make sure you have the latest version of VPN Tracker 365.
    • You'll need to be a member of your company's VPN Tracker Team – contact your IT person if you haven't been added.
    • If you have just been added to your Team, your Team manager will need to launch VPN Tracker or go to my.vpntracker.com to complete your TeamCloud setup.
    • If you see some, but not all of your Team's TeamCloud connections, you may need to upgrade your license to access them all.

    If your question isn't answered above, please get in touch.

    How can I verify my email address to start using VPN Tracker 365?
     
    Downloaded VPN Tracker 365 and want to start setting up your account? You can follow these simple steps to verify your email address and get started with the app:

    1. After you've downloaded and opened VPN Tracker 365, click on Sign in > Create Account



    2. Enter the credentials for your new account (Name, Email, Password) in the space provided.
    3. Next you'll receive an email to the address you used to sign up with:



    4. Click on the link in the email to verify your address. If you can't find the email in your main inbox, make sure to check your spam folder.
    5. Once your address has been verified, you will be able to purchase a VPN Tracker 365 plan and set up your own connections.

    TIP: Add newsletter@equinux.com to your address book to make sure you never miss a message from the VPN Tracker 365 team.
    How is VPN Tracker 365 different with a demo license versus a purchased license?
     
    There are a couple of restrictions in the demo version of VPN Tracker 365. Please keep in mind the following:

    • A demo license is only valid for 30 days.
    • A demo license allows you to use all the Pro Edition features except the export feature.
    • A demo license restricts tunnel traffic up to 500 kb in either direction.
    • Once the 500 kb limit has been reached, a demo license allows you to stay connected for another 3 minutes.

    I own VPN Tracker 6/7/8/9/10, how can I upgrade?
     

    If you are an existing VPN Tracker customer and want to upgrade to VPN Tracker 365, you can simply install VPN Tracker 365 and your connections will automatically be imported:

    Download VPN Tracker 365

    Once you have VPN Tracker 365, you can purchase a VPN Tracker 365 plan.

    Which software could be responsible for VPN Tracker not working properly on my system?
     

    Some kinds of software may cause issues with VPN Tracker:

    1. Personal Firewalls / Desktop Firewalls
    2. Protection Software (e.g Virus Scanners, Malware Protection)
    3. Other VPN Clients / VPN Software (for example NCP Client)

    Personal Firewalls usually ask the user, if an app should be allowed to send network traffic. It’s important to grant VPN Tracker full network access. If you have already added rules for VPN Tracker, please whitelist VPN Tracker.

    Protection Software often sees VPN traffic as a potential source of threat, as it isn’t able to analyze that traffic because of its very strong encryption. Please ensure VPN Tracker is ignored by any protection software running on your Mac and allow VPN traffic to pass through.

    Other VPN clients should not be a problem, if they are designed to co-exist with othe VPN apps. Unfortunately, not all other clients are and some capture all VPN traffic as soon as they are installed, even if the app is not running.
    In these situations, you may need to uninstall the VPN client - we also suggest asking the vendor to improve its “cooperation” with other VPN apps.

    Here are some common examples of the types of apps mentioned above. If you are uncertain whether any of these applications may be installed on your system, try the following:

    • Open the app “Terminal”
    • Copy and paste the following command: kextstat | grep -v com.apple

    You’ll get a list of all kernel extensions that are not from Apple. Just compare that list with the identifiers in parenthesis below:

    • Little Snitch
      (at.obdev.nke.LittleSnitch)
       
    • TripMode
      (ch.tripmode.TripModeNKE)
       
    • Sophos Anti Virus
      (com.sophos.kext.oas, com.sophos.nke.swi)
       
    • Symantec Endpoint Protection / Norton AntiVirus
      (com.symantec.kext.SymAPComm, com.symantec.kext.internetSecurity, com.symantec.kext.ips, com.symantec.kext.ndcengine, com.symantec.SymXIPS)
       
    • Kaspersky Internet/Total Security
      (com.kaspersky.nke ,com.kaspersky.kext.kimul, com.kaspersky.kext.klif, com.kaspersky.kext.mark)
       
    • Intego Mac Internet Security
      (com.intego.netbarrier.kext.network, com.intego.virusbarrier.kext.realtime, com.intego.netbarrier.kext.process, com.intego.netbarrier.kext.monitor)
       
    • Fortinet FortiClient
      (com.fortinet.fct.kext.avkern2, com.fortinet.fct.kext.fctapnke)
       
    • Cisco Advanced Malware Protection (AMP)
      (com.cisco.amp.nke, com.cisco.amp.fileop)
       
    • TUN/TAP based VPN Clients
      (net.sf.tuntaposx.tap, net.sf.tuntaposx.tun)
       
    • eset Security Products
      (com.eset.kext.esets-kac, com.eset.kext.esets-mac und com.eset.kext.esets-pfw)
       
    How can I adjust the radius of text box corners in order to make its corners rounded in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Adding rounded corners to the background of a text area is not supported directly. However, to create this effect, drag a quadrilateral into an image area. You can find this shape under the "Basic Shapes" category.


    Adjust the size of the image area as well as the size of the shape to fit your needs. You can also change the color of the shape. On right side, you can adjust the corners by moving the corner radius slide.


    Then, drag a text object into the image area to create a text box effect. You can find text objects under "T" icon within the "Contents" tab. Feel free to position the text box and change its font style, font weight, font size, font color, etc. to fit your needs.


    Please refer to the following page for further information on how to create the effect of having rounded text box corners:


    Why does VPN Tracker tell me, the application is corrupt and needs to be re-installed?
     

    As VPN Tracker has low-level access to your system, it is digitally signed and checks that the app has not been altered in any way every time you launch it. If VPN Tracker it looks as though changes have been made to the VPN Tracker app, you'll see that message.

    What can cause this issue?

    Unfortunately other applications (e.g. Uninstaller/Deinstaller, Clean-Up Tools, and so on), that can cause this problem.

    Should you repeatedly run into that issue, please send us a copy of your VPN Tracker app. Locate VPN Tracker on your harddrive, copy it to your Desktop and create a zip file (CTRL-/right click VPN Tracker, then choose "Compress VPN Tracker"). By comparing the broken copy we can find out what has been changed and offer advice how to prevent it from happening again.

    How secure is TeamCloud?
     
    VPN Tracker 365 TeamCloud has been designed from the ground up to offer highly secure cloud storage for your team's VPN connections.

    TeamCloud - Key Security Architecture


    • Built using end-to-end encryption - our servers have no access to your connection data
    • Securely encrypted with user-specific encryption keys for additional security
    • Encryption runs locally in your browser

    Managing connections on the web


    my.vpntracker uses sophisticated WebAssembly technology to securely decrypt and encrypt your sensitive connection details locally within your browser - without sending any unencrypted data through the VPN Tracker servers.

    This allows Team Managers to edit connection files and add additional Team Members to TeamCloud on the web, without needing a Mac or VPN Tracker 365 running locally.

    Why should I set up a VPN Tracker team?
     
    The Team Management feature is an important security measure put in place to keep your VPN Tracker account safely protected from threat. As the information stored in your VPN Tracker account is highly sensitive, we strongly urge all VPN Tracker admins with licenses for multiple users to set this feature up.

    Here are some of the main security advantages from setting up Team Management:
    • Roll out VPN connections via TeamCloud
    • You can see who has access to your VPN and identify any users who should not have access to the connection.
    • You do not have to share your admin account with any other users.
    • You can easily revoke licenses from team members who pose a potential security risk (i.e. ex employees.)
    • Without Team Management, any of your other VPN Tracker users have the ability to sign in to your admin account and gain access to critical features, including assigning or revoking plans.

    To set up Team Management, please visit my.vpntracker.com

    To learn more, please refer to our Team Management Guide.
    How can I integrate VPN Tracker with a Cisco DMVPN (Dynamic Multipoint VPN) setup?
     

    One of our customers has kindly provided instructions on how to integrate Cisco EasyVPN and VPN Tracker with a DMVPN setup:

    EasyVPN Server and DMVPN Hub on 1 Cisco router tutorial

    Using VPN Tracker 5 with a Cisco Easy VPN Server

    Mail is saying "unable to load remote content privately" after updating to iOS 15
     
    iOS 15 introduced new privacy features, including one big change called 'Mail Privacy Protection'. When enabled, all images are loaded via Apple's proxy servers to mask the recipient's IP address.

    In our testing, this has occasionally caused certain mail images to not load correctly at all (you should see a hint at the top of the Mail app):



    If you are unable to load the images in your email, try deactivating this feature and sending your email again.

    To deactivate Mail Privacy Protection, open the Settings app on your iPhone, and choose Mail > Privacy Protection > Protect Mail Activity

    How can I buy additional VPN Tracker licenses for my team?
     
    To add additional licenses for your team, please follow these steps:

    • Log in to your account at my.vpntracker.com
    • In the Team overview, go to "Licenses". Here you can see all your existing plans
    • Then, click on “Add plans”
    • On the following page enter the number of licenses you would like to add and select the edition. Then click on "Add to plan"
    • Under Checkout you will see your new plan. Your new plan will start from today’s date and will run for one year.
    • The "Yearly total" is the total price for one year
    • If applicable (i.e. if you have merged your plans), the "Prorating Discount" is the remaining value of your existing licenses which gets deducted from the yearly total to make the "Amount due now".
    • Check the Terms and Conditions and click "Pay now"
    • You can now assign your licenses to your team members

    I have bought a personal VPN Tracker License, can I share this with colleagues?
     
    No. VPN Tracker licenses are personal and not transferable to others. Each colleague needs his own license. For this we offer the convenient Team store, which allows convenient purchasing for multiple people. Go to Team Store
    How many connections can I save in TeamCloud?
     
    Your TeamCloud storage allowance depends on the type of VPN Tracker plan you have.

    On this page, you can find an overview of TeamCloud storage in each VPN Tracker edition, as well as other significant features.
    VPN Tracker shows a status of connected, but I cannot reach any of my servers using WiFi from my phone (or USB from phone). Using a cellular signal off a MiFi device works but using hotspot does not.
     
    Test to see if your network or provider is working properly. If it works fine, then this could be a NAT-T/IPSec Passthrough problem.

    Please refer to this FAQ for further assistance on NAT-T/IPSec :



    Additionally, please re-run the VPN Tracker Connection Checker and see if this solves the issue.

    If this does not solve the issue, please send us a technical support report:


    How do I create a VPN on Mac?
     
    For the configuration of a VPN connection under Mac OS X, you will need the following:
    1. VPN Tracker 365: Download here
    2. An internet connection
    3. A VPN Router/Gateway


    Create a new connection


    In VPN Tracker 365, try the following:
    ‣ Click on the plus symbol in the bottom left corner:

    ‣ Choose: "New Company Connection"


    Choose your VPN Router


    ‣ In the list of VPN Gateway vendors, choose the manufacturer and model of your VPN router. In case your VPN router does not appear in the list, try the following:
    ‣ Choose "Use custom device profile."
    ‣ Click on "Create" to add your VPN connection.

    Your configuration guide


    Our engineers have tested a large number of VPN gateways with VPN Tracker. For many of these, detailed configuration guides are available. In the newly created connection, you will be able to find the router specific configuration guide:



    Alternatively you will be able to find the configuration guides on our website at http://vpntracker.com/interop


    Further details for creating your VPN connection on Mac OS X can be found in the configuration guide or in the VPN Tracker handbook.
    Can I connect to PPTP VPN in VPN Tracker?
     
    Yes! PPTP connections are included in all VPN Tracker editions. Please note that PPTP VPN is only supported in VPN Tracker for Mac, not on iOS.

    Start your free trial →
    How to resolve Personal Safe Errors
     
    You can recognize a Personal Safe error by the yellow warning triangle next to a connection

    This means that the local saved version of the connection does not match the version in the cloud. To resolve the conflict, click on the connection in the left menu and open the tab "Personal Safe"
    Click on the button "Fix sync issue".
    A dialogue will open. You have the option to choose which version of the connection you would like to keep. The local version, or the cloud version.

    To keep the local version, please choose: "Upload and overwrite cloud version"
    To keep the Cloud version please choose: "Download and overwrite local version"
    TeamCloud is displaying an "unknown download error"
     
    If you are still receiving an unknown download error after clicking "Retry", please try the following steps:
    1. Check if you can reach my.vpntracker.com
    2. If you can access my.vpntracker, try quitting and relaunching the app
    3. If that doesn't help, try again a bit later
    4. If it's still not working after a cup of coffee - reach out
    How can I create a quote for VPN Tracker?
     
    VPN Tracker offers a convenient self-service quote tool. Here’s how to get started:
    • Go to the VPN Tracker Store
    • Add the requested licenses to your shopping cart by clicking the Plus Symbol.
    • Be sure to select: “Purchase as new plan”. The quote tool does not currently support the “Add to an existing plan” feature.
    • Once you have added the licenses to your cart click on the blue “Save as quote” button on the right side of the page
    • Your product selection and price will be saved into a quote which will remain valid for seven days after it has been generated.
    • Be sure to log in to your account to see your final price.
    • You can share your quote with others by sending them the URL of your quote.
    • Alternatively, you can export the quote as a PDF or print it.
    • Once you are ready to purchase, just click the “Purchase Now” button and all items from your quote will be directly put back into your shopping cart and you can proceed with your purchase.

    How can I add multiple links in an image within my Mail Designer 365 email design?
     
    You are only allowed to add one link per image area.



    However, if you want to create the effect of having one image with multiple links, then check out our video tutorial:

    Watch our video tutorial here:





    Also, please refer to the following page for a step-by-step guide on how to create the effect of having one image with multiple links:

    How can I save a connection in my Personal Safe?
     
    Once you have set up a personal VPN connection in VPN Tracker 365, it is best practice to back the connection up in your Personal Safe. This way, you will not have to configure the connection again if you get a new Mac.

    To save a connection, right click on the connection in the sidebar and click “Add to Personal Safe ...”

    You can see whether or not a connection has been backed up if the Personal Safe icon appears next to it in the sidebar:


    The VPN connection is now saved to your account and can be accessed on a new Mac and on iPhone and iPad with VPN Tracker for iOS.
    Feedback helps!
     

    We use analytics to help us improve the app and your overall VPN experience. All measurements are completely anonymous and we never evaluate any personal information or any data going through your connection.

    What is measured

    • Generic connection settings (e.g. what type of connection it is, which options are being used etc.)
    • Which features are used (e.g. is auto-connect enabled, are any actions configured etc.)
    • How many connections you have

    Your data, your privacy

    • Your specific network settings or credentials are never read, captured or transmitted
    • Your VPN traffic is never analyzed, captured or accessible

    You’re in control

    If you’d prefer not to share any anonymous usage information with equinux, you can deactivate this option at any time in VPN Tracker’s preferences by unchecking 'Share diagnostics data'.

    Why does my existing connection stop working, as soon as I configuring multiple VPN tunnels on the VPN gateway?
     
    When an IKE server receives a connection request, and there's more than one IKE VPN tunnel configured on that server, the problem arises that the server needs to decide which tunnel this request is targeting and quite often it must base that decision only on the information available in the very fast packet. Knowing the correct tunnel is important as the tunnel configuration defines the cryptographic parameters as well as which pre-shared key or certificates to use. Which information will be available in the very first packet depends on the chosen exchange mode.

    In Main Mode the first packet contains a list of encryption algorithms, hash algorithms, DH groups, the desired kind of authentication (pre-shared key or certificates, but neither the key itself nor any certificates, both are validated at a later time), as well as information whether XAUTH must be performed, may optionally be performed or must not be performed. Further it can see the IP address of the sender from the network packet as well as the IP address to which this packet was sent to (as a gateway may have more than one address). It now needs to decide upon a tunnel only based on this information. Since Main Mode is typically used for static gateway-to-gateway connections and gateways typically have either a fixed IP address or at least a fixed (possibly "dynamic") DNS name, most servers base their decision only on the sender IP address. In case a VPN gateways also allows mobil users to connect using Main Mode, it will either only allow one such connection (this is a fallback connection, that will always be used when the sender IP address doesn't match any other configured Main Mode tunnel) or it allows more than one in which case it will try to guess the right one solely by the connection settings offered in the first packet. If these settings match more than one tunnel, any of these may win, which can easily cause the wrong tunnel to be targeted.

    In Aggressive Mode the same information is available but additional to that the local identifier (type and value) is sent in the first packet. As this identifier can be chosen freely and as it's also easy to make it unique for every tunnel, most gateways will base their decision solely on this identifier in Aggressive Mode. So it's fundamental easier to operate multiple user VPN connections using aggressive mode. All that is required is configuring a unique remote identifier for each of them and then using this remote identifier as local identifier in the client (what is remote for the gateway is local for the client and the other way round).
    Using an L2TP VPN to an private 10.x.x.x network results in a 10.0.0.0/8 route to this network ignoring other local tunnels. Why is that?
     
    An L2TP connection is basically a PPP tunnel over an IPSec connection and the PPP protocol is so old that it predates the existence of subnet masks. When the PPP server at the remote end assigns you an IP address, PPP infers the subnet mask from the assigned IP address:

    If the IP address starts with 192.168. the inferred mask is /24,
    if the IP address starts with 172.16. to 172.31. the inferred mask is /16
    if the IP address starts with 10. the inferred mask is /8.

    Those where the old network classes and this is the official standardized behavior for the PPP protocol. For more information, please see https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classful_network#Classful_addressing_definition

    If you don't like the entire 10.0.0.0/8 network to be routed over VPN, you need to ensure that VPN clients get an IP address from a different address range, for example an address from a 192.168.x.0 network (preferable with x not 0 or 1 as that will often collide with networks users have at home).

    Any additional remote networks you can enter in VPN Tracker are optional and they are "additional" to the network you will gain access anyway derived from the assigned IP address which quite often is the only network required (in which case additional networks can be left blank).

    A plain IPSec connection without PPP tunneling will not have this issue as IPSec is aware of subnet masks but when used for L2TP, IPSec only encrypts the PPP traffic whereas PPP handles the traffic routing.
    How do I assign a team member a license?
     
    VPN Tracker Team Management features allow you to conveniently manage groups of users, assign licenses and share connections.

    As a Team Manager or Organizer, you can assign available VPN Tracker licenses to your team members via your my.vpntracker portal.

    How to assign licenses:
    • Log in to your my.vpntracker account and select your team in the sidebar
    • Scroll to Team Members. Here you will see a list of the colleagues you have invited to your team and their current license
    • Click Manage to be shown your available licenses and select a product from the list to assign it to a user
    • If you have no available licenses, you can purchase more from the Team Store by clicking Buy licenses



    For more step-by-step information on setting up and managing your VPN Tracker Teams, check out this detailed guide.
    How can I update VPN Tracker to the latest version?
     
    Launch VPN Tracker 365.

    If a new version is available, you will see an update notification right away. Click it to install the update.

    If you don't see an update notification when you start the app, go to "VPN Tracker 365" > "Check for updates..." in the menu.

    Tip: If you're unable to update, you can also download VPN Tracker 365 from the Version History page.
    What would I need Remote Connection Wipe for?
     

    The majority of VPN users use their Mac out and about on the go. If a MacBook ever gets lost or stolen, there’s a risk that remote access to your network could fall into the wrong hands. With VPN Tracker, you can prevent unauthorized VPN access by remotely revoking access to the connection.

    Who has access to the VPN connections I save in TeamCloud?
     
    When you share a VPN connection via TeamCloud, the connection is made available to your entire team by default.

    Can I share VPN connections only with specific users?
    TeamCloud group support is now available. Use this feature to share connections with just a subset of your team (e.g. only admins or only the marketing department.)
    I've already purchased but want to change to a different license
     

    If you have already purchased a VPN Tracker license but would like to change to a different product, you have two options:

    1. Purchase an upgrade In most cases you can upgrade your existing plan. The VPN Tracker store will automatically pro-rate your purchase based on the remaining value of your current product.

    Go to your my.vpntracker upgrade page to see your upgrade options.

    2. Convert your product to store credit If you purchased with a different account or want to swap to a different product line altogether, you can convert your existing license to store credit and put that towards your new purchase: Note: If the value of your old product is greater than the cost of your new product, you'll receive another promocode over the remaining value.

    How to enter multiple networks for Traffic Control
     
    If you need to enter multiple remote networks, or want to adjust routing for multiple networks with Traffic Control, you can do so by clicking the plus arrow to the left of the configuration:



    Here you can add and remove address fields to use with Traffic Control.

    You can enter the addresses or networks in the following formats:
    • As a single address, e.g. "192.168.10.4",
    • as a single remote network, e.g. "192.168.10.0" (VPN Tracker will use the most typical subnet),
    • in CIDR notation, e.g. "192.168.10.0/24",
    • or with the full subnet, e.g. "192.168.10.0 / 255.255.255.0", which VPN Tracker will then convert to CIDR notation.
    How can I remove a payment method?
     
    If you wish to remove a payment method from your account - e. g. because it has expired or is no longer valid - please get in touch with our support team.

    Please be aware that all active subscriptions require a linked payment method. Without this, the subscription will end immediately.
    How do I forward my email template without altering the email design?
     
    Whenever you want to forward your email newsletter, please make sure to use your mail client's "Forward as Attachment" or "Redirect" feature. This ensures that the email design is forwarded and not modified. Refrain from using the forward button that you typically use to forward emails. The normal forwarding can break the email template.

    What happens when you use the normal forwarding button is that the mail client will need to modify the email newsletter, so you, the user, will be able to add your own content. This typical whenever you forward a message - the forward action will prompt the mail client to give you space to write an additional message to the person you are forwarding the email to. Unfortunately, with this process, most mail clients can break the email layout and there is nothing we can do to prevent that from happening. So when you want to forward your email template to someone, our best email design practice is to use your mail client's "Forward as Attachment" or "Redirect" feature.
    I accidentally deleted VPN Tracker 365 from my Mac. What should I do?
     
    Don't worry if you accidentally deleted VPN Tracker 365! We understand that these things happen and we've got your back.

    To reinstall VPN Tracker 365, go to our website and click on the "Download" link. Once the app has downloaded onto your Mac, you can log in with your equinux ID and password. When you log back in, you will find all of your preferences saved alongside your secure connections.
    What do I need to know before I use Unsplash photos?
     

    Quick summary of what to avoid when using Unsplash photos:


      people's faces are recognizable (unless you can get model release of those people)
      photos that show logos, trademarks, brands
      images that put people in a bad light
      photos of private property (e.g. private homes and buildings)


    Is the Unsplash license the same as the CC0 license?


    When it comes to using images that you did not take, create, or do not own, you should stay mindful of the laws and licensing types that guide images. Many image libraries are published under "CC0,” which means “no rights reserved." A CC0 license is also a way for photographers and artists to publish their work and give permission to the public to use their work for free.

    Curators who publish their works under CC0 and waive copyright of their works place them for public use. An image that has CC0 that carries this designation has “No Rights Reserved” and is free of copyright restrictions, and likely other restrictions (i.e., moral, publicity, and privacy rights). This is a very broad designation and it is clearly understood within the Creative Commons community that no work carries this designation unless it is explicitly marked as a CC0 work. As a result, anyone can use them, edit them, etc. without restriction of copyright law.

    Unsplash is similar to a CC0 license with one difference: the Unsplash license does not include the right to compile images from Unsplash and then use them to create a similar or competing service.

    While the Unsplash license give people a lot of freedom, keep these exceptions in mind before using an image:


      Are people’s faces identifiable? If they are, you will require their individual consent – and not just the consent of the artist or photographer who took the picture. Only use these photos if you are able to get model release from each person whose face is showing on the image.

      Does the photo show people in a negative way or can be interpreted in a negative way? If yes, then avoid using these photos. Otherwise, you will need to get model release from each person whose face is showing on the image.

      Does the picture show other products, trademarks, or logos? Refrain from using these types of photos because they may suggest that the other brand or product is endorsing your product or service.

      Do you see landmarks, buildings, homes, automobiles, etc. that are actually private property within the photos? If yes, avoid these pictures unless you can acquire the permission of the owner of the private property. Make sure that the photos you use do not show valuable information about other people's property like the address, license plate, etc.


    The Unsplash license and the CC0 license have these in common:


      ‣ They are both sub-licensable (so you can use them)
      ‣ They are non-revocable, which means that you are able to use them forever.
      ‣ They allow users to use the photos for free.
      ‣ They allow you to modify and/or distribute, perform the photos for free.
      ‣ They allow users to use the images for personal and commercial purposes.
      ‣ They do not require attribution, although it would be nice.



    Although you are not legally obligated to follow the list below, these are still good practice suggestions:


      ‣ You can use Unsplash photos for commercial use. However, try to edit or add to the photo creatively through image editing or other methods.
      ‣ Unsplash photos are non-revocable. However, if a photographer decides to remove his or her photo, it is good practice that you respect the photographer's wishes and refrain from using the photo.


    To get more detailed information, please make sure you read the terms and conditions of Unsplash here.
    Set up a VPN connection on Mac
     
    To configure a VPN connection on macOS, you will need the following:
    1. VPN Tracker 365: Download here
    2. An internet connection
    3. A VPN Router/Gateway


    Create a new connection


    In VPN Tracker 365, try the following:
    ‣ Click on the plus symbol in the bottom left corner:

    ‣ Choose: "New Company Connection"


    Choose your VPN Router


    ‣ In the list of VPN Gateway vendors, choose the manufacturer and model of your VPN router. In case your VPN router does not appear in the list, try the following:
    ‣ Choose "Use custom device profile."
    ‣ Click on "Create" to add your VPN connection.

    Your configuration guide


    Our engineers have tested a large number of VPN gateways with VPN Tracker. For many of these, detailed configuration guides are available. In the newly created connection, you will be able to find the router specific configuration guide:



    Alternatively you will be able to find the configuration guides on our website at http://vpntracker.com/interop


    Further details for creating your VPN connection on Mac OS X can be found in the configuration guide or in the VPN Tracker handbook.
    Who should test pre-release versions?
     

    Availability of pre-release testing


    Generally, pre-release testing of Beta and Nightly builds is available to all VPN Tracker users. However, if you are considering updating to a pre-release version, please carefully consider the following information:

    Important information for pre-release testers


    Nightly and Beta versions of VPN Tracker are still in the development stages. The aim of pre-release testing is to identify any possible connection issues experienced by our testers and get these fixed for the final public release. This means we can't guarantee perfect stability and compatibility for existing connections.

    For this reason, we do not recommend an update to a pre-release version for production systems or anyone who requires critical access to their connection. In this case, we advise you stay on the main branch.

    Getting back to the main branch:


    If you've updated to a pre-release version and are experiencing issues with your connection, you can easily switch back to the last stable release.

    Does VPN Tracker suport Layer 2 (TAP) OpenVPN connections?
     
    OpenVPN Layer 2 (TAP) connections are not supported by VPN Tracker. TAP interface support in macOS is deprecated and will be removed in a future macOS release. We suggest that you activate Layer 3 (TUN) connection support on your router/gateway in order to use OpenVPN with VPN Tracker. If this is not an option for you, we're interested in learning why you cannot use TUN connections, so please don't hesitate to give us feedback on this topic.
    I am getting the error: "PPTP connect errno = 61 Connection refused"
     
    "Connection refused", means that VPN Tracker tried to open a PPTP connection and the server replied "I am not a PPTP server so I refuse your connection".
    This means that either this IP address is not correct, the PPTP server is simply down at the moment, or the traffic is already blocked by some firewall (which sends this reply on behalf of the real server) and thus won't even allow it to reach its real destination.
    How to renew your VPN Tracker 365 plan...
     
    VPN Tracker Enterprise Rollout
     
    You can easily deploy VPN Tracker on multiple Macs. By using the VPN Tracker installer package and pre-authorizing the System Extension with an MDM-profile, users will not need to enter an administrator password to start using VPN Tracker.

    Installing VPN Tracker remotely
    Download the Installer package file from our downloads page. This can be installed remotely and takes care of authorizing the components VPN Tracker needs.

    Pre-authorizing the System Extension

    VPN Tracker 365 uses a System Extension to create a secure VPN tunnel and manage network traffic.

    For Enterprise rollouts on MDM-managed Macs, you can pre-approve VPN Tracker's Extension using a special profile.

    Our Team ID is MJMRT6WJ8S.
    (Note: Earlier versions used Team ID CPXNXN488S - these should be replaced with the current version)

    VPN Tracker uses a Kernel Extension (KEXT) on macOS 10.15 Catalina and lower. The following bundle identifiers can be used to pre-authorize the KEXT:
    New (version 21 and later): com.vpntracker.365mac.kext
    Older versions: com.equinux.vpntracker365.kext

    Starting with macOS 11 Big Sur, a new System Extension is used:
    com.vpntracker.365mac.SysExt

    Troubleshooting
    If users are still seeing the "Allow System Extension" prompt, please try explicitly listing the System Extension identifier com.vpntracker.365mac.SysExt in your MDM profile (and not just referencing the Team ID).

    To check the status of the System Extension, you can run systemextensionsctl list in Terminal.

    Please see Apple's Support Document for more details.
    My email account password is being rejected, but I'm sure it's right?
     

    If you're trying to set up your email account in Mail Designer 365 and your password is being rejected, you may need to set up an app-specific password.

    What is an app-specific password for? Many email providers now require a separate password to be used in 3rd party apps, in order to increase your overall account security. This may be required, even if you do not use 2-factor authentication to sign in to your email.

    This means that you may need to create a separate password and use that in Mail Designer 365 in order to send emails directly from Mail Designer 365.

    Please refer to your email provider's security or account settings, or visit your email provider's help pages on how to set up a 3rd party email app.

    Links for selected email providers

    Why does Mail Designer 365 prompt me to sign in every time I want to use the app?
     
    Generally speaking, you should only have to log in to Mail Designer 365 when you first install the app (to ensure this is the case, we would always recommend that you have downloaded the latest version of Mail Designer.)

    However, despite this, it can sometimes be the case that your Mac doesn't store your login details in the Keychain. To manually fix this problem and stop the app prompting you to sign in every time you open it, please do the following:

    • Quit the Mail Designer 365 app.
    • Open the "Keychain Access.app"
    • Search for "Mail Designer" using the search field in the upper right corner of the window.
    • Here you should find the entry "Mail Designer account." Double click on this entry to get details.
    • Go to the "Access Control" tab and check to see if Mail Designer 365 is located under the "Always allow access to these applications" list.
    • If you cannot see Mail Designer 365 on the list, please press the "+" underneath the list, find Mail Designer 365, and add it.
    • Restart the app and login if prompted.



    Your login details for Mail Designer 365 should now be stored on your Mac. If you are still experiencing problems, please send us your debug logs and let us know via support@maildesigner365.com.
    Backend components failed to install. What can I do?
     

    Please follow these steps:

    1. Your Mac may not be remotely controlled during installation. Further details can be found here:

      Be sure to perform the initial setup locally on the computer.
       
    2. There may be a problem with launchd, which is responsible for installing and starting the background processes of VPN Tracker. In the easiest case, this problem can be solved by just restarting your computer.
       
    3. In case a restart did not solve the problem, start the program Terminal (from Applications → Utilities → Terminal) and perform (copy and paste) the following commands:
       
      sudo launchctl bootout system/com.vpntracker.365mac.agent
      sudo rm /Library/PrivilegedHelperTools/com.vpntracker.365mac.agent
      sudo rm /Library/LaunchDaemons/com.vpntracker.365mac.agent.plist
      sudo rm /var/run/com.vpntracker.365mac.agent.socket
      Confirm commands with your password when being prompted for it (note you won't see the password being typed). Afterwards, please restart your computer.
       
    4. If none of the above did solve the problem, see if you can locate any crash logs Start the App "Console" ( from Applications → Utilities → Terminal) and open /Library/Logs on the left, then select DiagnosticReports. Search for a current entry of com.vpntracker.365mac.agent. In case there is a new entry for every start of the app, please send us one of these reports for analysis.

    How many connections can I save in my Personal Safe?
     
    The number of VPN connections you can save in your account depends on your VPN Tracker edition.

    Should you require more storage than you have allocated in your current plan, you can easily cross-upgrade. Your remaining balance will be pro-rated against your new plan.
    Legacy VPN Tracker products: End-of-support
     
    In the following overview, you'll find the end of support dates for older VPN Tracker products with legacy licensing.

    VPN Tracker 10
    Support for VPN Tracker 10 ends on March 31st 2021. VPN Tracker 10 will not receive any updates/support after this date.

    VPN Tracker 9
    Support for VPN Tracker 9 ends on March 31st 2020.
    After March 31st 2020, VPN Tracker 9 will not receive any updates/support after this date.

    VPN Tracker versions 1-8
    These legacy versions are no longer supported.

    How to get support & updates
    If you are still using a older VPN Tracker version, we strongly recommend you move to a modern VPN Tracker 365 plan, which includes ongoing updates and support.

    What happens to unsupported products?
    As they are no longer being updated, they may stop working due to changes on your VPN gateway, server or other technical requirements.
    My images aren't being displayed in the Mailchimp Preview Mode
     
    In certain browsers - for example, Google Chrome - mixed http and https content is blocked by default. This can cause images to not be displayed.

    At the moment, Mailchimp are serving the images exported from Mail Designer 365 over http. If your browser blocks mixed http and https content on web pages, this will explain why you are unable to see the images when you preview your templates via the Preview Mode.

    We are aware of this issue and are currently working with the Mailchimp team to get it rectified.

    Workaround
    As a workaround, you can update your browser preferences to allow mixed content or switch to a different browser such as Safari, which by default allows mixed content.
    What plan do I need for Remote Connection Wipe?
     

    The Remote Connection Wipe functionality is available for all VPN Tracker 365 plans.
    Please note that you will need a VPN Tracker 365 Pro plan to export a VPN connection.

    In our white paper you will find all information to set up Remote Connection Wipe:

    http://equinux.com/goto/vpnt365/whitepaper

    Does VPN Tracker World Connect have a data limit?
     

    No, there are no data limits or restrictions for VPN Tracker World Connect.

    How do I invite a new team member?
     
    To add a new team member to your VPN Tracker Team follow these steps:
    • Log in to your my.vpntracker.com account
    • Select your team in the top left corner
    • On the left side choose "Team Cloud"
    • In the Invite section at the top, enter your new Team Member's name and company email address, then click "Send invitation".
    • The invited team member will then receive an automatic email invitation with a personalised link to click on and join your team.
    • Tip: Each VPN Tracker 365 user needs their own, personal equinux ID. After the user receives a team invitation from you and clicks the invite link, they can either create a new equinux ID or log in using their existing account.
    • In case the user does not receive the invitation email, you can access the invitation link by clicking on "Details" next to the user name

    • Once a team member has accepted your email invitation, you will be notified via email

    How can I verify the authenticity of my VPN Tracker download?
     
    We publish the SHA-256 checksum of each VPN Tracker download, allowing you to verify the integrity of your download before installing it.

    How to verify the checksum

    • Download the VPN Tracker.zip file
    • Open Terminal and run the following command:
    • shasum -a 256 ~/Downloads/VPN\ Tracker \ 365.zip
      (note the exact path may differ, depending on which version of VPN Tracker you’ve downloaded
    • Compare the calculated checksum to the checksum published on the Version History page.

    Note: Safari automatically unzips files it downloads, so you’ll need to ensure you’re comparing the checksum of the zip file, not the unzipped app.


    I added additional VPN Tracker 365 licenses to my account and was charged more than the cost of the licenses?
     
    When you add licenses through the my.vpntracker.com portal, your new licenses, as well as your exisiting licenses will start with the day of purchase and run for one year. This means effectively your existing plan is canceled and the remainig value is credited towards your new plan. Your new plan, including your new licenses and your existing licenses will renew on the same date, preventing the hassle of multiple billing dates throughout the year.

    Example
    You have 2 licenses with a renewal date of December 4th.
    On July 16th, you add 1 additional license.

    You will receive a credit for the remaining durations of the 2 licenses.
    Your new subscription will have 3 licenses and all will have July 16 as their renewal date. The price will be that of 3 licenses minus the credit for your remaining durations.
    How can I activate automatic renewals?
     
    To activate automatic renewal for your VPN Tracker plan, please follow these steps:
    • Log in to you your account at my.vpntracker.com
    • Go to "My Subscriptions" in the sidebar, where you will see your current active plan(s)
    • To activate automatic renewal, flip the switch from grey to green
    • After activating auto renewal, you will receive an email confirming the activation.



    Is VPN Tracker PCI DSS compliant?
     
    Yes, you can set up a PCI DSS-compliant connection with VPN Tracker. The PCI DSS Logical Security Requirements (version 2.0) require that connections use the following:
    • Two-factor (2FA) or multi-factor authentication (MFA)
    • Certificate-based authentication
    For IPsec VPN-connections, the additional requirements must also be met:
    • Main Mode exchange
    • 3DES or AES encryption
    • Perfect-Forward-Secrecy needs to be used
    For SSL-based VPN-connections:
    • SSL and TLS 1.0 are probihibited
    You will also need to ensure other logging and timeout requirements are met on the VPN gateway. Please see the full PCI documentation for details.
    Why is VPN Tracker asking me to install a Network Extension?
     
    To manage and set up VPN connections, VPN Tracker uses a Network Extension, also referred to as a System Extension. This component integrates directly with macOS to provide the necessary system services required by VPN Tracker. Without it, VPN Tracker cannot establish VPN connections.

    When prompted by the system to allow a new network extension, please confirm this action in the system settings, which should automatically open.

    If the system settings do not open automatically, follow these steps based on your macOS version:


    • macOS 15 Sequoia and newer: System Settings > General > Login Items & Extensions, scroll down and click on the ⓘ icon next to “Network Extensions”. Enable the toggle next to VPN Tracker 365 in the dialog that appears.
    • macOS 13 Ventura and macOS 14 Sonoma: System Settings > Privacy & Security, scroll down and choose “Allow” in the confirmation box.
    • macOS 11 Big Sur and macOS 12 Monterey: System Preferences > Security & Privacy, scroll down and choose “Allow” in the confirmation box.
    Why are my VPN connections disconnected when my computer goes to sleep?
     

    VPN Tracker does not maintain VPN connections when the computer goes to sleep for the following reasons:

    1. Immediately after waking up, the system may have different network settings than when it went to sleep, e.g. because the network cable was replugged while the computer was asleep, or the computer was moved to another location where a different WLAN is available, or a DHCP lease has expired and the DHCP server has to assign a new IP address to the computer after waking up because it has already given the old one to someone else, or the network interface no longer exists, e.g. if a USB network adapter was unplugged. In these cases, not only would the connection immediately stop working after waking up, VPN Tracker would also no longer be able to log off correctly from the remote peer.

      VPN Tracker would also not be directly aware of some of these events, as applications do not receive network events while the system is asleep and would therefore have to compare all network configurations after waking up with those before sleeping and decide whether the connection could still work or not, because with some VPN protocols there is no way to actively test this, with others only if certain options are used (e.g. DPD). A misjudgement leads to a tunnel being kept up that can actually no longer work and the user would then have to restart it manually before it works again.

    2. NAT gateways remember in a table how they map private IP addresses to public ones and how they rewrite ports for a limited time only. Depending on the protocol, this time span can be in the range of seconds or minutes (some gateways only remember this for 20 seconds with UDP). If such a table entry is lost, this does not result in an error, but a new entry is created for the next packet, which often results in a different mapping, which the remote station cannot cope with, because it now looks to them as if someone else is trying to hijack the connection, as the packets are suddenly coming from a different sender. VPN Tracker cannot know or check when it wakes up whether the previous table entry still exists or has already been lost and will not receive an error from the NAT gateway in the latter case, but the connection will still no longer work, which leads to the same problems as in the first case. It does not matter whether a local NAT gateway is used (as in most home routers or modems) or a carrier grade NAT gateway, which is located at the ISP and via which several customers can share a single public IPv4 address. The latter is increasingly the case, as there are no longer any free IPv4 addresses and therefore not every customer can get an own one.

    3. VPN protocols that use some form of Dead Peer Detection (DPD) expect regular data traffic from the other side. If this fails to occur, they send DPD packets and expect these DPD requests to be answered. If they are not answered, the other side considers the connection to be dead and deletes it. VPN Tracker is also unaware of this while the computer is asleep and cannot respond to these requests. After waking up, the connection would again no longer be functional, but even with DPD in use, this would often only be noticed after about a minute and until then the system would try to continue using this connection without the slightest chance of success, so that various applications would run into errors or disconnects.

    4. If a VPN connection is disconnected without the client logging off from the VPN gateway and without the gateway being aware of this, the client may not be able to re-establish this connection immediately or a connection error may occur the first time it is established. In the worst case, the client may even be locked out for a few minutes. This can occur in the first two cases if the network settings have changed after the sleep phase or if a NAT table entry has been lost.

    To prevent all these problems, VPN Tracker immediately terminates all VPN connections as soon as the system reports that it wants to go to sleep, and also logs off correctly from the remote peer. As soon as the system wakes up and reports that the network is fully operational again, VPN Tracker immediately re-establishes all these connections. This avoids all the problems mentioned above and normal applications have no network access while the system is asleep and are also used to the fact that no network is available for a short time after waking up, because this is also the case without VPN, especially if something has changed on the network.

    Does VPN Tracker support SSL VPN?
     
    Some VPN vendors offer "SSL VPN" as an alternative to IPsec VPN. SSL VPN isn't a single standard, instead each vendor has their own specific kind of "SSL VPN".

    VPN Tracker 365 offers complete support for SonicWALL SSL connections only, but we do plan on supporting some of the other popular SSL VPN variants in future.

    If you have a SSL VPN connection you would like to see support for, please let us know.
    What is the difference between the Import password and the unlock password for the connection?
     
    The import password is the password with that an exported connection is encrypted on disk. You need to provide it otherwise VPN Tracker won't be able to read the encrypted file. The intention of that password is to prevent that unauthorized users will be able to import or use that connection.

    The unlock password is a password that locks the exported connection from being edited. This password can be set in the export settings of your connection. If no password is entered, the exported connection will be locked for all users and can never be edited. The intention of this password is to prevent unauthorized users from modifying a connection.

    Please see this FAQ for further details:


    How do I import Tunnelblick connections into VPN Tracker for Mac?
     
    If VPN Tracker for Mac is already installed, Tunnelblick connections can be imported directly as follows.

    File > Import > Tunnelblick Connections...

    VPN Tracker then searches the directories

    ~/Library/Application Support/Tunnelblick/Configurations
    and
    /Library/Application Support/Tunnelblick/Shared

    and then offers a file selection for the first directory that contains connections. The selected connection is then imported directly.
    I'm a registered reseller. Can I resell VPN Tracker 365 plans to my customers?
     

    As a reseller you can purchase VPN Tracker 365 plans and resell them to your customers.

  • You can purchase plans for customers at your existing discount.
  • Purchased plans will be available for you to re-distribute to your customers.
  • You will be pinged by our system when your customer licenses are due for renewal, allowing you to offer them plan extensions.
  • Once you've purchased a plan, you can transfer it to your customers under https://my.vpntracker.com.
  • VPN Tracker 9 can't sign in?
     

    If you are using an older copy of VPN Tracker 9 and a supported macOS version, please update to the last release.

    If you are using a current macOS release, or plan to soon, we recommend moving to VPN Tracker 365. It offers support for new macOS releases, improved security, Connection Safe backup and sync and more.


    → Get VPN Tracker 365
    Can you help me set up a VPN connection for my TP-Link SafeStream router?
     
    VPN Tracker offers support for countless VPN protocols and gateways, including support for VPN connections on the TP Link SafeStream router.

    Our detailed step-by-step guide shows you exactly how to set up a secure VPN connection to your TP-Link SafeStream router and connect on your Mac, iPhone or iPad in VPN Tracker.

    How much does TeamCloud cost?
     
    TeamCloud is included in all VPN Tracker editions at varying levels. For more specific information about plan options and included features, please refer to the VPN Tracker Store.
    Why is VPN Tracker trying to connect to a different connection than the one I last used?
     
    Select the connection which VPN Tracker is trying to connect to and go to "Configure". Under "Actions", you will see this option: "Connect this VPN when VPN Tracker is opened". If checked, this will auto-start this connection every time you start the app.



    Note: If this auto start connection has an issue (e.g. no VPN gateway has been entered), you will be prompted with an error message each time you start VPN Tracker. Either solve the issues with the connection or – if you do not need to run the connection – uncheck the option "Connect this VPN when VPN Tracker is opened" to stop the error message from appearing.
    My VPN connection data has been uploaded to my Personal Safe. How do I completely purge and delete that connection data from my Personal Safe?
     
    Any data you upload to your Personal Safe is strongly encrypted. Nobody, not even us, will be able to access your data.

    Connections and Shortcuts which have been stored in your Personal Safe may be deleted in two different ways:

    1. In the VPN Tracker for Mac App


    In order to delete connections or Shortcuts from your Personal Safe, please follow the following steps:
    ‣ Go to "VPN Tracker" > "Preferences"
    ‣ Select "Personal Safe"
    ‣ Uncheck the connections and/or shortcuts you would like to delete from the list
    ‣ Press update
    ‣ This will delete all connection info from our servers.


    2. In a browser at my.vpntracker.com


    In order to delete connections from your Personal Safe, please follow the following steps:

    ‣ Open my.vpntracker.com  and log in with your equinux ID and password
    ‣ Select "Personal Safe" in the sidebar
    ‣ Here you will see all connections and Shortcuts which are saved in your Personal Safe.
    ‣ When you press the delete button next to any connection, this will instantly be deleted from your Personal Safe

    Why are Blowfish and CAST-128 not available in VPN Tracker when running on OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion or newer?
     

    The Blowfish and CAST-128 encryption algorithms have been removed in OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion. They continue to be available when VPN Tracker is running on OS X 10.7 Lion and earlier.

    Why doesn't my certificate show up in the "Local Certificate" list?
     

    For a certificate to be available in the "Local Certificate" list, it must be present in the Mac OS X Keychain with its corresponding private key.

    You can easily check this in the Keychain Access application: If a certificate is listed under "My Certificates" (and not just "Certificates"), its private key is available and you will be able to select it in VPN Tracker as the "Local Certificate".

    Important note for CheckPoint VPN users:

    The Mac OS X Keychain Access application currently does not understand how to read private keys from some CheckPoint generated certificates.

    To properly import the certificate into the Mac OS X Keychain, first convert it using the openssl command line tool:

    1. Open a Terminal ("Applications" > "Utilities" > "Terminal")

    2. Convert the certificate to PEM format:
        openssl pkcs12 -in /Users/joe/Desktop/MyCheckPointCert.p12 -out /tmp/out.pem
      

      Replace /Users/joe/Desktop/MyCheckPointCert.p12 with the path to the actual certificate that you want to convert.

      You will first be asked for the password that the certificate is encrypted with. If you do not know it, please ask the administrator who has created your certificate for you. You will then be asked twice for the password that will be used to protect the exported PEM file. You can use the same password that the original certificte was encrypted with. Note that no characters will appear on screen while you type in your passwords. Simply type the password and press the return key.

    3. Convert the PEM file back to PKCS#12 (.p12) format:
        openssl pkcs12 -in /tmp/out.pem -export -out ~/Desktop/MyFixedCheckPointCert.p12
      

      Replace /Users/joe/Desktop/MyFixedCheckPointCert.p12 with the path where you want the fixed certificate to be stored.

      You will first be asked for the password that you have just used for exporting to the PEM file, and then for a password to protect the fixed .p12 file with. You can again use the same password for everything.

    Now double-click your fixed certificate file to import it into the Mac OS X keychain.

    Why aren't my images showing up in MailChimp?
     
    Mailchimp have recently updated their image upload API, which has resulted in some compatibility issues when uploading email designs from third party services.

    What can I do?
    The latest Mail Designer 365 version includes support for the new image upload API. Templates uploaded using this version will not be affected.

    What about older email templates?
    If you need assistance with older designs that you've previously uploaded to Mailchimp and are now not working, please contact the Mailchimp team directly to report the problem. We generally suggest to re-upload the old template.

    Older Mail Designer versions
    Mailchimp no longer supports older versions of Mail Designer, such as Mail Designer 2 and Mail Designer Pro 2. For this reason, if you try exporting a design created using an older version of Mail Designer, you may notice that images are missing from your design.

    To ensure compatibility with Mailchimp and other leading email service providers, you should consider upgrading to Mail Designer 365.
    macOS 13.4 Support Note
     

    Due to a bug in macOS 13.4 you may encounter a System Extension issue when starting a VPN connection. Please update to VPN Tracker 23.1.4 which mitigates this issue.

    Download latest VPN Tracker version

    Note that in certain cases, you may still experience a System Extension issue when connecting to multiple VPNs. Restarting VPN Tracker will temporarily resolve the issue.

    We are working on an additional update to work around this bug in macOS 13.4.

    I cannot edit a connection that was shared with me
     
    If you are trying to edit a connection that someone else sent to you, please ask the person who sent you the connection for the password.

    In the export settings of the connection it is possible to set a password to prevent users from editing the connections. If this password is set, the imported connection cannot be edited without entering this password.

    Please note, this password is different from the import password.
    Connection Drops during Rekeying using TCP with OpenVPN connections
     
    1. What are connection drops during rekeying?

      Connection drops during rekeying occur when the VPN connection is interrupted during the key update (rekeying). This causes traffic to not be processed for a short period, which is particularly problematic for stable connections such as video conferences.

    2. Why does the problem occur during rekeying?

      The problem arises because, when using TCP with OpenVPN, the firewall does not accept any traffic during the rekeying process. This leads to an interruption of the traffic.

    3. What impact do connection drops have on a video conference?

      During a video conference, connection drops during rekeying can result in a complete interruption of the traffic. This causes the connection to break, disrupting or even ending the video conference.

    4. Why is TCP susceptible to this problem?

      According to OpenVPN, TCP is problematic for VPN connections because it is more sensitive to traffic congestion during network disruptions or the rekeying process. OpenVPN therefore recommends using UDP instead, as it can better handle rekeying processes.

    5. What solution does VPN Tracker provide for the problem?

      VPN Tracker offers a particularly user-friendly solution: when establishing a connection, VPN Tracker automatically sets the rekeying timer to 24 hours. This significantly minimizes connection drops due to rekeying processes, keeping the connection especially stable. Additionally, VPN Tracker supports switching to UDP, which allows for an even more reliable connection.

    6. Why should the rekeying timer be set to 24 hours?

      A longer rekeying cycle reduces the frequency of connection drops. By setting the timer to 24 hours— as VPN Tracker does by default— the likelihood of the rekeying process being triggered during a critical phase, such as a video conference, is decreased.

    7. What advantages does VPN Tracker have when using UDP over TCP?

      VPN Tracker makes it easy to configure UDP, which offers faster connections and less sensitivity to packet loss. UDP is more efficient and resilient to interruptions during the rekeying process, which is particularly beneficial for bandwidth-intensive applications like video conferencing or streaming.

    8. What recommendations does VPN Tracker provide for companies to optimize their VPN connections?

      For companies relying on stable connections, VPN Tracker offers simple and effective solutions:

      • By default, the rekeying timer is set to 24 hours to minimize connection drops.
      • It is recommended to use UDP instead of TCP whenever possible to further enhance performance.

    What is a "Peer Hangup" error?
     
    If you are trying to connect to VPN Tracker and you are getting a "Peer Hangup" error, here is what you need to know:

    "Peer Hangup" or "Peer Hang Up" means that the other side you are connecting to closed the connection and stopped talking to your VPN Tracker in the middle of negotiation. Unfortunately, it's impossible to tell the reason for such a behavior from your side of the connection. The reason can only be found in the log of the device you are trying to connect to by the VPN Protocol (like PPTP or L2TP). There are a number of reasons for this error. For instance, it could potentially be that it is unhappy with some configuration. For those using PPTP, it could be due to the GRE protocol it uses, which requires routers special handling. There could be a router between you (the VPN Tracker user) and the gateway that does not support GRE, causing the connection to time-out.

    My University is offering an OpenVPN connection with an ovpn profile. Can I use this with VPN Tracker?
     
    Yes you can import your ovpn profile into VPN Tracker. Follow the steps below to get started:

    Step One: Add a connection


    1. Open VPN Tracker 365
    2. Click on File > New > Company Connection
    3. Click on IPSec/L2TP/OpenVPN/SSL/PPTP
    4. Select “Connection based on OpenVPN protocol”
    5. Click “Create”

    Step Two: Configure your VPN connection


    1. Click on “Configure” and go to the “Basic” tab
    2. Drag and drop your ovpn file into the grey space "Drop OpenVPN configuration file here", or click on the space to browse for your file in Finder
    3. Your device’s unique configuration settings will be automatically filled out by VPN Tracker 365
    4. Click “Done” to save your settings

    Connect to your VPN


    1. Check first of all that your internet connection is working as it should be
    2. Use this link as a test: http://www.equinux.com
    3. Start the VPN Tracker 365 app.
    4. Click on the On/Off slider to turn on your connection.

    Done!

    Check out our VPN Tracker OpenVPN Setup Guide for further information and troubleshooting.

    I'm having disconnections with my OpenVPN connection. What can I do?
     
    Each side (i.e. server and client) sets its own rules as to when the connection key must be renegotiated. If connections are frequently lost, it may help to extend the time required to renegotiate the connection key.

    If no lifetime is set in VPN Tracker, VPN Tracker takes one hour (3600 seconds). The connection can be edited in VPN Tracker and this value can be increased. To keep the key valid for 24 hours, you would have to set the value to 86400 seconds.

    The same should be stored on the server side.
    Does VPN Tracker for Mac support the latest macOS version?
     
    VPN Tracker for Mac includes support for the latest versions of macOS, including macOS 13 Ventura and the new macOS 15 Sequoia.
    For the latest news and information on compatibility, including current known issues, please visit our release notes page.
    Connection Safe "could not be downloaded" error
     

    If you used an earlier VPN Tracker 365 beta, you may run into a Connection Safe sync issue with the following error message:

    Connection could not be downloaded. The operation couldn’'t be completed.
    VPNTHQ.HQConnectionSyncKeyError error 0


    To fix this problem
    • Sign out of VPN Tracker 365
    • Quit VPN Tracker 365
    • Open Applications > Utilities > Keychain Access
    • Search in the top right for VPN Tracker entries mentioning "master key", "sync master key", or "connection safe"
    • Delete these entries (Edit > Delete
    • Launch VPN Tracker
    • Sign in again and wait for your Connection Safe to sync (check under VPN Tracker > Preferences > Connection Safe)
    Join a VPN Tracker 365 team
     
    If you're working from home and need to connect to your company VPN, your admin invite you to a VPN Tracker team to assign you and your other colleagues a VPN Tracker 365 plan.



    A VPN Tracker 365 plan allows you to connect to your company's VPN from home and securely access the internal services you need.

    Here's how it works:

    • Click the link in the email to accept the invitation.
    • Create an equinux ID with the email address you received the invitation on.
    • Now, download the VPN Tracker 365 app and sign in with your equinux ID. Your admin will assign you a plan.


    You can now get started with importing a connection and connecting to your company VPN.

    Watch this quick video tutorial to learn more about joining a team:


    My regular AOL password isn't working when I set up my email account
     
    Like many other email clients today, AOL require app-specific passwords when setting up your AOL email address in another app or service.

    If you want to use your AOL email account to send email designs via Mail Designer 365, you will need to generate a special password. Here's how:

    1. Log in to your AOL account and go to your account settings
    2. Go to the "Account Security" tab and choose "Manage app passwords."
    3. From the dropdown menu, select "Other" and give the app a name (i.e. Mail Designer 365)
    4. Click "Generate" to create a new password. This will appear on your screen



    This password you have just created is the password you will need to use to set up your AOL account in Mail Designer 365.
    How do I change my Team Name?
     
    To change the name of your VPN Tracker Team follow these steps:
    • Log in to your my.vpntracker.com account
    • Select your team in the top left corner
    • On the left side choose "Team Cloud"
    • Scroll down to the section "Rename your team"
    • Enter your new Team Name and press "Rename"
    Why has the lifetime of certificates been shortened further and further in recent years?
     
    Whenever a security problem with certificates is discovered, the rules for certificates are adjusted and tightened accordingly. However, the new rules do not apply retroactively, i.e. they only apply to certificates that were created after the new rules have already come into force. Certificates that are older must still be accepted as valid, even if they were created according to older rules.

    The longer an old certificate remains in circulation, the more likely that someone with the appropriate knowledge and skills will come across it and then exploit its security problem. Therefore, you don't want to have long terms, because if a certificate has to be renewed, it must always be renewed in accordance with the current applicable rules and this happens sooner, the shorter its term is. In the past, the runtimes were too long, but this had led to problems several times when RSA was cracked with 768 bits or when a method was found to create SHA-1 collision, which means that signatures based on SHA-1 all at once could be forged. Back then, it took far too long until insecure certificates were no longer in circulation, which resulted in various avoidable attacks.

    By the way, renewing only affects the gateway certificate. User certificates do not need to be renewed if you exchange the certificate at the gateway. Users also do not need a new configuration. In fact, users don't even notice such an exchange. On web servers today, this usually happens automatically and even more often, as web certificates are often only valid for a maximum of 90 days.
    How can I update the address or email address of my equinux ID?
     
    Your account details such as address and email can be edited in the account management using the following link:
    Edit equinux ID
    Your old VPN app stopped working? Tip for Shimo / Green Bow / IPSecuritas and others…
     
    Does your existing VPN product not support the latest macOS release? Not to worry: VPN Tracker supports all major VPN protocols and includes ready-to-go profiles for over 300+ VPN gateways.

    And with full support for macOS Sequoia, you're all set even with the latest releases.

    Start your free VPN Tracker trial today.

    Learn more
    Can I consolidate licenses from two separate accounts?
     
    We have a new function in early beta that allows exchanging an existing license for a promo code with the same value as your existing duration. You can then apply the credit received to a new license purchased on your main account.

    In order to move ahead with the consolidation, please follow these steps:
    • Visit the license transfer page and log into the account which holds the license you would like credit for
    • Select the license you would like to exchange and confirm the license conversion. Your promo code for the remaining durations will be sent to your account’s email address.
      Go to my.vpntracker.com portal and log in with the account you would like to add the license to.
    • Click on “Buy additional licenses or upgrades” and add an additional license. Additional information on adding licenses can be found here:

    • Apply the promo code to your order at the bottom of the page, check the Terms and Conditions and click "Pay now"


    Note that you can only do one promocode per order, but with the pro-rating you can simply place multiple orders, one for each license you need to add and promocode you wish to redeem.
    Please be aware that License Transfer Codes expire after 14 days and must be redeemed before expiration.
    How to Fix the Error: Unable to Add VPN Configuration
     

    This error occurs when VPN Tracker lacks the necessary permissions to configure system VPN settings. Possible causes include:

    • An incomplete installation.
    • macOS reaching its limit on VPN configurations due to existing VPN setups from other apps.

    How to Fix:

    1. Check Existing VPN Configurations:

    • Open System Settings and navigate to the VPN section.
    • Review all listed VPN connections, paying special attention to duplicate or outdated configurations.
    • Remove unnecessary VPNs, particularly those from other apps.
    • If you only have one other VPN configuration listed, remove it.

    2. Restart VPN Tracker and Add the VPN Configuration:

    • Launch VPN Tracker and attempt to add the VPN configuration again.
    • If macOS prompts for permission to modify VPN configurations, click "Allow"—it should not require an admin password at this stage.
    • Try connecting through VPN Tracker again. It should now work without any issues.

    3. Restore Other VPN Connections:

    • Open the other VPN app whose configuration you removed earlier.
    • The app should prompt you to re-add its VPN configuration.

    By following these steps, you should be able to resolve the permission error and successfully establish a VPN connection using VPN Tracker.

    How can I add or change DNS entries of my Domain?
     

    We have put together a list of the best known providers including a link to the corresponding DNS setup guide.

    If you cannot find your provider in the list please do not hesitate to contact our support team for assistance.

    Domain Name DNS Setup Guide
    1&1 IONOS https://www.ionos.de/hilfe/domains/txt-und-srv-records-konfigurieren/txt-records-hinzufuegen-aendern-oder-entfernen/ (de)
    123-reg (GoDaddy) https://www.123-reg.co.uk/support/domains/how-do-i-set-up-a-txt-record-on-my-domain-name/
    Amazon AWS Route53 https://docs.aws.amazon.com/Route53/latest/DeveloperGuide/resource-record-sets-creating.html
    Bluehost https://www.bluehost.com/help/article/dns-management-add-edit-or-delete-dns-entries
    Cloudflare https://www.cloudflare.com/learning/dns/dns-records/dns-dkim-record/
    Domain.com https://www.domain.com/help/article/dns-management-how-to-update-txt-spf-records
    Domaindiscount24 (Key-Systems GmbH) https://support.domaindiscount24.com/hc/de/articles/4409774008593-Wie-erstelle-ich-einen-TXT-Record-- (de)
    domainfactory GmbH https://www.df.eu/de/support/df-faq/domains/nameserver/#accordion-1384 (de)
    EuroDNS https://help.eurodns.com/s/article/how-do-i-add-a-txt-record
    Fasthosts https://help.fasthosts.co.uk/app/answers/detail/a_id/9
    Gandi.net https://docs.gandi.net/en/domain_names/common_operations/dns_records.html#editing-your-dns-records
    GoDaddy https://au.godaddy.com/help/add-a-txt-record-19232
    Google Workspace Admin https://support.google.com/a/answer/180504
    Hetzner Online GmbH https://docs.hetzner.com/dns-console/dns/manage-records/managing-txt-records/
    Host Europe GmbH https://www.hosteurope.de/faq/domains/verwaltung/nameserver-eintraege/ (de)
    Hostinger https://support.hostinger.com/en/articles/4469063-how-to-add-and-remove-txt-records-in-cpanel
    INWX GmbH & Co. KG https://kb.inwx.com/en-us/3-nameserver/107-wie-richte-ich-einen-txt-eintrag-ein
    Microsoft https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/defender-office-365/email-authentication-dkim-configure?source=recommendations
    Name.com https://www.name.com/support/articles/115004972547-adding-a-txt-record
    Namecheap https://www.namecheap.com/support/knowledgebase/article.aspx/317/2237/how-do-i-add-txtspfdkimdmarc-records-for-my-domain/
    Netcup GmbH https://helpcenter.netcup.com/en/wiki/domain/dns-settings
    Network Solutions https://www.networksolutions.com/manage-it/dns.jsp
    OVH https://help.ovhcloud.com/csm/de-dns-edit-dns-zone?id=kb_article_view&sysparm_article=KB0051668 (de)
    Reg.eu (Openprovider) https://support.openprovider.eu/hc/en-us/articles/216648808-DNS-Records
    Strato AG https://www.strato.de/faq/domains/was-ist-der-txt-record-und-wie-kann-ich-ihn-verwenden/ (de)
    united-domains AG https://www.uniteddomains.com/faq/question/17
    Variomedia AG https://www.variomedia.de/faq/Was-sind-TXT-Eintraege-und-wie-funktionieren-sie/article/361
    World4You Internet Services GmbH https://www.world4you.com/faq/en/domains/faq.dns-records.html
    Key-Systems GmbH (now part of CentralNic Group) Not available
    InterNetworX Not available
    Schlund Technologies GmbH (now part of GoDaddy) Not available
    InternetX GmbH Not available
    Which Mac VPN client is the most reliable?
     
    When it comes to choosing a VPN client, there are several key questions you need to consider in order to determine which option is the most reliable, and which option will keep your sensitive company data protected.

    Does the Mac VPN client always support the latest operating system updates?
    Following the final release of a new operating system, many Mac VPN client manufacturers take several months to provide their customers with a solution. Do you really want to be locked out of your VPN access because your software vendor can’t get their updates ready in time?
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    VPN Tracker is always first when it comes to new operating systems. VPN Tracker is usually compatible with new macOS systems with the first Developer release of an new operating system.

    How good are the team management features for using the Mac VPN client in a larger setting with many users?
    Effective Team Management is a huge part of using a Mac VPN client in a professional setting. Do you really want to be put at risk, by an ex-employee, or would you rather choose the secure solution?
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    VPN Tracker offers a professional team management interface, allowing you to add new users and delete old ones easily. You even have the option of removing your company connections from the user’s computer.

    Does the Mac VPN client vendor have sufficient experience in the field?
    Corporate data is a highly sensitive area, and it's very important that your company's data is kept in safe hands. Choosing a vendor with a questionable background in the field could mean you're handing your corporate confidential data to an unknown organization with barely any experience, or even to someone who could possibly sell your data at a later point in time to refinance their efforts.
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    VPN Tracker is offered by equinux, one of the most experienced software developers for Mac and iOS. VPN Tracker has earned the trust of Mac admins around the world and always treats your confidential data with the utmost security. Through years of experience, we can confidently say “Your data is safe with us!”

    Does the software contain unlicensed code or suffer from poor security architecture?
    Nowadays, many software developers bundle unlicensed third party code and leave your system open to attacks with unsigned network components. This is a risk you really don't want to take when it comes to your data security.
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    VPN Tracker ONLY contains officially licensed code and has a securely designed security architecture that ensures your VPN connection is protected at all times.

    Is the software code 100% Mac native?
    The effectiveness of any Mac application can only truly be guaranteed if the code that the software is written in is 100% Mac native. A lot of the time, Mac VPN clients tend to use unsigned network components which can open up unwanted vulnerabilities and leave your system open to attacks.
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    The code used to create VPN Tracker is 100% Mac native. Every line of code was written with the highest security standards in mind, meaning the app is highly effective and the most reliable choice for protecting your sensitive company data.

    Is the VPN implementation secure and are the Mac VPN client components tamper proof
    A VPN client is a highly specialized piece of software. It must possess a 100% tamper-proof security architecture. Many VPN clients force insecure set ups and will require poor security settings in order to work. Your company's information is valuable, don’t put your data at risk by making the wrong choice.
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    VPN Tracker does exactly what is required of a reliable Mac VPN client and its components are all 100% tamper-proof.

    Does the manufacturer offer professional technical support?
    Even among the most experienced of IT professionals, VPNs can be a difficult topic and sometimes it's understandable that you need advice or a second opinion. In an ideal world, your VPN client should provide you with this, unfortunately, this is not always the case. Many manufacturers rely on support through forums. This means posting your sensitive VPN data on public forums and hoping someone will reply. Since VPN is the front door to your office, this is essentially the same as leaving your house key underneath the front mat. Not a good idea.
    Why choose VPN Tracker?
    The technical support VPN Tracker offers is one of the best in the industry. Your technical inquiries will be handled by customer support professionals on a one-on-one basis. The VPN Tracker support team works hard to quickly provide helpful answers and productive solutions to all inquiries, no matter how big or small.

    We are proud to say that VPN Tracker is the market leading VPN client for the Mac and guarantees you complete security for your confidential company data at all times. Download the free trial today to find out why VPN Tracker is the best and most reliable choice for your business.
    What is a MAIL FROM domain and when do I need one?
     

    What is a MAIL FROM Domain?


    When sending an email, there are two addresses that reveal its source:
    1. a FROM address, visible to the recipient
    2. a MAIL FROM address denoting the message's source
    Often referred to as the envelope sender, envelope from, bounce address, or Return Path address, the MAIL FROM address is utilized by mail servers for returning bounce messages and error notifications. Typically, recipients will only see the MAIL FROM address if they check the email's source code.

    By default, Mail Designer 365 Campaigns automatically assigns a MAIL FROM domain to the emails you send, unless you opt for a custom domain.

    This FAQ outlines the advantages of configuring a personalized MAIL FROM domain, as well as how to get set up.

    When do I need a MAIL FROM Domain?


    When you use Mail Designer 365 Campaigns for sending emails, the default MAIL FROM domain automatically uses a subdomain of Mail Designer 365 Campaigns (sentwith.maildesigner365.com). In this case, Sender Policy Framework (SPF) authentication effectively validates these messages since the default MAIL FROM domain aligns with the Mail Designer – i.e. the application responsible for sending the email.

    However, if you would prefer not to use Mail Designer 365 Campaigns' default MAIL FROM domain, and instead wish to opt for a personalized subdomain under your own domain, this is known as utilizing a custom MAIL FROM domain within Mail Designer 365 Campaigns.

    In short, using a custom MAIL FROM domain allows you to gain the flexibility to utilize SPF, DKIM, or both for attaining Domain-based Message Authentication, Reporting, and Conformance (DMARC) validation.

    DMARC empowers a sender's domain to signal that emails dispatched from the domain are safeguarded by one or more authentication systems. DMARC validation can be achieved through SPF compliance, DKIM compliance, or both methods.

    Requirements for a custom MAIL FROM domain


    When setting your own MAIL FROM domain, the following requirements must be met:
    • Must be a subdomain of the parent domain of a verified email address or domain
    • Should not be the same as a subdomain that you are using to send email from
    • Should not be the same as a subdomain that you are using to receive email

    How to set up a custom MAIL FROM domain in Mail Designer 365 Campaigns


    In order to set up a custom MAIL FROM domain, you'll need to add records to the DNS configuration for the domain.

    Mail Designer 365 Campaigns requires users to publish an MX record so that your domain can receive the bounce and complaint notifications sent to you by email providers. You will also have to publish an SPF (type TXT) record to show that Mail Designer 365 is authorized to send emails from your domain.

    1. Log in to your my.maildesigner365 account and go to From:addresses > Domain Verification
    2. Locate your domain in the list and click on the tab MAILFROM:




    3. You will now see and be able to copy the text for the new MX record you need to add to your domain's DNS record



    Tip: Unsure on how to edit your DNS record? Mail Designer 365 Campaigns automatically detects your domain's DNS provider and links you to a provider-specific guide:



    Please note once you are done, it could take up to 48 hours to update your settings, depending on your DNS provider.

    The green checkmark will indicate when the setup is complete:

    What is Corporate Branding and how can I set it up?
     
    If you are a Team Manager with a VPN Tracker VIP or Consultant license, you can set up Corporate Branding for your team.

    With this in place, team members with an Enterprise, VIP, or Consultant license will see your logo in the app sidebar. This is not only great for adding your corporate identity to VPN Tracker, but also helps consultants distinguish teams and connections.

    How to set up Corporate Branding:
    1. Open VPN Tracker or log in to your my.vpntracker account on the web
    2. In the sidebar, go to Manage Team and scroll down to the Settings area
    3. Under Team Logos, you will see the option to upload a light and a dark version of your team's logo. Select your logo files and click Save to sync the changes for your team



    Want to unlock Corporate Branding and additional VIP featues? View all plan options here.
    Why are my newsletter images appearing blurry in my email?
     
    If you or other recipients are viewing your newsletter on a Retina Display (e.g. iPhone, Mac or iPad), it is possible that images which are not high-quality will appear blurred and out of focus.

    For this reason, you may sometimes receive a warning message like this when inserting a low quality image into your design:




    In order to ensure that your images are displayed properly on all devices, you should always try to use images with high resolution. An alternative would be to resize lower-resolution images to be smaller so they remain crisp.

    Can you help me set up a VPN connection for my NETGEAR Nighthawk router?
     
    VPN Tracker offers support for countless VPN protocols and gateways, including support for VPN on the NETGEAR Nighthawk router.

    Our detailed step-by-step guide shows you exactly how to set up a secure VPN connection to your NETGEAR Nighthawk device using VPN Tracker.

    Error: System Extension - app must be in Applications?
     
    From macOS Big Sur onwards, apps with a System Extension must be installed in your Mac's /Applications folder.

    Please make sure you have the latest version of VPN Tracker for Mac and place it in your Applications folder (under Macintosh HD/Applications).
    I updated VPN Tracker and my connection has stopped working
     
    Please go to VPN Tracker > Preferences and check if you have activated pre-release testing. If you have installed a Nightly or Beta build, it is possible you may encounter some connectivity issues, as these versions are still in the development stages.



    I am having issues with a pre-release version. What can I do?
    Having issues? You can easily get back to the last stable release by visiting our version history overview and downloading the last full VPN Tracker version.

    If you decide you want to deactivate pre-release testing for the future, you can do this in the app preferences.

    Please note that pre-release testing is generally not advised for production systems or users who require critical access to their VPN.

    Need further support?
    If you need help with a certain connection issue, feel free to contact the support team. Remember to also send a TSR (technical support report.)
    I am having issues setting up my VPN connection with Fortigate. In the Fortigate web interface, I cannot fill in the Preshared Key, for example.
     
    There can be some problems with the setup in the Fortigate web interface, possibly with certain browsers like Safari. Here are some tips:

    • Check if there is a firmware update for the Fortigate device: Firmware Updates
    • First, set up the new connection in the Fortigate web UI, and then review all fields again by selecting ‘Edit’. This can help, as not all fields may have been visible during the initial setup
    Accounting: Accessing backups
     

    To safeguard your accounting data against accidental deletion, VPN Tracker keeps rolling backups.

    You can find them under:

    Macintosh HD/Users/YourUser/Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker/Accounting/

    (Note that the Library folder may be hidden: Choose "Finder" > "Go" from the menu bar and hold down the option key to open the Library folder).

    Your current Account files are stored in “Accounting.sqlite”. You'll also see all your Accounting backups in the same folder. They will be have a date in the file name.

    To revert to an earlier backup:

      ‣ Rename the “Accounting.sqlite” file to “Accounting-backup.sqlite”
      ‣ Delete the Accounting.sqlite-wal and Accounting.sqlite-shm files 
      ‣ Rename the backup you want to restore to “Accounting.sqlite”

    Can you help me set up a VPN connection for SonicWALL TZ series?
     
    VPN Tracker 365 offers support for countless VPN protocols and gateways, including support for the SonicWALL TZ series.

    Our detailed step-by-step guide shows you exactly how to set up a VPN connection on your SonicWALL device using VPN Tracker 365.

    How do I add emojis and symbols to my text in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Mail Designer 365 supports special characters, which you can add to your text to create icons for call-to-action buttons or as a way to simplify your messages.

    To add special characters:


    ‣ Open your email template if it is not already opened.
    ‣ Choose “Edit" > "Emoji & Symbols”

    You have different options from different categories like emojis, arrows, bullet points, stars, currency symbols, latin alphabet, trademark symbols, other letterlike symbols, math symbols, parentheses, pictographs, and punctuations.

    Please refer to the following page for more information on how to add emojis and special characters in Mail Designer 365:

    Why does the desktop show one font and on iPhone another font?
     
    When you send an email template, not every font that you choose may be available at the recipient's side. This is why you can specify a fallback font list, and we recommend that you use an email-safe font.

    Email-safe fonts are the basic fonts installed on everyone's devices. If you have selected a font that is available on macOS but not on iOS, there will be a visible difference on the corresponding devices. If both devices have the font installed, then the email template will look the same on both platforms. You can use Web Fonts which the recipient's e-mail client can downloaded on demand. Most e-mail clients except Outlook support Web Fonts.
    I'm having trouble signing in with two-factor authentication (2FA)
     
    If you are having trouble accessing your equinux ID account with 2FA, please read on. For support with 2FA for your VPN connection itself, please reach out to your VPN admin who can assist you with resetting your 2FA setup.

    Reset 2FA for your equinux ID

    If you no longer have access to your 2FA device, you can reset 2FA using your recovery codes. Visit the 2FA guide for details.

    I don’t have recovery codes

    If you no longer have your recovery codes, 2FA can be reset by the equinux support team. Please note that for security reasons, manual 2FA reset will take up to 72h to process, to reduce the risk to accounts.

    To proceed, please contact equinux support with your equinux ID and our team will let you know which additional data is required to reset your 2FA setup.
    How can I change the network address used by VMware or Parallels? It conflicts with my VPN's remote network.
     

    Parallels

    Go to "Preferences" > "Network" in Parallels and change the DHCP ranges for Shared and/or Host-Only Networking so they no longer conflict with your VPN's remote network.

    VMware Fusion

    A PDF with instructions can be downloaded from the VMware community forums:

    Transferring VPN connections and shortcuts from your reseller account to your personal account
     
    To use the VPN Tracker 365 Reseller Portal, you'll need separate accounts for your reselling activities and your personal VPN Tracker 365 license(s) and connections.

    Please note: You need to create a separate personal account by July 1st 2021 to continue using VPN Tracker 365.

    If you have VPN Connections and Shortcuts saved in your Personal Safe (formerly known as Connection Safe), you can transfer them over to your new personal account in just a few simple steps.

    Step One: Download a local copy of your Personal Safe connections from your Reseller account

    • Go to VPN Tracker 365 > Preferences > Personal Safe
    • Uncheck the box "Enable Personal Safe" to disable Personal Safe sync for all saved Shortcuts and connections and download a local copy on your Mac:



    • Important: In the dialog, select "Only Remove from Personal Safe"



    • Your connections will be stored locally on your Mac


    Step Two: Set up a new personal account

    • Sign out of your Reseller account via the button in the top left corner:



    • If you have not done so already, you should now create a new personal account.
    • This will be the account you use with your own personal VPN Tracker plan, as well as for internal Team Management (if relevant)


    Step Three: Assign your plan to your new account

    • Log in to my.vpntracker using your original Reseller account
    • Using the Reseller tools, transfer licenses to your new Personal account
    • Sign in to my.vpntracker with your new Personal account and assign yourself the license


    Step Four: Re-sync your connection and shortcuts data to your Personal Safe

    • Sign back in to VPN Tracker 365 with your new personal account
    • Open up your Personal Safe preferences again
    • Check "Enable Personal Safe" to add your connections to Personal Safe


    You can now access all your personal data in your own personal VPN Tracker 365 account and enjoy a much more streamlined and organized overview in your reseller account.
    How to add Shopify liquid variables to a custom email template
     
    Shopify offer a wide range of placeholder tags that you can use in your notification emails, which they refer to as liquid variables.

    You can insert standard variables such as store name, customer email address, order number, etc. into a Mail Designer 365 text layout block to personalise your templates for Shopify.

    Find a full list of Shopify's notification variables here.

    Please note, for longer and more complex variables, such as discount properties which run over multiple lines, you may run into some difficulty with your layout.

    For this reason, we advise avoiding these where possible. If you are confident with HTML, you can try to edit the exported code yourself, however, please be aware we cannot provide support for designs edited outside of Mail Designer 365.



    Is it possible to use VPN Tracker with a 64 bit Kernel?
     

    VPN Tracker is a 100% 64 bit application and runs great on 64 bit systems.

    Can I install VPN Tracker using brew / homebrew via terminal?
     
    VPN Tracker 365 for Mac can also be installed using brew. This is practical if, for example, you only have SSH available when maintaining a computer. The following steps are necessary for this:
    1. Brew must be installed on the computer: https://brew.sh
    2. Enter in the terminal:
      brew install --cask vpn-tracker-365

    The latest release version of VPN Tracker will then be installed.
    I have an older license and a new license, why are the prices different?
     

    Licenses purchased at different times may have different prices. To check the renewal price for a specific plan, check your products overview in my.vpntracker.com.

    To keep any pricing benefits, please ensure that you have automatic renewals turned on. If you forget to renew your license and it expires, you will lose legacy pricing benefits.



    Which VPN Tracker edition do I need to buy now?
     

    The current, streamlined VPN Tracker lineup offers a simpler set of options. If you previously purchased a different edition, here's the right edition to order going forward:

    Old edition Current edition
    VPN Tracker for Mac / VPN Tracker 365      → VPN Tracker Personal
    VPN Tracker Pro for Mac    → VPN Tracker Pro for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker VIP for Mac    → VPN Tracker VIP for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker Team Member → VPN Tracker Personal
    VPN Tracker Team Member Plus → VPN Tracker Executive for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker Consultant → VPN Tracker Consultant for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker + → VPN Tracker Executive for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker Pro+ → VPN Tracker Pro for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker VIP+ → VPN Tracker VIP for Mac & iOS
    VPN Tracker Consultant+ → VPN Tracker Consultant for Mac & iOS

    You can purchase upgrades for your existing licenses on your my.vpntracker upgrade page, or order new plans through the VPN Tracker Online Store

    Why can't I connect to my Fortigate device if XAUTH is enabled?
     

    If you're running FortiOS 3, please make sure you are running at least MR6 patch 2. Previous firmware releases have an issue that will cause the device to respond incorrectly to VPN Tracker's attempts to use XAUTH in combination with an Aggressive Mode based connection.

    Where can I manage my VPN Tracker World Connect subscription?
     

    For your Mac:
    Visit our website https://my.vpntracker.com and log in using your equinux ID and password.
    Open the section "Products & Subscriptions" to find all purchased plans and the term of your subscription.
    Click "Payment methods" in the sidebar to manage your subscription.

    For iOS:
    All Apple subscriptions are managed in iTunes on your computer. This link will bring you directly to the management area for your profile:

    https://apple.co/2Th4vqI

    When you are using your mobile device:

    ‣ Go to the App store app.
    ‣ Tap on your Apple ID.
    ‣ Click on "Subscriptions."
    ‣ Choose VPN Tracker World Connect.
    Why is my newsletter being cut off in Gmail?
     
    If your newsletter is very long, Gmail may cut off part of your content. There are a few things you can do to make the HTML document shorter:
    • In general, try to reduce the number of layout blocks used. Each layout block has a HTML structure that adds to the total size of your newsletter and by reducing the number of blocks you reduce the amount of space needed for these structures.
    • Avoid repeating blocks and try to find solutions for “merging” blocks. For example, don't add two or more consecutive spacer blocks. Instead, use just one spacer block and change its height accordingly.
    • Sometimes you can avoid using spacer blocks altogether, for example by adding the space to a nearby image block instead, using the “spacing before/after” feature in “Styles” or simply adding blank lines.
    • Instead of using several consecutive text blocks, use just one and style the paragraphs using the “Styles” feature.
    • Avoid detaching blocks (that is, avoid doing modifications that only affect the mobile or desktop version). A detached block results in two blocks in the document: one for desktop and another one for mobile, which uses more space than if the same block can be used for both mobile and desktop.
    Will I get a partial refund if I decide I want to opt out of my subscription?
     

    We don’t offer partial refunds. All of our 365 plans are valid for one year and you can cancel up to 10 days before the end of your term; however, if you do cancel, you will be able to continue using the software the expiration date of your plan.


    How to set up a Mail Designer 365 Team
     
    Creating a Mail Designer 365 Team is the first step towards achieving effective collaboration on email campaigns. All Mail Designer 365 teams benefit from exclusive features to help improve your campaign workflow.

    To set up a team, head to your my.maildesigner365 account and sign in with your equinux ID and password.

    New users are automatically created a team which you can start adding members to straight away.

    The Settings icon takes you to your team's overview page:



    From here, go to the "Members" tab and click "Invite members."



    Enter the email address(es) of the colleague(s) you want to invite to your team and click "Invite". You can invite up to 10 team members free!



    Team members can accept your invitation by clicking on the link in the email.

    Once you've invited new team members, start using Mail Designer 365 Campaigns to discuss, approve and schedule email campaigns for your audience. Try it out free!
    Why isn't my GIF being displayed correctly in Outlook?
     
    GIFs are supported in most modern email apps, however some Outlook versions will only display the first frame of the GIF.

    Currently, Outlook 2007, 2010, and 2013 are known to have this issue but the very latest versions of Outlook 365 now finally offer GIF support.
    Does VPN Tracker support AWS VPN connections?
     
    VPN Tracker 365 offers support for countless VPN protocols and gateways, including support for Amazon's AWS VPC Mac VPN client.

    Our detailed step-by-step guide shows you exactly how to set up a secure site-to-site VPN connection using AWS Virtual Private Cloud and VPN Tracker 365.

    Is it possible to boot the VPN during start so that I would be able to log on my Mac using a network login from the connected network?
     
    You'll need to be signed in with a user account first in order to start VPN Tracker. You can configure your user account to start VPN Tracker directly after logging into your account.
    What are TeamCloud Groups?
     

    TeamCloud Groups let you use TeamCloud features with just part of your team, e.g. to share a certain VPN connection with just your IT admins.

    To create and edit Groups, you need

    • Team Manager or Organizer status
    • A VPN Tracker VIP or Consultant plan

    To receive a connection from a TeamCloud Group, you need

    • To be a member of the team
    • A VPN Tracker Executive, VIP, or Consultant plan

    What is VPN Tracker World Connect?
     
    VPN Tracker World Connect allows you to work anywhere in the world, while protecting your corporate data from hackers. With VPN Tracker World Connect, you can stay secure and protect all of your online activities even when you are on business trips. Whenever you are using the wifi at the airport, coffee shop, mall, and other public places, your data is open to anyone else on the wifi network. VPN Tracker World Connect will encrypt your data, which means that you are still protected while using public wifi. Also, VPN Tracker World Connect helps you keep your critical data safe, whether you are accessing documents in the cloud or checking your email. You have the option of choosing "Secure Connection," which will automatically find the closest server to you and secure your connection for you when you activate it.

    You can even use VPN Tracker World Connect to encrypt your internet traffic through a VPN connection via different countries. Here is a list of countries you can connect to with VPN Tracker World Connect:



    What encryption do you use for World Connect connections?
     
    We use the very latest encryption standard AES-256 with DH-Group 18 (8192 bits) in VPN Tracker World Connect and combine that with hardware-accelerated algorithms for fastest performance.
    There was an issue securely accessing this content
     
    Sometimes decrypting the content can fail due to incompatible keys after a system failure. Try syncing the connection again from the app. If that fails delete the connection and create a new one.
    How do I export my email design as a .zip file in Mail Designer 365?
     
    ‣ Choose “File" > "Export…” 

    ‣ Save your file.
    ‣ Then, find your saved file in the location that you saved it to.
    ‣ Right-click the file and choose "Compress “YOUR FILE NAME”" in the menu bar:

    ‣ This will create a .zip file:


    Please refer to the following page for further information on how to export your email design as a .zip file:


    Are there any known issues connecting to SideWinder VPN gateways?
     

    With one of the more recent firmware updates Secure Computing changed their implementation of the VPN related standards. These changes break VPN Tracker's ability to successfully establish a phase 2.

    The problem has been resolved by Secure Computing in firmware 7.0.0.07. (epatch 7.0.0.06.E35)

    How can I add custom placeholder variables in Mail Designer 365?
     
    The formatting of the custom placeholders can differ depending on the email service provider (ESP) that you are using. For name placeholders, many ESPs will use [NAME] as the placeholder. [NAME] will then be replaced with the name of the recipient. However, this can vary. Some may require you to use [FULLNAME] or a completely different formatting. Please make sure to double-check with your email service provider.

    For detailed information of how you can add placeholders for MailChimp, please visit the following page:

    For detailed information of how you can add placeholders for Campaign Monitor, please visit the following page:


    How do I get system log messages?
     
    When VPN Tracker support asks you to collect system log messages, here's how to get them:

    • Open Console.app, which you can find in Finder in Applications > Utilities.
    • Either press the “Start streaming” text or the “Start” toolbar icon.
    • Start VPN Tracker 365 and reproduce the issue.
    • Switch back to Console.app and click on the “Pause” toolbar icon.


    Unfortunately, there is no direct text export for the collected log messages in Console.app. To save them please follow these steps:

    • In Console.app, click into the log message list and press +A to select all messages, then press +C to copy them.
    • Open any text editor and create a new file, for example using TextEdit.app.
    • Press +V to paste the copied log messages into your text editor.
    • Save the file and send it to our support.
    FortiGate: Should I Use IPsec or SSL-VPN?
     
    Fortinet recommends using the IPsec protocol for FortiGate devices and now explicitly highlights this preference (as of November 2024):



    Our experience also shows that IPsec connections are significantly more performant, so we likewise recommend using IPsec.
    SMTP account: Unable to authenticate with your username and password
     
    Your mail account password may be wrong or empty (see Mail Accounts in Preferences).

    If you are trying to send via your iCloud account with 2-factor authentication set up, you will need to set up an app-specific password for Mail Designer. The same may apply to other email providers with 2-factor authentication.

    Apple's support page has more information on how to set up an app-specific password.
    How do I cancel my subscription in the App Store?
     
    All Apple subscriptions are managed in iTunes.

    This link will directly take you to your profile administration:

    https://apple.co/2Th4vqI



    You will find all running subscriptions under "Subscriptions." You can also disable the automatic extension of your subscriptions.
    How can I remove a device from my account?
     
    You can see all devices connected to your account in your my.vpntracker.com portal

    To remove a device you can either:
    • Log out of your account in the VPN Tracker App
    • Follow this link and press: "Remove all devices"
    Why am I seeing the Mailchimp logo in my newsletter after I export?
     
    Depending on your plan, Mailchimp may automatically insert a "Monkey Rewards" badge into your newsletter design after you have exported it from Mail Designer 365.

    As this is determined by Mailchimp, there is no option to remove the badge within Mail Designer 365. However, you can control where the badge is inserted by clicking a text area and selecting "Insert > Mail Chimp > Rewards" to insert the Monkey Rewards placeholder.

    For more information on how to remove the Monkey Rewards badge, visit their website.
    My design looks broken when I use certain email apps in dark mode
     
    Unfortunately, some email clients try to automatically adapt newsletters for dark mode by inverting colors. This can cause the dark text to appear white, even if the background is also white, making it appear as though parts of your message are missing.

    This can currently happen in Gmail and Outlook mobile apps.

    We have filed bug reports with the app makers that do this and have requested a better way of coordinating when they auto-switch between light & dark mode.

    One possible solution in terms of your design is to find a color combination that will remain readable in all situations.

    Over the past few months, we've already seen some apps adjust their dark mode behaviour multiple times, so it looks like the email app people are also still figuring things out.

    Further reading:
    https://litmus.com/blog/the-ultimate-guide-to-dark-mode-for-email-marketers
    How can I identify issues with my internet connection, for example, when receiving error messages that a specific server could not be reached?
     
    For error messages related to a possible faulty internet connection, try the following steps:

    1. Are you connected to the internet? Check your internet connection by opening a website like www.google.com in your browser (e.g. Safari).
    If that works, proceed to Step 2.

    If no page loads, try the following:

    • Check your Wi-Fi connection: Make sure Wi-Fi is enabled on your device and connected to the correct network.
    • Check cable connections: If you are using a wired connection, ensure the cable is securely connected and undamaged.
    • Restart the router: Disconnect the router from the power source for about 30 seconds, then plug it back in. Wait a few minutes for the connection to re-establish.
    • Contact an administrator or provider: If the problem persists, there may be an issue with your internet provider. Contact your administrator or your internet provider's customer service.
    • Use a mobile hotspot: If you have access to mobile data, try setting up a hotspot to test the connection.

    2. If a specific server is mentioned in the error message, try accessing the specified address via your browser (e.g., Safari).

    If that works, proceed to Step 3.

    If it doesn’t work, there may be an issue with the server mentioned in the error message. In this case, please try the action in VPN Tracker that triggered the error message again at a later time.


    3. Check if your current VPN connection or a firewall is blocking access to the internet or a specific site, and disable this block if necessary.

    • You can see and configure if your currently active VPN connection excludes certain internet addresses in the connection configuration: In VPN Tracker, select the connection, choose "Edit," and then "Advanced Settings." In the "Traffic Control" area, there may be internet addresses listed that the VPN restricts access to.
    • To check if your firewall excludes certain internet addresses, temporarily disable your firewall and try again the action in VPN Tracker that triggered the error message.
    • Check your firewall settings for blocked applications or websites. Some firewalls allow specific IP addresses, domains, or applications to be selectively blocked or allowed.
    • If you find that a rule is blocking access, you can adjust this rule or add an exception to allow access to specific websites or services.
    • If you are still unable to gain access to certain areas, contact your firewall manufacturer's support or your IT support.


    How Can I Print Documents on My Home Printer While Using VPN Tracker Remotely?
     

    Yes, you can print to your home printer while connected to VPN Tracker away from home. To ensure a seamless remote printing experience, follow these steps:

    1. Assign a Static IP Address to Your Printer

    • Access your router’s web interface by entering its IP address in a web browser (e.g., 192.168.1.1 or 192.168.0.1).
    • Navigate to the LAN or DHCP settings.
    • Assign a static IP address to your printer (e.g., 192.168.50.100) so it remains consistent.

    2. Configure Your Mac for Remote Printing

    • Connect to your > Printers & Scanners on your Mac.
    • Click "+" to add a new printer.
    • Select the IP tab and enter the static IP address assigned to your printer.
    • Choose the correct printer driver to ensure compatibility.

    3. Avoid Bonjour for Remote Printing

    Apple’s Bonjour service helps detect devices on local networks but does not work reliably over VPN due to its reliance on multicast DNS (mDNS). Instead, always connect to your printer using its static IP address.

    4. Check Firewall & Network Settings

    • Ensure that your firewall allows print traffic over VPN.
    • Verify that the printer and VPN settings do not block remote connections.

    By setting up a static IP address, avoiding Bonjour, and ensuring proper firewall rules, you can print documents remotely via VPN Tracker without issues.

    I'm getting a Keychain error message when signing in
     

    In some circumstances, Mail Designer may not be able to store your account login credentials in your Keychain.

    To fix this issue, please try the following:

    • The easiest way to fix this problem is to restart your Mac.

    If the problem still pops up, try this:

    • Quit Mail Designer
    • Open Keychain Access from Applications > Utilities
    • Select your login keychain
    • Choose File > Lock Keychain “login”
    • Then choose File > Unlock Keychain “login”

    Now re-open Mail Designer and try signing in again.

    What is the difference between test emails and individual emails?
     

    Sending test emails


    Mail Designer 365's Testmail service is designed for sending internal test emails to yourself or to your team – i.e. to preview how your finished email design will look in the inbox. Test emails will be sent from the Mail Designer 365 Testmail service via our secure servers.

    How it works


    To get started, click the Test icon in the Mail Designer 365 toolbar.




    Now choose from the following test mail options:





    The latest version of your email design will be uploaded via TeamCloud and sent to the selected recipient(s):



    Sending individual emails


    You also have the option to send your email design as a single email via Delivery Hub. This email will be sent from your own email address.

    This option is designed for external emails (i.e. sending emails to contacts who are not part of your Mail Designer 365 team) and replaces the legacy "Send via your email account" option.

    How it works


    In this view you can add one or more recipients for your email (e.g. your client's email) and send them your design from your own email address.




    On the left of the setup window, you can choose your from address:




    Tip: If you have not done so already, follow this guide to set up your "from address" for sending.

    Finally, send your email by clicking the green "Send" button. It will go directly to your recipient via your email server:



    Good to know: Following send, you can easily check if your recipient has received and opened your email by clicking the analytics icon:




    Where can I find my invoice for Mail Designer 365?
     
    You can access your invoice for Mail Designer 365 via the confirmation email we sent you after you purchased your plan. In this email you will find a link to download your invoice in PDF format.

    You can also download your invoice under the "Billing" section of your my.maildesigner365 account.

    Mac App Store purchases are processed by Apple, you should receive your invoice by email.

    What is the difference between Mail Designer 365 Business and Mail Designer 365 Premium Business?
     
    Mail Designer 365 Premium Business is our premium plan designed for businesses or individuals who use email newsletters as a critical part of their business (e.g. marketing agencies, promotional campaigns, customer service.) As part of this plan, users are entitled to exclusive priority support within 24 hours following a query (mon-fri.)

    Mail Designer 365 Business is our alternative plan option, designed for everyday email newsletters which aren't time critical. This plan offers the basic support tier (email response within 72 hours.)

    Interested in purchasing a plan or upgrading? Get your Mail Designer 365 plan here.
    How do I configure my own email account in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Mail Designer 365 makes it easy to send emails from your own email address directly from the app. Thanks to Mail Designer’s automatic email account configuration, you will be up and running in no time.

    To get started, go to “Mail Designer 365” > “Preferences” > “Mail Accounts.”


    Then, click on the “+” in the bottom left corner to configure a new email account.
    Enter your email address and password (not required for all email services e.g. Gmail) in the space provided:



    Note: This will work for most generic email accounts (e.g. Outlook, Hotmail, Gmail, etc.) by taking you to the external login page for the respective email client. For custom/internal email accounts (i.e a work account), your network administrator may have to provide you with the information which you can enter by ticking “Enter custom server settings.”

    Click “Next” to set up your account. You will now see that your email account’s settings have been automatically detected by Mail Designer 365:



    You are now free to use your personal email address to send email designs from directly within the app.


    Is there a difference between the software you sell on your website and the version on the Mac App Store?
     
    The software we sell on our website and the version sold on the App Store offer the same design features and purchase options.

    There are only two differences:

    1. The equinux Online Store will always provide you with a proper purchase invoice, which can be useful for you if claiming the purchase against your taxes.

    2. You can access the beta version when you purchase from the equinux Online Store. When you purchase through the Mac App store, you will not have access to the beta version.
    Where are VPN Tracker's log files?
     
    If you get asked by VPN Tracker's support to send the log files, this is how you can get them. Please note that the connection log files are encrypted since they may contain sensitive data.


    • Open Finder and use the menu “Go > Go to Folder…”.
    • A dialog opens. Into this dialog, please copy & paste the following path without quotation marks: “/Library/Application Support/VPN Tracker 365/var” and press Enter.
    • You should see a folder named log. Please drag it to your Desktop, which will copy its content.
    • On your Desktop, right-click (or click while holding down the Control key) on the log folder and select the Compress “log” menu entry.
    • Please send the resulting log.zip file to our support.

    My VPN connection to a Watchguard device is inaccessible for no apparent reason.
     

    There is a known bug in the Watchguard firmware that is causing a lot of trouble. Currently, we still do not know why VPN Tracker is triggering this bug, as the Windows client seems to not trigger it. We talked with Watchguard, but even they could not tell us what we are doing wrong. Basically the tunnel dies internally in the Watchguard (it's still shown as open and established, but traffic arriving over this tunnel is rejected as if the tunnel was closed).

    If you are using a Branch Office VPN at the moment, try switching to a MUVPN if possible. MUVPN works with VPN Tracker as well and usually yields for better results.

    Please refer to the following description.

    Does Mail Designer 365 support sending via Apple Mail?
     
    The version of Apple Mail from macOS Mojave (10.14) onwards, no longer supports email templates / stationery, so Mail Designer 365 is unable to send designs directly from Mail.

    But not to worry: You can add your email account directly to Mail Designer 365 to send emails from your own address:

    • Open Mail Designer 365 > Preferences
    • Choose Mail Accounts…
    • Click + to add a new account
    • Enter your email account details


    Tip: Find your email account settings in Apple Mail under Mail > Preferences > Accounts > Server Settings > Outgoing Mail Server.

    Visit the Mail Designer 365 Manual for a step-by-step guide.
    Why aren't my image alt texts being displayed properly in Apple Mail?
     

    Alt text and Apple WebKit


    Email services using Apple's WebKit (Apple Mail & email clients accessed via Safari) only display image alt text when the alt text is short enough to fit in the first "line" of the image area:



    If the alt text is longer than this, Apple will display no alt text for the image area at all:



    Other issues to be aware of


    When you are working with a design in Mail Designer 365 where image areas in the desktop and mobile versions are attached, your desktop alt text will also be used for the mobile version of your email.

    As image blocks in the smartphone view aren't as wide, this means the cut-off point for your alt text will come sooner, so the alt text will need to be even shorter if the design versions are paired.

    Ways to resolve this issue


    We appreciate this is a difficult issue and unfortunately, there is no one-size-fits-all approach that can be applied to your alt text length. This is mainly due to the fact that the size of image areas can vary massively in different email designs, as well as the mobile issue mentioned above.

    Ideally, the optimal solution would be for Apple to change things behind the scenes. However, until this happens, the best workaround is to keep your alt text as short as possible and TEST TEST TEST!

    To test the length of your alt text is suitable before you send, carry out the following steps:
    • Go to Mail > Preferences > Viewing and uncheck the box by "Load remote content in messages."
    • In Mail Designer 365, use the Testmail service to send yourself a test version of your design.
    • Open the email in Mail and check through all the image areas to see if the alt texts appear. Then, do the same on an iPhone to check the mobile version.


    Is there a way to create an entire email that is left justify with Mail Designer 365?
     
    Currently, all email designs that you create with Mail Designer 365 are designed to be centered. This means that the entire email cannot be left justified or right justified. However, you can customize the text of individual text areas that you add within your email template to have left, center, or right alignment.


    Can I render email previews for various email clients like Outlook versions, Hotmail, Gmail, Windows 10 Mail, Android emails, etc. in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Currently, you will need to use outside services to render email previews for various email clients. We recommend trying litmus.com to check out the previews of your email newsletters for different clients. You can send a test mail to this service and it lets the mail render on various email clients, captures the output, and then displays the previews.




    Mail Designer 365 does provide a preview for mobile devices. Keep in mind that this is only for the sole purpose of providing a rough idea of how the newsletter may look like on mobile devices. The actual rendering may be different, depending on the email client.

    Please visit this page for further information on how to preview your design for different email clients:


    My VPN Tracker licenses are up for renewal soon, and I would like to change the number of licenses. How can I do that?
     

    Convert Your Products into Store Credit

    If you wish to change the number of your licenses, you have the option to convert your existing license into store credit. You can then use this credit for your next purchase:

    Note: If the remaining value of your old product exceeds the amount for the new product, you will receive an additional promo code for the remaining value.


    Can I use different versions of VPN Tracker on the same Mac?
     
    VPN Tracker 7 and 8 can be installed on the same Mac. Please note that it is not possible to run them both simultaneously, but once you quit one version of VPN Tracker, the other will work just fine.

    For later versions, VPN Tracker 10 and VPN Tracker 365 can also be installed on the same Mac. They store their data and settings in different places. However, you cannot run different versions at the same time.

    How do I copy and paste text, and make sure that the style is kept the same in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Any text that you copy and paste into Mail Designer 365 from another source other than a different Mail Designer 365 document will automatically receive the style of the text area that you’re pasting it to. However, if you would like to preserve your text style, you can use the “Paste and Match Style” command.

    ‣ Copy text that has formatting you want to preserve
    ‣ Choose “Edit" > "Paste and Match Style” from the menu bar

    This will preserve the style of the original text that you copied.


    Please refer to the following page for further information on how to copy and paste text, while preserving its style:


    How do I access my backed up templates?
     
    Mail Designer stores all of its categories and designs on your Mac. For example, if you are using Time Machine Backup, and you want to access your Mail Designer templates please follow the following steps:

    • Navigate to the folder: Your username/Library/Group Containers
    • In this folder you will see a Folder ending in .Mail Designer
    • Navigate to Documents/MD365 within this folder
    • Restore the MD365 folder to your new Mac

    After you have restored the directory, simply open Mail Designer 365 and select "File" > "Import settings and designs" to import the documents to your new library.

    Tip: To quickly view the location of your designs, click your chosen template whilst holding "Ctrl" and then select "Show in Finder."
    Is my VPN gateway compatible with VPN Tracker?
     

    VPN Tracker supports industry standard OpenVPN, IPsec (IKEv1 + IKEv2), L2TP, PPTP, SSL, SSTP, and WireGuard® protocols. This means that it will work with almost all devices supporting these types of VPN connections.

    A list of tested devices is available on our website

    What if my device is not on this list?

    There are hundreds of VPN devices available on the market, and we'd love to offer device profiles for all of them. Unfortunately, it is impossible to test all devices. If your gateway is not in the list, it will probably still work with VPN Tracker.

    Tip: Try out one of our custom protocol profiles to test your VPN connection free in VPN Tracker on Mac, iPhone or iPad.

    SMTP account: General errors
     
    In rare cases, errors can occur when sending SMTP, even though Mail Designer was able to connect to the SMTP server and possibly also accepted the user name and password.

    In this case, you can view the log of the last sending attempt in the error dialog using the “SMTP Log” button. Finder will then display a file that you can open with any text editor.

    You can read the raw error reported by the SMTP server in that file. This could, for example, be information about maintenance or problems with your email account, such as exceeded sending limits.
    Which macOS versions does Mail Designer 365 support?
     
    Mail Designer 365 supports all the latest macOS versions from macOS 10.13 High Sierra, macOS 10.14 Mojave, macOS 10.15 Catalina, macOS 11 Big Sur, macOS 12 Monterey, and macOS 13 Ventura, macOS 14 Sonoma as well as the newly announced macOS 15 Sequoia.
    Do you collect data about my usage or do you keep any logs?
     

    Data security and data protection are very important topics for us. Because of this we developed VPN Tracker World Connect.

    We don't keep any logs about your usage. We don't save any user information about your usage, the duration of your connection or which connections you are using.

    As #1 VPN client for Mac, we have many years of experience in data security and VPN.

    How do I create an email link in Mail Designer?
     

    Creating an email link in Mail Designer is really straightforward. Simply follow the instructions below to get started:

    1. Type your desired text in a text layout block e.g. "Email me."

    2. From the sidebar select "Add link" and choose "Email mailto" as the type of link from the drop down menu.

    3. Add your email address.


    Now your chosen text will appear as a link and when a customer clicks the link it will open a new email to you.


    Will I be charged a fee when starting a trial license?
     
    When you start a trail license (e.g. 7 days), we authorize your card for the annual amount of the corresponding license as soon as you start the test (similar to a hotel or rental car deposit).
    If you cancel the trial license within the specified period, your account will not be charged. The pre-authorization then no longer applies.
    Can I edit my design after I've uploaded it to MailChimp?
     

    MailChimp offers visual "WYSIWYG" and code-based template editing.

    However, as every HTML engine works a little bit differently, we recommend that you stick to Mail Designer for editing, as changes made with MailChimp may cause issues with the look or layout of your designs.

    If you need to make any changes, simply re-upload a new version of your design and select it for your MailChimp campaign.

    On the other hand if you are a HTML code pro, just edit the HTML code with the MailChimp editor untill it fits your needs. We ask for you understanding that we can't offer support for this.

    Error message when sending: An unexpected error occurred (1)
     

    This points to an error while authenticating your email account. Try checking the following:

    • The username is wrong/incomplete. For example, iCloud accounts sometimes work with "username" but most times need the whole email address as a log in.
    • The password is wrong.
    • If you're trying TLS, try STARTTLS instead.
    • Maybe your server is using a custom port - though this is unlikely.
    If you have a Mail program you use (e.g. Apple Mail) try comparing the outgoing mail settings there and use the same settings in Mail Designer.

    Does Mail Designer offer HTML export?
     

    It sure does! And it does it brilliantly too!

    Mail Designer can export an HTML file containing your entire design. This opens up a whole host of great options for you, as the user, to explore:

    • Upload your design to third-party newsletter services
    • Offer recipients, with email client programs that don’t support rich HTML content, the option to view your message as a webpage in their browser
    • Create a link to your newsletter directly from your website: A great option for people that would like to see a newsletter before they subscribe

    The best thing is: It's so easy to export your design as an HTML document

    • Open your design
    • Choose “Share > HTML...” from the menu bar
    • Choose a location to save your design

    By the way: If you plan on uploading your images to a separate web server, you can enter an absolute URL prefix for images.

    Can I see an example of Mail Designer 365 HTML code?
     
    We know the proof is in the pudding code-sample, so we've put together an HTML export example for you to explore.

    It's an unmodified export of one of our Design Ideas. Note that when you use the HTML feature yourself, you'll also have the option of setting an image URL, and image prefix for where your images will be hosted, as well as a custom folder and HTML file name.

    Download HTML sample
    Are MailChimp features supported?
     

    Mail Designer 365 supports the export of the template including MailChimp placeholders. Once uploaded to MailChimp almost all features offered by the website can be used. To make sure the layout stays intact we recommend not to use the "Edit" view of MailChimp for layout editing. Use Mail Designer 365 to make the necessary changes and export the new version to MailChimp.

    How can I use only a specific network for my connection?
     
    Some VPN gateways are configured to route all your internet traffic through the VPN, rather than just traffic intended for specific networks. With VPN Tracker 365, you have the flexibility to control which traffic is sent over these VPN connections using a feature called Traffic Control.

    Follow these steps to configure Traffic Control:

    • Edit your connection.
    • Go to Advanced Options.
    • Locate and expand the Traffic Control section.
    • From the drop-down menu, choose “Only use VPN for the following addresses”.
    • In the text field, specify the network you want to access through the VPN. For example, enter 192.168.123.0/24.
    • Save your changes.

    By configuring Traffic Control, you ensure that only the specified traffic is routed through the VPN.
    How do I turn off the hyphenation in Mail Designer 365?
     
    You can change whether your text is automatically hyphenated in your text areas. To turn off the hyphenation, try the following:
    ‣ Go to "File" > "Design Options."

    ‣ Remove the check mark from the "Force hyphenation."

    ‣ Click "Ok."


    Please refer to the following page for further information on how to turn on and off text hyphenation:

    Can I use anchor links in my Mail Designer 365 email design?
     
    Anchor links do not work in most email clients and are not supported in iOS 14 and lower. For this reason, Mail Designer 365 doesn't currently offer support for this feature.

    We try to ensure that a newsletter looks and works as expected on the widest range of readers possible and will revisit anchor links, if a majority of popular email apps add support for them.
    Using custom HTML code in Mail Designer 365
     
    The HTML code used in Mail Designer 365 is meticulously tested by our team of developers to make sure it is compatible with the majority of email clients. This is so we can do our best to ensure that your emails will always look good.

    As we have no means of testing the custom code which customers edit themselves, we cannot guarantee that email designs with custom code will look as intended after they have been sent. For this reason, Mail Designer 365 does not support importing HTML code, as it needs to have full control of the code being used in the app.

    However, if there are certain design elements (such as layout blocks) which you wish to edit, you can do so by saving them to your desktop and editing the Content.html file. Learn more.

    Again, if you are not 100% confident in your understanding of HTML and CSS code, we would strongly advise against this, as we cannot guarantee your code will be compatible with our software and other email clients.
    Is Mail Designer 365 available for Windows?
     
    Email design features are exclusively available in the Mail Designer 365 app for Mac. However, if you have set up a Mail Designer 365 team, Windows and other non-Mac users can use Mail Designer 365 Campaigns on any device and in any browser to:
    • View, comment on and approve email design drafts
    • Receive test emails
    • Manage email contacts and audiences
    • Schedule and send email campaigns
    • Access post campaign analytics

    Get your team started today with a free Campaigns plan for up to 10 team members!

    Should I be using the VPN Tracker World Connect Mac App or download VPN Tracker from your website?
     
    The VPN Tracker World Connect App from the App Store lets you connect to VPN servers in countries around the world – but cannot connect to company VPNs.

    VPN Tracker from our website (www.vpntracker.com/download) connects to hundreds of VPN devices and gateways in your office – AND also connects to VPN servers globally.

    For the most functionality, download VPN Tracker from our website.
    My email design looks wrong after I upload it to Mailchimp
     
    Manually exporting your Mail Designer 365 design as a .zip file and re-uploading it to Mailchimp can cause the code to become altered, leading to designs appearing broken or different to how you intended.

    For this reason, we always recommend using our convenient direct export tool to share your email design to Mailchimp. All you need for this is the API key for your account. This step-by-step guide shows you how to retrieve this and get set up:
    Am I eligible for a refund?
     
    We offer a free trial for VPN Tracker which can be used to test all functionality of the app, helping users identify the best fit for their needs. After this trial period, all sales are final upon subscription, in accordance with our Terms and conditions.
     
    Please be aware that we cannot process refunds in the following scenarios:
    • Non-usage of the app or service
    • Failure to cancel your account within the cancelation period
    • Lack of features or functionality on your subscribed plan
    • Purchases made in error
    • Exceptional circumstances beyond our control
    • Violations to our Terms of Use
    How can I send emails using my own SMTP email account?
     

    Mail Designer 365 allows you to send emails directly from within the application using the SMTP procotol.

    In order to add your email account, please open the "Mail Accounts" tab in the preferences of Mail Designer, click "+" and enter the information for the account you want to configure. After you have entered all the required information, save the changes and choose this account in the send window.

    Follow this step-by-step guide for more information.
    What is a two-factor authentication? How does two-factor authentication affect my Apple ID?
     
    Apple has created a two-factor authentication to add extra protection for your Apple ID. Two-factor authentication requires two pieces of information. So even if someone knows your password, two-factor authentication will require your password and a code from one of your trusted devices.

    Apple's support page has more information on two-factor authentication and how to enable or disable it.
    I am having issues with my FortiSSL connection. Could it be due to the “Strict Host Check”?
     
    If you are experiencing problems with your FortiSSL connection, it might be related to the “Strict Host Check.” You can try disabling this setting on the gateway.

    Follow these steps:

    To disable the host check on the FortiSSL server side, you can turn off the “Host Check” in the SSL-VPN settings.

    Steps:

    1. Log in to the FortiGate CLI or GUI (Command Line Interface or Graphical User Interface).
    2. Enter the following command in the CLI to disable the host check:

    config vpn ssl settings
    set host-check disable
    end

    This will disable the strict host check for SSL-VPN clients.
    My Personal Safe has a download error, how can I fix it?
     



    If you have received this error message, please carry out the following steps to fix the problem:
    1. Log out of VPN Tracker
    2. Quit and restart the app
    3. Ensure you have an internet connection
    4. Log into VPN Tracker again
    5. Retry downloading the connection

    You should now be able to access your files again.
    Why am I receiving an error message when I try to send emails via my Gmail account?
     
    If you receive the following error message when trying to send from your Gmail account:
    invalid_grant: Bad Request (-10)

    Please carry out the following steps:
    1. Go to Mail Designer 365 > Preferences > Mail Accounts.
    2. Remove your Gmail address from the list using the "-" icon.
    3. Then, click the "+" icon to re-add your Gmail account. You will be prompted to sign in with your Gmail credentials again.

    Once you have re-added your account, you should be fine to start sending emails again.
    SMTP account: Mail Designer could not establish a connection to the server
     
    Mail Designer was not able to connect to the configured SMTP server. Please open Mail Designer 365 settings and check the configured values under SMTP settings.

    Make sure the hostname and port are correct. Also check the “Security” setting.

    Click the “Test” button to let Mail Designer verify that the server accepts a connection using your settings.
    How do I rotate objects in Mail Designer 365?
     
    In order to rotate the object, hold down the Command ⌘ key and then click one of the graphics resize controls of an object or graphic element. You will see that the cursor will turn into a rotate icon. 



    This will allow you to rotate the object freely. You can rotate shapes, graphic elements, and image masks. You will be able to tell how many degrees you have rotated the object by the label that pops up during rotation:



    If you want to rotate both the text and the object, hold the Command ⌘ key and click on both the shape and the text. You will see that the two things are now selected. Click “Group” on the right side.



    Once you have grouped the two things together, hold the command key and click on the resize controls. Again, you will see that the cursor will turn into a rotate icon. Then, feel free to rotate the selected items to your liking.

    Please refer to the following page for further information on how to rotate objects:


    Can I print my template or export it as a PDF file?
     

    Yes, it's possible to print your template by going to "File > Print…" from within the Mail Designer 365 app. Exporting to PDF can either by done in the lower left corner of the "Print" window or by selecting "File > Export as PDF…".

    Importing designs and preferences from older Mail Designer versions
     
    Mail Designer 365 needs your permission to access your previous designs and app preferences from earlier Mail Designer versions:


    1. Click on "File" > "Import settings and designs."

    2. When the migration window pops up, select "Grant access" to continue.

    3. In the next window, simply select "Grant access" again to allow Mail Designer 365 access to the design files in your Library. You do not need to select a different folder.

    4. Select from the list which settings you would like to copy over to Mail Designer 365 and then click "Import selected."

    5. Your designs and in-app preferences will then be quickly imported into Mail Designer 365.




    My pictures are not appearing in my email template, how do I fix this?
     
    We just recently found out about an API change, which causes pictures to no longer appear when exporting emails to MailChimp or Campaign Monitor or when using the "Send email" function in Mail Designer. The most current versions of Mail Designer 365 and Mail Designer Pro 3 already include a fix for this.

    If you already have Mail Designer 365 and you have purchased it in the equinux Store, please download the latest version at:
    http://www.equinux.com/goto/HPdownload/maildesigner365
    If you already have Mail Designer 365 and you purchased in the Mac App Store, the latest version is available as an Update in the Mac App Store. Please update install it from there.

    If you have Mail Designer Pro 3, please log in under my.equinux.com to download the most current version.

    In case you you have an older version of Mail Designer, now is a great time to make the switch to Mail Designer 365 and profit from all new features and optimisations.
    I want to purchase a Small Business Plan
     
    Mail Designer 365 Small Business and Mail Designer 365 Non Profit are both older Mail Designer 365 plans which no longer exist.

    Our current plans, Mail Designer 365 Business and Mail Designer 365 Premium Business both include regular updates, all of our newest design features, as well as compatibility with Mail Designer 365 for Teams - and even more exciting new developemts coming soon! Find out more.

    Are you looking to buy a plan? You can purchase a Mail Designer 365 Business or Mail Designer 365 Premium Business plan here.
    TextScout AI Beta: Credits
     

    Every Mail Designer plan offers a certain number of AI credits. These credits are automatically renewed every month as part of your subscription. During the beta, we have assigned all plans a number of credits for testing purposes, the number of credits in each plan may change in the future.

    Every time you use TextScout AI features in Mail Designer, this is automatically reflected in your available AI credits.

    How many credits are used?
    How many credits a TextScout AI query will use depends on the complexity of the query itself and the number of results that TextScout was able to return. As the AI models are still being improved during the beta, the number of credits being consumed may vary.

    Teams
    If you are part of a Mail Designer 365 team with multiple plans, your credits are pooled so you can all use each others' credits.

    I've run out of credits – what now?
    Upgrade to Mail Designer 365 Business Premium to add additional credits to your account.

    Already on Business Premium? Please reach out to our support team, we'd like to hear more about your experience using TextScout AI Beta.

    When are credits refreshed?
    AI Credits are automatically reset on the first of the month. Unused credits from the previous month do not roll over.

    What are stamps and how many do I need?
     
    Newsletter campaigns as well as Direct Mails are billed using stamps.

    Sending email consumes stamps per recipient, for attachments, placeholders, scheduling, and BCC functions. The exact usage is displayed for each. For direct mail, 25 stamps are required per recipient (plus additional options), while mass campaign mailing requires 1 stamp per recipient as a base.


    Stamps are included in the following monthly plans:
    Plan Karlsfeld (free, included with each Mac Design Plan): 500 Stamps
    Plan Roma: 5.000 Stamps
    Plan Paris: 15.000 Stamps
    Plan London: 25.000 Stamps
    Plan Capetown: 50.000 Stamps
    Plan Seoul: 100.000 Stamps
    ▸ Learn more about all Campaign plans

    Stamps are also available as standalone Stamps packages
    ▸ Learn more about all Stamps packages
    How can I lend an email design I have been working on in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Mail Designer 365 allows you to lend a design to someone else who also uses Mail Designer 365 on his or her Mac. He or she can make changes and return the file afterwards to you.
    ‣ Open the email template you wish to share.
    ‣ Choose "Share" > "Lend..."

    ‣ Enter the recipient's email address and write him or her a short message.
    ‣ Click "Send."


    Remember: You cannot lend a document while on the demo version of Mail Designer 365.


    Please refer to the following page for more information on how to lend your email designs in Mail Designer 365:

    How can I add different social media buttons with different links to my Mail Designer 365 email template?
     
    In order to add different buttons with different links, you need to use a layout blocks with multiple image areas. If you need 4 links, choose a layout block with 4 image areas. If you need 5 links, choose a layout block with 5 image areas.


    Within Mail Designer 365, you have multiple choices of different layout blocks with multiple image areas. Remember, one image area only allows you to add one link. When you send your email templates, an image area with different elements will be rendered as a single image, meaning you can only add one link within one image area and the link will be applied to that entire image area.

    For the layout block, you can choose which layout you want and how many image areas there are within the layout block. Here is a layout block with 4 image areas:




    Within each image area, you can add different graphic elements and a single link. Using a layout block, you can add a button with a unique link inside each image area. The different image areas will be rendered as their own individual images, even though it is one layout block.


    Please refer to the following page for more information on how to add different buttons with different links to your Mail Designer 365 email design:

    How do I add a Mailchimp Placeholder to my design which isn't on the list?
     
    To add a Mailchimp placeholder to your design which doesn't appear on the list (e.g. "Edit my Profile" or "Show Newsletter in Browser") please carry out the following steps:

    • In a text layout block, type the text you want readers to see (i.e. "Edit my Profile.")
    • Highlight your selected text, then, in the sidebar, select "Add Link" from the "Style" tab.
    • Choose link type "Custom."
    • Enter your placeholder into the space provided (e.g. *|UPDATE_PROFILE|*)




    If you are unsure of how to label your placeholders, use Mailchimp's cheatsheet to find the correct label for any merge tag they support.

    You can access the most important placeholders directly, as explained here, for other placeholders and custom merge tags.
    I forgot my password for my Mail Designer account.
     
    Forgot your password? No problem!

    You can reset your password for your equinux ID.

    My email looks fine but images aren't being displayed properly via the Mailchimp view in browser link
     
    Certificate issues which occur in certain browsers - for example, Google Chrome - can cause images to not be displayed due to security measures.

    Previously, Mailchimp were serving the images exported from Mail Designer 365 over http and the "view in browser" webpage was being served over https. If your browser settings were set up to not allow mixed http and https content on web pages, this will explain why you were unable to see the images.

    Mailchimp have recently resolved this issue for new images uploaded to their service. The latest Mail Designer 365 version supports these changes and is fully compatible with Mailchimp.

    If you are still experiencing this with your older designs, please contact the Mailchimp team for support.
    How can I add an Unsubscribe Link to my template for uploading it to Campaign Monitor?
     

    All templates you want to upload to Campaign Monitor have to contain an unsubscribe link.

    To add an unsubscribe link to your template, please follow these steps:

    ‣ Choose the text area you want to insert the unsubscribe link to.
    ‣ Please choose "Insert" > "Campaign Monitor" > "Unsubscribe Link" from the top menu bar.
    You can now upload your design to Campaign Monitor.


    Do I have to manually create the mobile version for every email design in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Mail Designer 365 automatically generates a mobile version of your Newsletter from your Desktop version. This generated mobile version can then be optimized manually.

    If you are using one of our email designs or one of your previously created templates, it's possible that the mobile version was changed. This means that changes to the desktop version of your newsletter don't automatically get transferred to the mobile version. To generate a new mobile template from your desktop version, please follow these steps:

    ‣ In the Menu, please select "File" > "Design options." 
    ‣ Remove the checkmark next to "Create version for mobile devices" and press ok.
    ‣ In the Menu, please go to "File" > "Design options" again.
    ‣ Activate the checkmark next to "Create version for mobile devices" and press ok

    Once you have done this, you should be able to see the mobile modified Desktop version of your newsletter and you will be able to edit the layout blocks of the mobile view.

    Why does the desktop show one font and on iPhone another font even though it is the same email design?
     
    When you send an email template, not every font that you choose may be available at the recipient's side. This is why you can specify a fallback font list, and we recommend that you use an email-safe font.


    Email-safe fonts are the basic fonts installed on everyone's devices. If you have selected a font that is available on macOS but not on iOS, there will be a visible difference on the corresponding devices. If both devices have the font installed, then the email template will look the same on both platforms. You can use Web Fonts which the recipient's e-mail client can downloaded on demand. Most e-mail clients except Outlook support Web Fonts.

    Important: Mail Designer 365 will warn the user about the missing font when the user opens the document.

    I want to test Mail Designer 365, but can't use certain features in the demo. What can I do?
     
    Before purchasing, we strongly suggest all customers try our free, no-obligation demo. It includes nearly all major features.

    If you need to do more in-depth testing, we recommend checking out our affordable Mail Designer 365 monthly plans. You can access all features for an entire month to make sure it's a good fit for your business.

    Once you've tested all the features you need to, you can then get a pro-rated upgrade to a yearly plan if you decide to keep the app.
    How can I download more web fonts in Mail Designer 365?
     
    In order to download more web fonts, click on a text area. Mail Designer 365 will automatically open the "Style" tab on the right side of the screen.
    ‣ Choose “Web Fonts" > "Download additional fonts…” from the font menu.


    Then, you will be able to see a preview window where all available fonts will be displayed.
    ‣ Click ”Start Download“ to download additional Web Fonts you can then use in your template.

    ‣ After you click “Start download,” a popup window will open that shows the progress of the download:

    Things to understand when it comes to web fonts...


    Although there are a wide range of fonts available when you download the additional fonts, we understand that some may still consider this as only a limited number of fonts. This is because the fonts are downloaded from Google’s directory of open source designer web fonts. We wanted to help ensure that our users are able to create designs with beautiful fonts in a legal manner. All the downloadable fonts are free and open source, which means that the fonts are accessible to everyone and are available to be used for both personal and commercial projects.

    Please refer to the following page for further information:

    Can I use multiple text styles within a text area in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Yes, you can use multiple text styles within a text area. However, you can only assign one text style per paragraph.


    You also have the freedom of choosing different fonts and font colors for your text within a given text area. This is not limited to one font per paragraph.


    In order to assign different fonts within a paragraph, you must first select "no style" on the right side of your screen. Then, you can select the text that you want to change and assign it with its own font, font size, font color, etc.

    Is Mail Designer 365 support still available during the Coronavirus crisis
     
    You can rest assured that we continue to offer full support to our customers and have taken the necessary steps to increase our support capacity for you during this difficult time.

    Support Information
    • Our support team continues to be available for you during this time
    • We’ve updated all FAQs to cover your most common issues - checking our FAQs first might help you find the answer to your question faster.
    • The more information you include in your support request, the better. If you are experiencing a problem with a design, attaching the design file or screenshots of the issue can help us get to the bottom of this faster.
    • Support is only available for Mail Designer 365 customers. Users of earlier Mail Designer versions will need to purchase a Mail Designer 365 plan.
    • Priority is given to Mail Designer 365 Business Premium customers


    You can contact the support team at support@maildesigner365.com.
    Is setting up my connection on my.vpntracker secure?
     
    Note: Setting up connections on my.vpntracker is currently in beta and coming to more accounts later this year.

    You can create and edit connections right inside my.vpntracker.com using any browser. Thanks to advanced engineering, this works with the same data security you know from VPN Tracker on the Mac.

    It works like this

    • Choose your device brand and model
    • Enter your connection details
    Here's the key: None of this information is transferred over the internet. It's only being entered locally in your browser, on your device.

    To save your new connection:

    • You enter your equinux ID password
    • Your encrypted secure master key is fetched from my.vpntracker

    Now a program is run locally on your device through your browser that handles encryption:

    • The local encryption program decrypts the master key on your device
    • Then it uses your master key to encrypt the new connection data
    • The fully encrypted connection is then uploaded to your Personal Safe or TeamCloud on my.vpntracker
    • Your Mac, iPhone or iPad can then fetch the encrypted connection, ready for you to connect

    So there you have it. Integrated connection editing on my.vpntracker with the full security and end-to-end encryption you know from VPN Tracker for Mac.

    Why does the image resolution change when I copy & paste my Mail Designer 365 email design into Outlook?
     
    We do not support copy & pasting into Outlook. When you copy & paste, there is no way for us to ensure that Outlook will preserve all of the formatting from Mail Designer 365. Instead, we recommend adding your email account to Mail Designer 365 and sending your messages that way.
    ‣ Go to "Mail Designer 365" > "Preferences."

    ‣ Then choose "Mail accounts"

    Please refer to the following pages for further information on configuration and sending emails via Mail Designer 365:


    Where can I find my Mail Designer templates in Finder and Time Machine?
     

    You can find your original template files in the Finder by following these steps:

    ‣ Right click the template in the Design Chooser
    ‣ Choose "Show in Finder"
    

    How to find your designs in a Time Machine backup
    If you've had a hardware failure and need to find your templates in a backup of your Mac, you can find your templates in this location:

    /user/Library/Group Containers/C3HCD5RMD7.net.tower-one.MailDesigner

    Note: there will be multiple "Library" folders on your harddrive, but you need the hidden one inside your Home folder.
    Here is one way to get there:
    • Navigate to your user's home folder in the Time Machine backup (e.g. "John")
    • Right-click on your user's home folder ("John"), hold down the Alt/Option key (⌥) and select "Copy “john” as Pathname"
    • Select the menu item "Go > Go to Folder…" and a dialog will open
    • Press Cmd+V to paste the path you've just copied and add "/Library" to the end of the path and press enter
    You should now be inside the Library folder of your user account.

    Now here on, go to "Group Containers/C3HCD5RMD7.Mail Designer/Documents/MD365" to find your documents. You'll find folders corresponding to your categories and each will have subfolders "Contents/Resources" that have the actual documents.

    You can drag & drop them onto your Mail Designer 365 icon in the dock to copy them to your Mail Designer 365 library.
    Mailchimp upload says API Key has been revoked
     
    If you're using the latest version of Mail Designer 365 and your Mailchimp upload fails with an "API key revoked" error, please create a new API key in your Mailchimp account.
    Create a new Mailchimp API key
    How come when people forward my Mail Designer 365 email templates, some of objects, including photos and text, are misaligned?
     
    Different email clients will read and do different things to your email designs when forwarding them. Some email clients will put the original email in quoted text and then add the sender information to the top. Others will forward it as is. Because Mail Designer 365 has no control over how email clients behave, the advanced HTML email that you create with Mail Designer 365 may not look the same once it has been forwarded by an email app.

    Our recommendations:


    ‣ One solution is to use the "redirect" feature, which is built-in to some emails to send it to another recipient. "Redirect" is different from forwarding the email because the redirect feature usually tells the email app to leave the original email design alone.
    ‣ Or you could add a link to your email on the web within the email template. This way, people have the option of viewing the email as it is, even after the email has been forwarded.

    Please refer to the following pages for further information:

    I need a layout block with a certain feature for Mail Designer 365, can I build it?
     
    Mail Designer 365 includes layout blocks for almost every newsletter layout imaginable. But if you have specific requirements, you can even create completely customized, reusable layout blocks. All you'll need is Mail Designer 365 and HTML and CSS skills.

    Please note: You'll need to have a fairly detailed understanding of HTML and CSS layouts to create your own layout blocks.

    Mail Designer 365 uses advanced techniques to create highly compatible email layouts, so you'll need to be careful not to break email compatibility when creating your own.

    We can't provide HTML support for your custom designs or any issues that are caused by custom layout blocks so proceed with caution. (Or as our support team likes to say: With great power comes great responsibility…)

    How to create a custom layout block


    • Right click an existing layout block and choose "Save to desktop"
    • Find the "..eqrmlayoutblock" on your desktop and edit the Content.html file
    • Customize the preview image to match your new layout block
    • Drag the entire folder with your custom layout block into the Mail Designer 365 Contents panel


    Your new layout block will now show up in the app alongside the default layout blocks. Just drag it in to your design to use it.

    Don't forget to thoroughly test both the desktop and mobile versions of a design with custom layout blocks before using it for production email campaigns




    How can I edit my background in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Mail Designer 365 offers you an array of different options when it comes to editing your newsletter background.

    You can set a color as your email background. With the help of the color picker, you can even choose a color inspired by a photo or graphic. Just use the pipette to grab the color.


    You are also welcome to use any photos, textures, or patterns from Mail Designer's stock library. We included many different categories. Simply drag and drop the thumbnails from the design sidebar into your background.



    You can even use your own photos, textures, and patterns. Just simply drag it to your template from your desktop or the Finder. If you are using a third party's photo, texture, or pattern, make sure that you have permission to use it for commercial projects. Also, don't forget to give credit to the designer/artist.

    How do I add a GIF into my email design in Mail Designer 365?
     
    You can use your own GIFs or use one of the animations found in Mail Designer 365's content library.

    In order to add a GIF, please do the following:
    ‣ Drag a layout block with an image area into your newsletter
    ‣ Drag the GIF that you want to use into an image area
    ‣ Make sure to only add 1 GIF per 1 image area
    ‣ If you add multiple GIFs into 1 image area, only the last GIF added will work


    Who can use Crew Chat?
     
    Mail Designer 365 Crew Chat is suitable for anyone in your team involved in the email campaign workflow and feedback process. Common examples include: Marketers, sales-team, branding, copywriters, managers, agency clients, etc.
    I'm seeing an API error when I try to upload my designs to Mailchimp
     
    Mailchimp has discontinued supports for their older APIs. These APIs were previously used by Mail Designer in earlier versions. Please update to the latest version of Mail Designer 365 which provides support for Mailchimp's latest API.

    If you are using an older version of Mail Designer, e.g. Mail Designer 1, Mail Designer 2 or Mail Designer Pro 1-3 or Mail Designer Pro HS, please upgrade to Mail Designer 365.
    My Campaign Monitor API key is not working
     
    If you have received the following error message when trying to export your design from Mail Designer 365, you will need to ask Campaign Monitor for a new API key.



    In order to generate a new API key and carry on exporting designs from the app as usual, log in to your Campaign Monitor account and head to "Account settings":



    Then, go to "API keys", where you can generate a new API key:



    Once you have done this, update your new API key in the app and try your export again.

    Can I test the HTML export before I buy a plan?
     
    Want to test Mail Designer 365 code with another ESP, CRM platform, or similar? We've created a HTML sample of one of our most popular Design Ideas, so you can try before you buy!

    Download HTML sample

    Please note, when you use the HTML export feature yourself, you'll also have the option of setting an image URL, and image prefix for where your images will be hosted, as well as a custom folder and HTML file name.
    My Mail Designer 365 email design or formatting is displayed incorrectly in the Mailchimp "Edit" view
     
    The "Edit" View on Mailchimp's website is not meant for a proper preview. Please click on "Preview and Test" on the top right corner of your screen. Then, choose "Enter preview mode."


    This should give you a better and more accurate view of how great your design will actually look!

    Please refer to the following page for further information on how to accurately view your Mail Designer 365's email design once uploaded on MailChimp:

    What kind of GIFs should I use for my Mail Designer 365 email designs?
     
    If you need inspiration, we have some fun tips for you to try.

    You can also check out our video for tips on animated GIFs here:



    Does Mail Designer 365 work with macOS 15?
     
    We're pleased to announce the latest Mail Designer 365 version offers support for macOS Sequoia, so you can upgrade your Mac to macOS 15 and continue using Mail Designer 365 as usual.

    Download the latest Mail Designer 365 version here.
    How can I add a link to an image area for my social media accounts in Mail Designer 365?
     
    You can create a link for an image area, so the image area will be clickable in your email. Choose a layout block with image areas.


    It’s important to note that an entire image area will be displayed as a single image in your email. It does not matter how many shapes or graphics you have within a single image area, the entire image area will be displayed as a single image. Also, you can only assign one link per image area. If you want to add multiple links for different social media accounts, you will need to choose a layout block with multiple image areas.

    First, let's go over how to assign 1 link to 1 image area (Great for linking to only 1 social media account):



    ‣ To create an image area link, choose an image area in your design. 

    ‣ Click the "Add Link" button from the Style section of the sidebar.
    ‣ Then, just enter your URL.
    ‣ The entire image area will be “hot” and can be clicked in your final message.

    ‣ A little link icon will show you for which image areas links has been embedded.
    ‣ Note: It is not possible to add a link to individual components of a single image area.


    Remember: 1 link to 1 image area. This means you can only assign 1 link to 1 social media outlet within 1 image area.

    How to assign multiple links (Great for linking multiple social media accounts):



    We’ve included several layout blocks that contain several image areas next to each other.


    You can use these blocks to create multiple image area links. For instance, if you use a layout block with 4 image areas, you can add 4 buttons with different links to 4 social media sites.


    Just make sure to add one icon per one image area. Assign one link per one icon.


    Correct vs. Incorrect




    Correct because: 4 different icons in 4 different image areas. You can add 1 link per 1 image area. Therefore, you can add 4 different links total.




    Incorrect because: 4 different icons in 1 image area. You can only add 1 link per 1 image area. Therefore, 4 icons will only lead to 1 landing page.

    Please refer to the following page for more information on how to add different buttons with different links to your Mail Designer 365 email design:



    For a video tutorial:


    My Mail Designer 365 email design looks perfect on my device; but when I send my test mails or preview the template on my email service provider, the text formatting of my email template becomes jumbled up.
     

    There are a couple of things that you need to check.



    ‣ First, are you using MailChimp as your email service provider? If yes, make sure that you are not viewing your design on the "Edit" preview within MailChimp's website.
    ‣ Click "Preview and Test" on the top right corner of your screen. 
    ‣ Then, choose "Enter preview mode."

    ‣ If not, try changing the default line height of your text. The default is set at 1.5. Adjust the line height to fit your needs. Try to set the spacing to 1.0 height. Your text should no longer look jumbled up.
    How do I activate Mail Designer 365?
     
    Activating Mail Designer 365 is easy! Here's how to get started:

    • If you haven't already, you can download Mail Designer 365 using this link.
    • After the download has completed, launch the app and click the "Login" button in the top left-hand corner of the Design Chooser homepage.
    • Enter your equinux ID and password in the space provided. Hint: This is the login you first created when purchasing Mail Designer 365 (or any other equinux software products) in our online store.
    I accidentally deleted Mail Designer 365 from my Mac. What should I do?
     
    Don't worry if you accidentally deleted Mail Designer 365! We understand that these things happen and we've got your back.

    To reinstall Mail Designer 365, go to our website and click on the "Download" link. Once the app has downloaded onto your Mac, you can log in with your equinux ID and password and carry on designing.
    The HTML version of my design does not recognize my font changes
     
    Designs which have no pre-configured text style set up can sometimes have font issues in the HTML version. For example, the HTML can override any font choices made by the user and change it back to a default font.

    For this reason, we strongly suggest that you apply a pre-configured text style to all of the text layout blocks within your design. In doing this, you have more control over your design and how it appears after send/export.

    Text styles allow you to choose a preferred font, as well as several fallback options, and an email-safe font, which is universally supported. You can also use them to determine the size, color, and alignment of text.

    For more information on how to configure text styles, please refer to the Mail Designer 365 Manual, where you will find step-by-step guides under the header "Working with text."
    Why is my PPTP connection failing with “VPN Gateway Not Responding (GRE)”?
     
    The PPTP protocol consists of two components: one using TCP transport (also used for websites) and another using GRE transport. The latter often causes issues.

    If your internet provider or router does not fully support GRE, VPN Tracker can initiate the TCP part but fails to receive a response when the GRE connection starts.

    To check if your network supports PPTP connections, use the VPN Tracker Connection Checker. If the result does not indicate a successful connection, verify your internet setup.

    Some routers require “PPTP Passthrough” to be enabled for GRE to function correctly. Check your router’s manual for instructions.
    Can my email recipients play videos directly within the Mail Designer 365 email design if hosted by Dropbox?
     
    Dropbox changed the way their public folder behaves and they have shut down hotlinking files, which means that you are no longer able to play videos directly within the email if the video is hosted by Dropbox. Also, keep in mind that directly embedded videos do not always work properly with certain email clients. This means that some of your recipients may not be able to view the video because of the email client they are using.

    Our best practice recommendation when it comes to videos:


    We recommend linking out to the videos on another site such as YouTube or Vimeo. These videos will then open in Safari or the relevant video app. For example, if it's a YouTube video and the YouTube app is installed on the device, then the video will play right in the YouTube app on the recipient's device.
    What is TextScout AI and how can I use it?
     
    TextScout AI (beta) utilises the latest AI technology and enables Mail Designer 365 users to craft sales-boosting subject lines from just a few campaign keywords. Enter specific words and phrases, choose your desired tone, and generate perfectly-formed subject lines in seconds.

    How to access TextScout AI


    TextScout AI is available to try out in all Mail Designer 365 plans in the latest Mail Designer 365 version. The number of AI credits available to you for generating subject lines varies depending on your plan tier. Check your status using the credits indicator within the TextScout AI window.

     
    No answer available
    VPN protocols not supported on iPhone/iPad
     

    The following VPN protocols are currently not supported by VPN Tracker for iPhone / iPad:

    • L2TP
    • PPTP

    Workarounds
    Many VPN gateways support more than one VPN standard. Check your VPN gateway or ask your network administrator and see if a compatible protocol can be enabled instead.

    Tip: Hide Unsupported Protocols
    Inside VPN Tracker, go to Settings → Connection Settings to hide unsupported connections from your list.

    How can I add a background to my Mail Designer 365 email template?
     
    Click the background editing mode icon on the bottom left. It will make your other contents invisible, allowing you to focus on your main email background. When choosing a background, you can see 2 different areas. One area includes the background of your text areas, which is the middle of your email design. The second area is the surrounding background area.


    Drag a photo background, image, or texture into the surrounding background area to apply it.


    This will apply your choice of background to the mail email background. You can also open the colors window and choose a color as your design background.


    If you would like to set a background for your text areas, then drag an image to the middle area of your email design.

    Please refer to the following page for further information on how to change the background of your email template with Mail Designer Pro:


     
    No answer available
    Can I use Direct Mail to send my Mail Designer 365 email designs?
     
    Of course! There is a Direct Mail plug-in available for Mail Designer 365. Direct Mail has been tested by our team for Mail Designer 365 compatibility. Use Mail Designer 365 to create HTML responsive emails for Direct Mail without breaking a sweat – no HTML and CSS knowledge necessary. Our email builder software for Mac makes it easy to create a custom email template design for your email marketing goals. Now, you can design a responsive email template for Direct Mail using Mail Designer 365's email design tools. Send a Direct Mail email with an email template that you curated with a little help from our Direct Mail integration guide.

    Please refer to the following page for how to integrate Direct Mail with your Mail Designer 365 account:
    Can I cross-upgrade my Mail Designer 365 plan?
     
    Yes you can! If you have purchased a Mail Designer 365 plan and are only part way through your subscription year, you can still cross-upgrade to a better plan via your my.maildesigner365 portal.

    On the start page, simply click on your team name, navigate to the "Store" tab and select your plan from the list. Once you've purchased your plan, it will be available for you to use yourself or assign to another member of your team.


    How can I display an animated gif in high resolution for retina screens?
     
    Due to compatibility issues with some very popular email clients (👋 Gmail and Outlook), animated gifs are always rendered at non-retina resolution, so they don’t break your email’s layout.

    We hope that’ll change in the future, but for now your best shot is to choose a gif that’ll look good regardless of resolution.
    Why does the font change when I lend the Mail Designer 365 email template I created to another person?
     
    Typically, the fonts only change on another person's device if you are using a font in your email template that the other person does not have installed on his/her computer. For example, if you are using the font "Chelsea Market" in your document, and the person you lent the document to does not have "Chelsea Market" installed on his/her computer, a fallback font will be displayed instead.


    Important: Mail Designer 365 will warn the user about the missing font when the user opens the document.


    If you want to make sure that the font that you use will appear on a different person's device, then we suggest using one of the email-safe fonts in your email newsletter.



    Is Mail Designer 365 available for the iPad?
     
    Currently, Mail Designer 365 is only available for Mac (macOS) computers.
    My test email was not delivered to my inbox but I received a delivery confirmation. Where is it?
     
    Sometimes you may experience a delay when sending a test version of your design. This is a security feature from Amazon Web Services designed to prevent spam emails. Your test send email will be marked as delivered by our server, but it is possible that you can experience a short delay before the email appears in your inbox.

    Please note, this only applies to the test send feature, as we are sending via our server using your name as an alias. When you send the final version of your design, you should not experience any delays as you are sending via your own email address/ESP.
    Can I use Mail Designer 365 to create surveys?
     
    Currently, Mail Designer 365 does not directly support forms or surveys embedded within your email design. To make sure that your recipients are getting the optimal design that you created, we decided to leave out the HTML forms feature. Most email clients do not support HTML forms or surveys, which is why Mail Designer 365 was designed to not support HTML forms. If you were to add surveys in your email design, there is no way that we could make sure that your recipients will get a functional survey that you created, since we have no control how email clients read and interpret your newsletter.

    However, if you needed to add a form to get feedback from your recipients, then we suggest linking to an outside form maker like Google forms. You can use an image or a specific text and add a link to your form. 
    Why should I use text styles in Mail Designer 365?
     
    The option to format text styles in your email design may not seem to be important, but it will massively help you when you're trying to make quick changes to the text in your email.

    When you set up a text style (e.g. Body Text) any changes you make to that style will be automatically applied to any sections of text within your newsletter where that style has been applied; for example, in different layout blocks.

    If you want to make a change to the text in your design (i.e. change the color or the font) it's quicker and easier to change the format of the text style than to manually go through each layout block of your newsletter and make sure the text has been updated.

    In addition, having predefined text styles in place makes your design more reliable when it comes to sending and you are much less likely to run into display or compatibility issues.
    How do I add borders to my photos?
     
    With Mail Designer 365, you can now easily add borders to your photos.

    ‣ Select the photo that you want to add a border to
    ‣ This will automatically prompt Mail Designer 365 to open the "Style" tab on the right side of the screen
    ‣ At the bottom, find the "Border" section
    ‣ Select the type of border that you want to use
    ‣ Click on the color wheel icon and choose the color of your border
    ‣ Change the pixel size to adjust the thickness of the border


    Note: You can also add borders to shapes.

    Does Mailchimp host my images when I export my template from Mail Designer 365?
     
    When you export your design directly from Mail Designer 365 using the Mailchimp integration tool, your images will be exported together with your template and hosted by the Mailchimp platform.

    Learn more about exporting designs to Mailchimp here.

    What is my MailChimp API key?
     

    In order to upload templates to your MailChimp account on your behalf, Mail Designer needs your MailChimp API key (a special kind of password).

    You can find your API key on your MailChimp. The MailChimp support pages have more information.

    SMTP Account: Why am I receiving an error message when I try to send from my iCloud account?
     



    This error message appears when trying to send your design from an iCloud account with 2-factor authentication set up. In order to be able to send your design as normal, you will need to set up an app-specific password for Mail Designer.

    Apple's support page has more information on how to set this up.

    Why do my test emails appear in my spam folder?
     
    When you send using the test feature, Mail Designer 365 sends the email via our test servers but under the alias of your email address (so you can see how the sender etc. will appear in the inbox.) This can sometimes result in your email being detected as spam, as it is coming from our test server and not a “real” email address.

    However, if your test mail lands in your spam folder, it doesn’t mean that your real email will. When you send for real, you are sending via your own address or via an ESP where you have entered your mail domain; meaning that it should show up fine in your recipient’s inbox.
    My GIF is acting differently following export or some frames are missing. Why?
     
    During export, Mail Designer 365 automatically applies a GIF compression to ensure that the exported file won't be too large.

    This can result in some empty or transparent frames being cut from your GIF in order to save space.

    As a workaround, a pixel can be built into the GIF and invisibly placed at any point over the entire length of the animation. This way, Mail Designer 365 won't identify the frames as empty.
    How do I delete the custom content (graphics, images, etc.) I have added?
     
    To delete your custom content, try the following:
    ‣ Click on the appropriate icon within the "Contents" tab to identify the location of your custom content.
    ‣ Choose this icon if you added custom content to your graphics section:

    ‣ Choose this icon if you added custom content to your GIF/animated graphics section:

    ‣ Choose this icon if you added custom content to your backgrounds and photos section:

    ‣ Choose this icon if you added a custom folder with images and graphics:

    ‣ Once you have chosen, scroll down to the "Custom" section:

    ‣ Right-click on the image or graphic that you want to delete.
    ‣ Choose "Move to Trash" from the drop-down menu.

    ‣ To remove a folder, you will need to right-click on the folder and choose "Remove."


    SMTP Account: Error message when sending: An unexpected error occurred (1)
     
    This points to an error while authenticating your email account. Try checking the following:

    • The username is wrong/incomplete. For example, iCloud accounts sometimes work with "username" but most times need the whole email address as a log in.
    • The password is wrong.
    • If you're trying TLS, try STARTTLS instead.
    • Maybe your server is using a custom port - though this is unlikely.

    If you have a Mail program you use (e.g. Apple Mail) try comparing the outgoing mail settings there and use the same settings in Mail Designer 365.

     
    No answer available
    Mail Designer 365 doesn't recognize my purchase / can't find my plan?
     
    First, please try signing out and back in again. This will tell Mail Designer 365 to re-fetch all of your account details, including your plan.

    If that's not working, double-check that the email address you have signed in with matches the email address you used to purchase.

    If this does not work and your Mail Designer 365 app does not seem to recognize this purchase, please contact support and send us some debug information:

    ‣ Hold the alt ⌥ key or option key on your keyboard 
    ‣ Select "Help" > "Send Debug Logs..." from the menu



    What are the different team roles and what do they mean?
     
    Mail Designer 365 is designed for teams. When you create a team, you can assign users a personalized role according to their needs. Members can discuss designs with you in Crew Chat, send campaigns, and use Direct Mail. Your team doesn’t have to consist solely of colleagues from your company. You can also include external collaborators such as copywriters, photographers, or the client themselves.

    Here are the different team roles and their meanings:

    • External
      Ideal for: clients, external employees, and managers who want to contribute content and approve or launch campaigns. Can use TeamCloud, Crew Chat, Direct Mail, and campaigns. Cannot purchase plans or stamps for the team.
    • Member
      Ideal for: employees who work closely on emails. Can use TeamCloud, Crew Chat, Direct Mail, and campaigns. Can purchase plans or stamps for the team.
    • Project Manager
      Ideal for: administrators of your team, who don’t necessarily have to be involved in design. Can manage team members, purchase, and assign plans and licenses.
    Your admin can change membership levels at any time. To start, you might build your team with just the "Member" level.

    You can set up a new team at my.maildesigner365.com/teams/create
    How do I create a list in my Mail Designer 365 email newsletter?
     
    Mail Designer 365 allows you to add lists within your text areas.
    ‣ Drag and drop a text area into your email template.
    ‣ Double-click on the text area.
    ‣ Type your list. Highlight the text where you want the list to appear.

    ‣ On the right side of the screen, you will find a side bar in which you can choose the list style under "Lists."
    ‣ Choose the list style you want.

    ‣ It will automatically transform your words into a list with your chosen bullet point.


    Please refer to the following page for further information on how to create a list:

    How do I only send or export the desktop version in Mail Designer 365?
     
    To only send the desktop version of your email design, try the following:

    ‣ Choose "File" > "Design Options..."

    ‣ Uncheck "Create version for mobile devices."

    ‣ Click "OK" when you are ready.


    Then, you will be able to export your email design or send via your method of choice (through Apple Mail, Campaign Monitor, MailChimp, etc).
    How do I send the debug logs of Mail Designer 365?
     
    To create debug logs, please try the following:
    ‣ Hold the alt ⌥ key or option key on your keyboard 
    ‣ Select "Help" > "Send Debug Logs..." from the menu

    Note: If you do not hold the alt/option ⌥ key, the Help drop-down menu will say "Provide Mail Designer Feedback..." instead of "Send Debug Logs..."

    ‣ Once you have sent your debug log, Mail Designer 365 will notify you that the log has been sent successfully

    Which features are available with which plans?
     
    We have a range of plan options available to suit all needs.

    A Mail Designer 365 Business plan is intended for everyday email newsletters. This plan offers you access to all the latest Design Ideas, as well as the Borders tool and Teamwork features.

    Mail Designer 365 Business Premium plans are intended for users who consider newsletters to be a critical part of their marketing strategy.
    This plan offers you all the features available in a Business plan, plus:
    • 24h priority support
    • Tables tool
    • Blend Modes
    • Duotone Filters
    • Vibrancy effects

    If you want to cross-upgrade your plan from Small Business (our legacy plan) to Business or Business Premium, you can do so by heading to my.maildesigner365.com.
    Can I use keyboard shortcuts to align different objects in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Yes, you can use keyboard shortcuts for your alignment needs with Mail Designer 365.


    Please refer to the following page for keyboard shortcuts for aligning different objects in Mail Designer 365:

    How do I turn off the hyphenation in Mail Designer 365?
     
    You can change whether your text is automatically hyphenated in your text areas. To turn off the hyphenation, try the following:
    ‣ Go to "File" > "Design Options."

    ‣ Remove the check mark from the "Force hyphenation."

    ‣ Click "Ok."


    Please refer to the following page for further information on how to turn on and off text hyphenation:


    How can I record network traffic?
     

    On rare occasions, the VPN Tracker support team might ask you to record the network traffic between your VPN gateway and your Mac. Here's how to do that:

    First, you need to know the hostname or IP address of your VPN gateway. You can see it in the status page of your connection (the hostname is in the third column), or by editing your connection.

    Then, follow these steps:

    • Open Terminal.app, which you can find via Finder in Applications > Utilities.
    • Enter the following command, and replace [hostname] with the hostname or IP adress of your VPN gateway:
      sudo tcpdump -i any host [hostname] -w ~/Desktop/traffic.pcap
    • You will be asked for a password: this is the password of your Mac user account. You get asked for it because recording network traffic requires elevated privileges.
    • After entering the password, the command appears to hang. It is now recording traffic until you press Ctrl+C (but please don't press that yet).
    • If you see the command prompt again you have likely entered the wrong password. Please run the command again (Tip: press the arrow-up key to recall the command).
    • Go back to VPN Tracker and start the connection you might experience trouble with.
    • After you have reproduced the problem (for example, after the connection failed to connect), go back the Terminal.app window in which tcpdump is running.
    • Press Ctrl+C to stop the recording.
    • On you desktop, there's now a file traffic.pcap. Please send this file to equinux support.
    Can I add WeVideo videos to my Mail Designer 365 email template?
     
    Yes, you can add WeVideo videos into your email design using Mail Designer 365. Follow these simple steps:
    ‣ Add a layout block with an image area.
    ‣ In the "Contents" tab, click on the "Video Placeholder" icon. You can also press Command-5.

    ‣ Drag a video placeholder into an image area.

    ‣ Paste your WeVideo link into the "Link to Video" field.

    Keep in mind:


    Unlike YouTube or Vimeo videos, generating preview images from WeVideo videos is not directly supported by Mail Designer365. You will have to provide your own preview image by taking a screenshot of the video frame you want to use as the preview image. Then drag that image onto the video placeholder. Or you can choose an image of your choice as the preview image.

    In the email newsletter, the videos that you add are treated as images with a link to the video page. Direct inline playback is no longer supported by Mail Designer 365 because most email clients do not support it.

    Note: Please remember that Mail Designer 365 does not support embedding videos directly within your email designs.

    How can I back up my designs?
     
    If you need to back up your Mail Designer 365 email templates (e.g. because you've bought a new Mac or need to format your computer), you have multiple options:

    ‣ If you use Time Machine on the Mac, the designs are also included in the backup by default.
    ‣ If you are manually backing up your Mac, you'll need to back up the following folder on your external hard drive:
    ~/Library/Group Containers/C3HCD5RMD7.net.tower-one.MailDesigner
    You can access this folder by opening Finder, going to "Go" > "Go to folder" and copying and pasting in the above path.
    ‣ You can do a complete manual backup by going to "My Designs." Then, press ⌘ + a to select all the designs and then drag them to a folder on your desktop. You can then also save this folder on an external hard drive.
    World Connect keeps crashing when I open it?
     
    In rare cases World Connect may crash due to a bug. An update is coming to fix this issue, but in the mean time, here's a quick fix:

    • Open the Terminal on your Mac (Applications > Utilities > Terminal)
    • Copy and paste the following command, then hit enter

      defaults delete com.equinux.VPN-Tracker-World-Connect.mac VPNGatewayList

    Now World Connect will open normally. Apologies for the inconvenience!
    Legacy Mail Designer versions - End of support
     
    In the world of email design, things are changing constantly. With this in mind, it's important to bear in mind that many features available in legacy versions of Mail Designer may no longer work and that designs created in older versions may not be in line with today's modern standards.

    For this reason, we have exclusively dedicated our support and development efforts to maintaining the Mail Designer 365 service - the only Mail Designer version to offer you ongoing updates and compatibility with all future macOS versions.

    For reference, below you can find the end of support dates for all legacy versions of Mail Designer:

    Mail Designer- Support ended: September 2014

    Mail Designer 2 - Support ended: February 2015

    Mail Designer Pro - Support ended: May 2016

    Mail Designer Pro 2 - Support ended: May 2017

    Mail Designer Pro 3 - Support ended: October 2018

    Mail Designer Pro HS - Support ended: January 2019

    What this means:
    While some of these versions of Mail Designer may still work on your current Mac, should you need to get a new Mac, or upgrade to a new macOS, they will no longer be supported.

    What to do: If you are still using an older version, we strongly suggest you upgrade to a modern Mail Designer 365 plan to guarantee regular updates and consistent support throughout the lifetime of your plan.
    Can columns be adjusted in Mail Designer 365?
     
    You can adjust the width of individual columns, if you have multiple text areas within a single layout block. You can also adjust the width of individual columns, if you have multiple image areas within a single layout block.

    However, when working with columns, you cannot adjust the number of columns within a layout block. You will need to select the appropriate layout block with the specific number of columns that you want (either 2 or 3 columns for text areas).


    You cannot switch automatically from 2 columns to 3 columns or vice versa. However, you can just add another layout block with the correct number of columns. Afterwards, just copy the text from your original layout block and then paste the text onto the new layout block.

    If you want more than 3 columns for text areas, you will need to work with a single text area and space your message accordingly. In this scenario, you will basically be simulating your own table with multiple columns.

    Compared to layout blocks with text areas, you have more options when it comes to layout blocks with image areas. You can use a layout block with up to 6 image areas in a column style.


    With this layout block, the image areas are displayed next to each other in the desktop view. However, please note that the image areas will be displayed on top of each other in the mobile view. This was designed so that recipients will easily be able to click on the images if they are linked to a landing page and so that the images are still clearly visible when the email is opened with a mobile device.

    How can I update my payment method?
     

    Visit my.maildesigner365.com, log in to your account, and go to the "Billing" tab to change your payment method.

    Click on your current payment method in the top right corner and select "Choose another way to pay." You can now add a new credit card or alternatively, add a PayPal account. This will be used as your new default payment method for your Mail Designer 365 plan.

    Which devices will display the mobile version of my newsletter?
     

    With Mail Designer 365 you can create responsive newsletters which look different depending on which device your recipient opens your email.

    On an iPhone your recipient will see the mobile version of your newsletter.
    As an iPad has a much bigger screen than an iPhone, an iPad will display the desktop version of your newsletter.

    Will Mail Designer 365 check my email for errors before I send?
     
    Mail Designer 365 offers you ultimate peace of mind when you're designing your email newsletters. Thanks to an array of fail-detection methods, you can be safe in the knowledge that your email will be sent error-free.

    Some fail prevention measures include...
    • Image optimisation
    • Subject line preview
    • Built in spelling & grammar checker
    • Mobile optimisation tools

    For a detailed overview of all our fail detection methods, check out this post.
    Does Mail Designer 365 work on Macs with Apple M1 + M2 chips?
     
    New Mac? No problem. The latest version of Mail Designer 365 offers full support for Macs with M1 and M2 chips, as well as compatibility with the latest macOS versions, including macOS 15 Sequoia.

    Download the latest version here.
    Can I upgrade to Mail Designer 365 from an older version of Mail Designer?
     
    If you are using an older, legacy version of Mail Designer which is no longer supported - i.e. Mail Designer 1, Mail Designer 2 or Mail Designer Pro - you can easily upgrade to Mail Designer 365 to continue creating and sending email newsletters.

    How to buy from the Mail Designer 365 store
    1. Head to our website to view all plan options.
    2. Choose your preferred plan and click "Buy"
    3. Log in to my.maildesigner365 with your equinux ID to complete your purchase (this is the login you use for Mail Designer)
    4. Once you've purchased a plan, download the app and move it to your Applications folder.

    How to buy from the Mac App Store
    1. Find Mail Designer 365 on the App Store
    2. Choose your plan and complete your purchase to download the Mail Designer 365 app to your Mac.
    3. Open the app and log in with your equinux ID

    Now you can enjoy all the latest features and Design Ideas available in Mail Designer 365.

    Tip: Once you have upgraded, Mail Designer 365 will automatically offer to import your designs from supported older Mail Designer versions. Find out more in this FAQ.
    Why is my Mail Designer version no longer supported?
     
    In the world of email design, things are changing constantly. For this reason, it's important to bear in mind that many features available in legacy versions of Mail Designer may no longer work and that designs created in older versions may not be in line with today's modern standards.

    This applies in particular if you decide to upgrade your Mac to a newer macOS.

    When you upgrade to a Mail Designer 365 plan, you are paying for compatibility with the latest macOS versions, as well as compatibility with all the leading email clients and email service providers. Moreover, you also have ongoing access to new Design Ideas, creative tools and cutting edge features which our development team are working on all year round.
    How can I recover a deleted Keychain or missing passwords on macOS?
     
    You can recover a deleted Keychain or missing Keychain data using Time Machine backups if you have them set up. Here’s a step-by-step guide:
    1. Verify Backups Are Available:
    Ensure that Time Machine or another backup system has been configured on your Mac. Without a backup, recovery of deleted data may not be possible.
    2. Locate Keychain Files:
    Keychain data is stored in ~/Library/Keychains/. To access it:
    • Open Finder.
    • Press Shift + Command + G and type ~/Library/Keychains/.
    • Press Return to open the folder.
    3. Launch Time Machine:
    • With the Keychains folder open, click the Time Machine icon in the menu bar or open it from the Applications folder.
    • Navigate through your backups until you locate the version of the Keychain files you want to restore.
    4. Restore Keychain Files:
    • Select the desired Keychain files.
    • Click Restore to place them back into the Keychains folder.
    5. Reintegrate the Keychain:
    After restoring, open Keychain Access (via Spotlight or Applications > Utilities) to verify the recovered Keychain data. If the Keychain doesn’t automatically appear, use the File > Add Keychain option in Keychain Access to manually import it.
    6. Check for iCloud Sync:
    If you use iCloud Keychain, check if your missing passwords have synced back automatically. Ensure iCloud Keychain is enabled under System Settings > Apple ID > iCloud > Passwords and Keychain.
    How do I migrate my designs on a second Mac if I already started Mail Designer 365 without migrating the designs in the initial dialog?
     
    Don't worry, you can still import your designs.

    ‣ Go to the "File" menu
    ‣ Choose “Import settings and designs…”

    ‣ Click "Grant access" when you are ready


    This will let you import all your existing data from earlier Mail Designer versions.
    How much is MailChimp?
     

    MailChimp has free and paid plans. Please visit the MailChimp website for more details and exact pricing information.

    What are "responsive newsletters"?
     
    Responsive newsletters are emails which change their layout and content depending on which device they are viewed. One newsletter opened in Mail on your Mac will look different if opened on an iPhone.

    Text blocks, for example, which are arranged side by side in the desktop version will appear one below the other when viewed on an iPhone.


    With Mail Designer 365, you can create responsive newsletters. By editing images, graphics and text objects for the mobile version you can optimize your template for mobile devices.

    With Mail Designer 365, is it possible to embed a video in an email that will play directly in the email?
     
    Most email clients do not support this feature, which results in many bugs. Recipients may end up not seeing the video at all or the video refuses to play. This why Mail Designer 365 only supports linking to videos.
    I can't purchase a subscription and I need to upgrade my software for the new macOS version
     
    We understand that some educational customers and enterprises may not be able to purchase a subscription plan.

    For those of you unable to purchase a subscription plan due to company guidelines/restrictions, you can purchase Mail Designer 365 with a 1-year term and immediately disable any renewals via my.maildesigner365.

    From the point of view of the company, that shouldn't be any different that buying a license and purching upgrades on an annual schedule.
     
    No answer available
    Is there an educational discount available for Mail Designer 365?
     
    There are currently no educational discounts available for Mail Designer 365.

    For more information on pricing, please refer to our buyer's guide, where you can choose from a range of flexible plan options depending on your needs.
    Can I use my own SMTP with Mail Designer 365?
     
    Yes, Mail Designer 365 knows many settings like SMTP server or port. You will need to configure an email account for sending to use this.

    Follow this step-by-step guide for more information on how to do this.
    Can I use keyboard shortcuts in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Of course! Mail Designer 365 has many keyboard shortcuts that you can use when working with different objects, using the control panel, and many more.

    Please refer to the following pages for keyboard shortcuts that you can use in Mail Designer 365:

    What forms of payment do you accept?
     

    In our online store we accept a variety of payment methods:

    • Visa
    • Mastercard
    • American Express
    • PayPal*
    • Personal/Business Checks* (US Orders Only)
    • Bank Transfers* (European Union Only)

    * License will be emailed to you once your payment has cleared.

    When paying my check or bank transfer, you will receive an email with additional payment details once you have placed your order. Bank Transfer and Check orders are currently not available for Mail Designer Purchases

    Why is a link in my Mail Designer 365 email design being applied to the entire image area instead of my button or shape?
     
    When your email templates are rendered, an entire image area will become one image. This means that when you send your Mail Designer 365 email designs, all of the graphic elements that you add within one image area will be combined and turn into one image. As a result, the link that you add will apply to the entire image area instead of a single element.



    If you want to add multiple buttons with different links, the use layout blocks with multiple image areas. That way, you can add one button with its own link per one image area.



    Please refer to the following page for more information on text areas why a link is being applied to the entire image area instead of a graphic element:


    Why are not all of my GIFs animating?
     
    In Mail Designer 365, if you add multiple GIFs into a single image area, then only the latest added GIF will animate. To solve this issue, make sure to drag a layout block with multiple image areas. Afterwards, drag only one GIF per one image area.
    Why should I cross-upgrade from Small Business?
     
    Cross-upgrading your Small Business plan is the only way to guarantee you have access to the very best Mail Designer 365 features.

    In addition to all the latest Design Ideas, a cross upgrade to Business or Business Premium also offers you some awesome new creative tools to make your email designs even better. Find out about your plan options here.

    How to cross-upgrade:
    Cross-upgrading your plan is simple. Head to my.maildesigner365.com. On the start page, you will see your current plan. Click on "Convert to team plan." Then, select the plan you would like to cross-upgrade to.



    Once you've completed your purchase, your plan will be available for you to use or to assign to a team member.
    Why does my team need Crew Chat?
     
    Crew Chat is directly integrated in the design window and the natural next step for your Mail Designer 365 Campaigns workflow. Click to upload to Crew Chat and view your design drafts, comments, and feedback all in one place, together with your team. Learn more.
    How can I get early access to beta versions of Mail Designer 365?
     
    If you've bought Mail Designer 365 in our store, you can get beta versions of Mail Designer 365. This feature is not automatically available if you bought Mail Designer 365 from the Apple Mac App Store. However, if you still wish to access the beta version, you can download Mail Designer 365 free from our website and login to your account with your equinux ID and password.

    To access the beta version, please follow these steps:
    ‣ Open Mail Designer 365 on your Mac. 
    ‣ Choose "Mail Designer 365" > "Preferences."

    ‣ Make sure to click the "Updates" tab.

    ‣ Check the "Get Early Access to beta versions" box.

    ‣ Since Beta versions are meant to test features and compatibility, Mail Designer 365 will remind you to have a backup of your app and designs:


    For checking updates, Mail Designer 365 will check for new versions on app start or you can:


    ‣ Go to "Mail Designer 365" > "Check for Updates…"


    Please refer to the following page for further information:

    How can I add a unsubscribe link to my campaign design?
     
    First open your template in Mail Designer 365. You can then insert a placeholder using the menu “Insert > Mail Designer 365 Campaigns”. From there, select “Unsubscribe Link”.
    Can I optimize the inbox preview with Mail Designer 365?
     
    Yes, Mail Designer 365 allows you to enter a text for the inbox preview of your email design. The inbox preview enables you to see the little text preview of your email whenever you open the inbox of the Mail application on your iPhone.
    ‣ Click the "Inbox" button to open the optimization window. 

    ‣ Then, you can enter the subject line for your email, as well as the preview text that your recipient will see.
    ‣ On the right side, Mail Designer 365 will show you a preview.
    ‣ This will display how your recipient will see the inbox preview snippet in their inbox before even opening your email.


    Please refer to the following page for more information on the Inbox Optimization tool:


    Can I add tables in my Mail Designer 365 email design?
     
    Yes you can! Mail Designer 365 recently launched a brand new table editing tool to allow you to integrate tables into your email design.

    Currently, the Tables feature is only available in Mail Designer 365 Premium Business plans. To find out more about purchasing or upgrading to a Premium Business plan, visit this page.


    How to access file servers on iOS
     

    You can access files on your network file storage on your iPhone or iPad using the Files app. Here's how it works:

    • Open the Files app
    • Tap the ··· option button and choose "Connect to Server" (or hit ⌘+k on your iPad keyboard
    • Enter your file server's IP address or hostname
    • Enter your username and password when prompted

    Can't see your file shares?
    If you just see an empty directory instead of shares, you may need to add the share you're trying to access to the path.

    For example: If you are trying to access the file share work on the server 192.168.50.2, enter the server address as smb://192.168.50.2/work

    Can I import/transfer my Mail Designer Standard Templates into Mail Designer 365?
     
    Since Mail Designer Standard templates are not responsive, it's not possible to open them through Mail Designer 365 and get the same results. You can manually import Mail Designer 2 Standard templates into Mail Designer 365 by dragging a template (or several templates) out onto your desktop. Then, drag them into the Design Chooser in Mail Designer 365. Unfortunately, we cannot guarantee that your design will remain intact because they are two completely different apps.
    How do I duplicate layout blocks in Mail Designer 365?
     
    If you want to add multiple layout blocks that have similar layouts or formats, it may be easier to duplicate an existing layout block instead of choosing your font and color options once again.

    There are 3 ways you can duplicate layout blocks:



    Option 1: "Edit" > "Duplicate"


    ‣ Click the selection tab at the side of a layout block.
    ‣ Choose "Edit" > "Duplicate" from the menu bar.


    Option 2: Using the layout handle


    ‣ Click on the layout handle on the left side of the layout block. 
    ‣ Hold down the option key or the alt⌥ key on your keyboard.
    ‣ Drag the layout block that you want to duplicate.

    Now, you can drop it into position to create a copy. Afterwards, you can edit your text and choose other options accordingly.

    Option 3: Command⌘ D


    ‣ Click on the layout handle on the left side of the layout block. 
    ‣ Press Command⌘-D on your keyboard


    Please refer to the following page for a guide on how you can duplicate layout blocks:


    What happens to my original image files when I export my design as HTML?
     
    When you export an email design from Mail Designer 365 as HTML, each image area within the design is exported as a new image.

    Extra design features in Mail Designer 365, such as cropping, scaling, filters, effects, and additional graphic elements mean that images are very rarely identical to the original source image when you are ready to export your design. This also applies when compressing images and turning retina image support on and off.

    For this reason, it is necessary for Mail Designer 365 to export each image area as a new image file so your design looks the way you intend it to when you come to send.
    How can I combine different graphic elements in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Combining different shapes and graphic elements is easy with Mail Designer 365.
    ‣ First, choose a graphic element that you want to use from the "Contents" section. 

    ‣ Then, drag the element into an image area.
    ‣ Repeat these steps with other graphic elements that you want to use for the combination.
    ‣ After you have dragged in all of the graphic elements you want to combine, then start arranging them to create the look that you want.
    ‣ You can move different elements forward or backward, depending on what kind of look you want.
    ‣ Just click on the graphic element that you want to move backwards or forwards.
    ‣ Click the appropriate button found on the left side of your screen.


    Please refer to the following page for how to combine different graphic elements:


    What is the difference between a text area and an image area in Mail Designer 365?
     
    There are two kinds of areas that can be found within layout blocks in Mail Designer 365: image areas and text areas. Here are the main difference between the two types of areas:

    Image areas can contain both text and images:








    Text areas can only hold text:







    Please refer to the following pages for more information on text areas:

    Please refer to the following pages for more information on image areas:


    I can't find my stationery packs in Mail Designer 365 - can I still use them?
     
    If you've recently upgraded to Mail Designer 365 and want to continue using your previously purchased stationery items, you can do so easily via the import feature.
    To import all of your previous settings and designs from older versions of Mail Designer, simply click on "File" > "Import settings and designs." This will restore all of your preferences as well as old design ideas, and your stationery packs.

    You can find more information about importing settings in this FAQ.

    Can I add an MP3 with the Mail Designer 365 emails?
     
    With Mail Designer 365, you are not able to embed MP3 files directly within the email designs. Most email clients do not support this, which can lead to problems when your subscribers open the email. To make sure that your recipients are getting the optimal design that you created, we decided to leave out the MP3 feature.

    However, you will be able to link to your MP3 file within your email design, as long as you upload your MP3 onto a third party host. Create a CTA button or add a text link into your design. Under the "Style" section, you will be able to click "Add Link." Just type the link to your MP3.

    Why can’t I save or test my designs in the demo version?
     
    There are a couple of important things to keep in mind when testing Mail Designer 365 for the first time:
    • The Mail Designer 365 free download only allows you to view the app and open and edit email templates.
    • Without an active demo, you will be unable to save or send created templates.

    Activating your Mail Designer 365 demo

    To activate your free demo, please carry out the following steps:
    1. Start the Mail Designer 365 app on your Mac.
    2. Log in with your equinux ID and password or create an account.
    3. If you are starting the app for the first time, you will see a list of plan options. Here you can choose to activate your free trial.
    4. If you have previously logged in to the app, you can find the option to start your free trial in the top left corner under your name.

    What are "responsive newsletters"? Can I create responsive email designs with Mail Designer 365?
     
    Responsive newsletters are emails which change their layout and content depending on which device they are viewed. One newsletter opened in Mail on your Mac will look different if opened on an iPhone.

    Text blocks, for example, which are arranged side by side in the desktop version will appear one below the other when viewed on an iPhone.


    With Mail Designer 365, you can create responsive newsletters. By editing images; graphics; and text objects for the mobile version, you can optimize your template for mobile devices.

    Where are the .jpg or .png files stored on my Mac for the stock patterns, textures, textiles, images, etc. in Mail Designer 365?
     
    The files are stored internally in Mail Designer 365's structure. These files are not available to export.

    My plan expired. Can I re-subscribe with my existing options?
     
    Your plan and price are locked in as long as they keep autorenewing. But don't worry: Once a plan has lapsed, you can subscribe to one of our current plans and get all the latest features and benefits.
    How do I change the language settings of my software?
     
    You can change the language of all equinux Software products by changing the language settings of your device. For instance, on the Mac, you can do the following:
    ‣ Open "System Preferences."
    ‣ Click "Language & Region."

    ‣ Change to your preferred language by dragging your selected language to the top of the list.

    ‣ Close your software. For example, with VPN Tracker, you can do so by choosing "VPN Tracker" > "Quit VPN Tracker."

    ‣ Reopen the software.


    I already have VPN Tracker for Mac - can I also use it on iPhone / iPad?
     
    If you are have a VPN Tracker for Mac VIP or VPN Tracker for Mac Consultant license, you can add iOS support to your plan at no extra cost. Head to your my.vpntracker account and cross upgrade your subscription to an updated edition:

    The remaining value of your current plan will be credited toward your new plan.

    Alternatively, you can choose a new VPN Tracker plan that contains iOS support.
    Will my existing templates continue to work and look good in Mail Designer 365?
     
    If you are currently using an older version of Mail Designer and you are concerned about losing your work if you upgrade to Mail Designer 365, don't worry! It is super easy to import all of your previous designs from an older version of Mail Designer.

    Please carry out the following steps to access your templates:

    1. Click on "File" > "Import settings and designs."

    2. When the migration window pops up, select "Grant access" to continue.

    3. In the next window, simply select "Grant access" again to allow Mail Designer 365 access to the design files in your Library. You do not need to select a different folder.

    4. Select from the list which settings you would like to copy over to Mail Designer 365 (i.e. from which version) and then click "Import selected."

    5. Your designs and in-app preferences will then be quickly imported into Mail Designer 365 exactly as they were when you last used them.



    I bought Mail Designer 365 in the Mac App Store, but the App still tells me it is in Demo mode
     
    Occasionally purchases in the Mac App Store version of Mail Designer 365 don't get recognized properly
    Please try the following steps
    • 1. Please ensure that you are using the download version from the Mac App Store. The download version from the equinux website will not be able to recognize your license.
    • 2. In the Mail Designer 365 menu please select "Restore Purchases..."
    • 3. In case your license is still not being recognized, please delete the App and reinstall it from the Mac App Store. (Don't worry, your templates and settings won't be lost)

    Afterwards your license should be recognized.
    Where are my images hosted?
     
    The way Mail Designer 365 handles your images varies depending on how you choose to send your finished email design.

    Sending via our Testmail service:

    When you send a test email using our Testmail service, the images in your email are hosted on our secure servers.



    Sending via Delivery Hub:

    When you send your email design via Delivery Hub, Mail Designer 365 behaves the same way as all other email clients and embeds your images in the email. In this case, your image will not need to be hosted elsewhere.



    Exporting to Mailchimp, Campaign Monitor or Direct Mail

    When you use one of Mail Designer 365's direct integrations, your images will be exported together with the email design and hosted by the respective platform.

    Sending via another external service:

    The way images are handled by external services such as email service providers varies based on the provider. Some providers will host your images for you; however, many others will require you to host your images yourself.

    Mail Designer 365 has an option to enter your web server's URL during HTML export that lets you reference images that way. Learn more.


    Refer to the documentation provided by your ESP for more information on what is required.

    How can I activate renewal for my plan?
     
    To activate renewals for your account, go to your my.maildesigner365 account. On the top you will see whether your renewal is turned on or off. If you would like to change the status of your renewal, just flip the switch and you will get an email confirmation for your changed renewal state.


    Images aren't showing up on macOS 11 Big Sur
     
    Please update your version of Mail Designer 365. The latest version can be found here

    Older versions of Mail Designer 365 may not be compatible with Big Sur and can cause display errors. Don't worry, this update is included in with any Mail Designer 365 plan.
    What is restricted compatibility for HTML export?
     
    When exporting your email design as HTML, selecting the option "Restricted Compatibility" omits the second HEAD tag in the HTML export.



    Mail Designer 365 uses the second HEAD tag to improve your design's compatibility with Yahoo Mail, however some email services think this is an error and are therefore unable to process the HTML.

    For example, if you are using Constant Contact and experiencing compatibility issues, please try this option.
    The preview device I want to use is not listed in Mail Designer 365. What do I do?
     
    Mail Designer 365 allows you to create custom preview devices, so you can preview your email template on a display with certain resolutions.

    ‣ Open your email template if it is not already opened.
    ‣ From the menu bar, choose "Mail Designer 365" > "Preferences."

    ‣ A popup window will appear.
    ‣ Click on the smartphone icon, labeled "Mobile."

    ‣ Click on the "+" icon at the bottom left of the window.
    ‣ Enter the resolution you want to use.

    ‣ Give this display option a name so you can easily find it in the preview options menu


    Please refer to the following page for more information on how to create custom preview displays in Mail Designer 365:

    Do you offer a spam testing service?
     
    Currently, Mail Designer 365 does not offer any kind of spam testing service. However, if you are worried about your email being caught out by a spam filter, most ESPs do offer spam testing as part of their service.

    One fairly popular service is this one from Litmus.

    For tips on how to avoid getting caught in a spam filter, check out this blog post.
    How can I change the default placeholder text?
     
    When you insert a placeholder into your email design via the "Insert" menu, Mail Designer 365 automatically generates a default text for the link (e.g. Unsubscribe.)

    If you want to change this text - i.e. for a different language, or different phrasing, there are two ways to do so:

    1. Enter a text of your choice, e.g. "Manage your preferences", highlight this text and go to "Add Link" in the Style menu. Here you can choose "Placeholder" from the dropdown menu and enter the relevant placeholder (i.e. "unsubscribe".)
    2. Alternatively, you can insert a placeholder via the "Insert" menu and manually overwrite the default text. With this option, make sure the placeholder link is still attached to the text (you can check this by clicking on the text and going to "Link" in the sidebar.)
    How can I activate the auto save functionality for Mail Designer 365?
     
    macOS offers an auto save feature that automatically saves the last state of a document when closing the window. With this feature activated, you will not get asked if you want to save the last changes you made when you are trying to close the window.

    Your Mac allows you to activate the auto save feature directly via the System Preferences of your Mac:

    ‣ Open your Mac's System Preferences
    ‣ Open the "General" tab
    ‣ Untick the option "Ask to keep changes when closing documents"
    ‣ Afterwards, you need to restart your Mail Designer 365 app


    I only see the Desktop version of my Mail Designer 365 Newsletter. How do I activate the mobile version?
     

    To activate the mobile version of your email designs, please do the following:
    ‣ In the Menu, please select "File" > "Design options." 

    ‣ Remove the checkmark next to "Create version for mobile devices."
    ‣ Press "OK."
    ‣ Then please repeat the same steps and activate the Checkbox again.



    Once you have done this, you should be able to see the mobile modified Desktop version and you will be able to edit the layout blocks of the mobile view.

    Why are phone numbers from Mail Designer emails blue when viewed on an iPhone?
     

    iOS recognizes phone numbers and other information like addresses and dates automatically, as these information can be used in different Apps.
    You can for example tap a phone numer in order to call it or tap an address to add it to your address book.

    Because of this, these information get highlighted in emails.

    How to send us your Design file
     
    Open your design and go to "File > Export archive …" to export it.

    Then, please create a new support ticket and attach your exported design file and screenshots of the areas you are having problems with. Please also be sure to include a description of the issue you are having.

    This will allow us to take a look at your design and help you troubleshoot any issues.
    I'm having problems with my VPN Tracker connection on iPhone/iPad. How can I send a log (TSR)?
     
    To send a VPN Tracker Log (Technical Support Report, TSR) on iOS/iPadOS, please follow these steps:
    1. Tap the connection. The connection card appears.
    2. Tap on “Feedback”
    3. Provide a short description of the connection problem
    4. Tap on Send
    When you submit feedback in the iOS app, the connection log, settings and other relevant information is automatically sent to us. No login and password data will be transmitted.
    What should I be aware of when I use text in an image area?
     
    Mail Designer 365 gives you many options to be creative when it comes to building your email designs. This includes the option to use text styles in image areas to create logos, call-to-actions buttons, and more.

    While we strongly encourage you to be as creative as possible when it comes to exploring fonts and text styles for your email designs, we also recommend using a good balance of "real text" and image elements in every design.

    When an email design has a large amount of images or image elements (such as shapes, text styles, graphics etc) the risks increase when you go to send it. Firstly, emails which are largely image-based are larger and generally take longer to load. If your recipient is viewing your email on a poor internet connection, it's highly likely they will not see any of the image elements. This is obviously not ideal if the majority of your design is images, as the reader will be greeted by a blank screen.

    Secondly, the likelihood of your email getting caught in a spam filter increases with the amount of image elements you include. This is a safety precaution put in place by many email providers, as spam emails typically contain a high quantity of images.

    To summarize, we would always recommend you to use real text where possible in order to reduce the amount of images in your email design. However, if you want to use text styles in an image area, do so with caution and only where necessary. If you can create the same effect using real text, this would always be the better option to reduce risks after sending.
    Which VPN protocols does VPN Tracker for iOS support?
     
    VPN Tracker for iOS supports IPSec (including SonicWALL SCP & DHCP, EasyVPN and Mode Config), IKEv2 (Beta), OpenVPN, SSTP, SonicWALL SSL, Cisco AnyConnect SSL, Fortinet SSL and WireGuard®.

    Get VPN Tracker for iOS here.

    WireGuard® is a registered trademark from Jason A. Donenfeld.
    Which operating systems does TextScout AI work with?
     
    Mail Designer 365 TextScout AI is compatible with the latest macOS versions from macOS 10.13 High Sierra. Learn more.
    How can i import my MailChimp Contact list into Mail Designer Campaigns?
     
    Mail Designer Campaigns offers a tool that easily lets you import your contact lists from MailChimp into Mail Designer Campaigns.

    Here are the detailed instructions for how to import your MailChimp Contact list into Mail Designer Campaigns
    I want to verify my own domain for email sending with Mail Designer, but the domain is managed by someone else. How should I proceed?
     
    To certify the domain for sending, a DNS record must be added to the domain. This can only be done by the administrator of your domain within your company. Follow these steps:

    1. Find out who in your organization is responsible for managing domain entries. Keywords for such a role include: domain management / DNS management / DNS administration.
    2. Invite the administrator to your Mail Designer project by adding them as a new participant ‘Admin’ to your project team: my.maildesigner.com > Settings > Participants > Invite Participants.
    3. Contact your administrator and ask them to complete the domain verification using the information provided under my.maildesigner.com > Settings > From: Addresses.

    Once they have completed everything correctly, a checkmark will appear under ‘Domain verified’.”
    Is there a way to have my layout blocks reserve somewhere, so I can just pick the relevant ones whenever I am designing a new email in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Yes, Mail Designer 365 allows you to save your customized layout blocks!

    Please try the following:
    ‣ Make sure the "layout" is visible (Choose "View" > Show Layout") so you can see the drag handle on the layout blocks
    ‣ Then you select the "Contents" tab on the right side
    ‣ Select the "Layout blocks" section
    ‣ Click "Ready-Made"

    ‣ Select the layout blocks that you want to save
    ‣ To select multiple layout blocks, you will need to click on a layout block, hold the shift key, and then select the other layout blocks
    ‣ Drag your layout blocks into the "My Instant Blocks" section"


    Note: You have the ability to save multiple layout blocks together or to save only a single layout block.
    How to edit a link in an email after sending
     
    Mail Designer Link Rescue provides you with a convenient solution for editing links, even after your email has already been sent.

    When would I need to edit links post sending?

    • You accidentally entered the wrong link
    • You forgot to change a link because you duplicated a design
    • You want to change a link because the old URL no longer exists (e.g. a limited time offer or live stream)

    How to change a link in an email after sending

    Mail Designer 365 Delivery Hub users can use Link Rescue to easily change email newsletter links after a campaign has been delivered.

    To get started, open the Analytics view for your chosen campaign and switch to the Link Overview tab:


    Here you can select any link and edit it at any time. Once you have replaced any given link, click Save to update the change for all recipients – including those who have already opened the email!


    Your changes will be synced immediately, giving you ultimate peace of mind.

    Important:
    Mail Designer 365 Link Rescue is available to Mail Designer Campaigns users with a Seoul plan or higher. View all plan tiers here →

    How can I use the stock buttons in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Mail Designer 365 has pre-made buttons that you can use in your email designs.
    ‣ Within the "Contents" section of Mail Designer 365, you can click on the triangle icon or press Command⌘-2 to show shapes. 
    ‣ You will have many different button options under the "Buttons" subsection.

    ‣ Drag your chosen button to an image area.
    ‣ You can edit the message by double-clicking the text of the button.


    Adding a link to your button:


    ‣ Make sure to add a link to your desired landing page by double-click the button shape. 
    ‣ When you double-click the shape, the "Style" section will open on the left side.
    ‣ Click on "Edit Link & Background."

    ‣ Under the "Link" subsection, you will be able to click "Add Link" to add the link to your landing page.


    Please refer to the following page for how to add CTA buttons:

    Please refer to the following page for a brief overview of the Contents:

    Please refer to the following page for tips on how to strategically position your call-to-action buttons:


    How come Mail Designer 365 does not support HTML 5 video tags?
     
    There are numerous bugs that come with HTML 5 video tags. A large number of devices have severe issues with them. For example, in most iOS versions, iPhones and iPads will display just a black rectangle that recipients can't interact with. When you tap the area where the video is supposed to be, nothing happens. It doesn't even try to open the video in the browser or open the appropriate app. Due to these factors that are beyond our control, we decided that it is best to no longer support the HTML 5 video tags. However, you can easily add video links by dragging a video placeholder into an image area. Then, you can choose your own preview image for the video. If you are linking to a YouTube video, you can generate a preview image by clicking "Generate preview."


    Please note: Email clients are picky when it comes to the HTML they will support - things that you can safely use in almost any web-browser won't necessarily work for emails.
    Can I create an email design with just image elements?
     
    In Mail Designer 365 it is technically possible to create an all image email design, BUT we would strongly advise against it.

    Image based email designs are problematic for a number of reasons...

    Firstly, emails which are largely image-based are larger and generally take longer to load. If your recipient is viewing your email on a poor internet connection, it's highly likely they will not see any of the image elements. This is obviously not ideal if the majority of your design is images, as the reader will be greeted by a blank screen.

    Secondly, the likelihood of your email getting caught in a spam filter increases with the amount of image elements you include. This is a safety precaution put in place by many email providers, as spam emails typically contain a high quantity of images.

    Lastly, there are some people who prefer not to receive html emails, and have set up their email provider to only show them the plain text version of an email. If your email design is all image, there will be no real text to display to your recipient if they have these preferences in place.

    To summarize, we would always recommend you use a good mix of real text and images in your email designs to ensure that you will have no problems when it comes to sending. Feel free to get creative with graphic elements and images in your designs, but don't forget to insert text where possible to cover all bases. Happy designing!
    Some users are experiencing connectivity issues with their SonicWall VPN, while others can connect successfully using the same VPN configuration. This is not an authentication problem, but once the connection is established, the VPN becomes unusable.
     
    Certain SonicWall releases have known issues with DHCP IP assignment for clients, which can result in duplicate IP address assignments. To troubleshoot this, try the following:

    1. Connect to the VPN with the computer experiencing the connection problem.
    2. Note its assigned client IP address.
    3. Ping this IP address from within your LAN.
    4. Disconnect the VPN on the problematic computer. You will likely observe that the ping continues, indicating that another device is using this IP address.

    Troubleshooting Steps:

    1. Identify the computer that is using the duplicate IP address. Often, a computer within the LAN is already using an IP address that falls within the DHCP range of the SonicWall.
    2. If step 1 does not resolve the issue, restart the SonicWall.
    Can my colleague with a Windows PC also give feedback on my design?
     
    Email design features are exclusively available in the Mail Designer 365 app for Mac. However, if you have set up a Mail Designer 365 team, Windows and other non-Mac users can use Mail Designer 365 Campaigns on any device and in any browser to:
    • View, comment on and approve email design drafts
    • Receive test emails
    • Manage email contacts and audiences
    • Schedule and send email campaigns
    • Access post campaign analytics

    Get your team started today with a free Campaigns plan for up to 10 team members!

    What are Blend Modes?
     
    Blend Modes allow you to control the way image elements (e.g. images, shapes, patterns, etc.) behave when layered together.

    If you use a normal Blend Mode when placing one image element on top of another, the bottom layer will be completely covered by the top layer:



    However, there are in fact multiple ways in which you can layer image elements. You can control this by applying various Blend Modes to modify the way two layers blend with each other.

    Access Blend Modes under the "Style" menu after clicking on a design element. Here you can scroll through the different modes to find the effect which works best for your design.



    You can find more detailed information about the different Blend Modes available in Mail Designer 365 in this guide.
    Why can’t I set my mobile content to appear full width?
     
    Following send/export, all mobile responsive designs created in Mail Designer 365 will be rendered with some padding. The reason for this padding is to ensure optimal compatibility on all mobile devices and email clients.

    Oftentimes, this padding will appear more noticeable if a background color has not been set. In order to create the illusion of a full-width design, you can set the outer background to a different shade to create a subtle contrast between your email content and design background.
    Which servers is Mail Designer 365 talking to?
     
    Mail Designer 365 needs unfiltered and unmodified access to these servers to function:


    • id.equinux.com
    • my.maildesigner365.com
    • data.maildesigner365.com
    • my.featurenotes.com


    If you are using a firewall or Endpoint Security Solution, please ensure access to these servers is granted and not modified.

    Mail Designer 365 may contact additional servers for some features, for example:


    • polyfill.io
    • www.gravatar.com
    • wp.com
    • api.rudderlabs.com


    To check whether links in your document are valid, Mail Designer 365 may try to contact these servers as well.
    How to end the Mac App Store demo
     
    If you downloaded the free demo version of Mail Designer 365 from the Mac App Store, your demo is not auto-renewing and will expire automatically at the end of your 7 day term.

    Once your demo has expired, you will need to purchase a plan to continue using Mail Designer 365. See all plan options in our store.
    Can I add an “unsubscribe” text button for Campaign Monitor?
     
    Campaign Monitor supports a few placeholder links, such as “Unsubscribe Link”, ”View in Web Link” (also called “Web Version”), and “Forward Link” (also called “Forward to a Friend”). Unfortunately, Campaign Monitor does not support custom styling on these links. Mail Designer text buttons are links with custom styling, and as such cannot be used with one of the aforementioned link targets when exporting to Campaign Monitor.

    Instead of text buttons that link to one of the aforementioned targets, please insert a normal placeholder link. For example, use the menu entry “Insert > Campaign Monitor > Unsubscribe Link” to add an unsubscribe link to your document.
    What is the difference between sending emails with Mail Designer Campaigns and using "Direct Mail" in the Mail Designer App?
     
    Campaigns allow you to send newsletters to large audiences from any device, including mobile. Direct Mail is for sending emails to a few hand-picked contacts, like birthday greetings, personal offers, and transactional emails, directly from the Mail Designer app on your Mac.
    How can I add a text link in my Mail Designer 365 email design?
     
    With Mail Designer 365, you can easily add a link into any text. You can also add multiple links within a text area.
    ‣ Mark the text that you would like to turn into a link. 
    ‣ Click "Add Link" from the left sidebar.

    ‣ You can now choose what type of link you want to add:

    ‣ Then enter your URL in the Link destination dialog box:

    Note: You can change the color and text options of your link using the regular font options.
    Is there a subscription model for Mail Designer?
     

    Yes there is! Mail Designer 365 is our brand new and updated version of Mail Designer - only available on an annual subscription basis. Subscribers have access to our best new features and benefit from regular updates.


    Most importantly, Mail Designer 365 will always be optimized for the latest mac OS version, so as long as you are subscribed, you will never have to worry about paying for an upgrade again!



    Visit our website today to purchase Mail Designer 365.



    Is there a free trial for Mail Designer 365?
     
    Yes, absolutely! We offer a free seven-day demo for Mail Designer 365 where you can explore the benefits of the software for yourself. In the seven-day trial version you can create and save your own designs and campaigns and also send test emails to yourself.

    Please bear in mind that the full subscription version of Mail Designer 365 is required to export your designs as HTML.

    You can download the free trial version here.
    Can I create newsletters with Mail Designer 365 on my iPhone?
     
    Currently, Mail Designer 365 is only available for Mac (macOS) computers.
    Why am I experiencing formatting issues when I copy in text from another program?
     
    Copying in pre-formatted text to your email design from another program such as Microsoft Word or Apple Pages can sometimes lead to difficulties in Mail Designer 365 - particularly if you don't have text styles set up. This is often due to how other programs copy text to the clipboard and can result in unwanted line breaks or other formatting issues.


    For best results, typing your email copy directly into the text layout blocks in Mail Designer 365 is most effective. Where this is not possible and you need to copy in text from elsewhere, we would recommend first copying and pasting your text into a plain text editor (such as TextEdit on the Mac) to strip any formatting before entering it into Mail Designer 365.


    If you have text styles set up already, you can use the "Paste and Match Style" option and you won't need to reformat anything.
    What are the different sending options in Mail Designer 365?
     

    Mail Designer 365 offers multiple options for sending your email designs to your audience.

    Testmail

    Mail Designer 365's Testmail service is designed for sending internal test emails to yourself or to your team – i.e. to preview how your finished email design will look in the inbox.

    Test emails will be sent from the Mail Designer 365 Testmail service via our secure servers.

    Sending external emails

    You also have the option to send your email design to external email addresses (i.e. contacts who are not part of your Mail Designer 365 team) via Delivery Hub. These emails will be sent from your own email address.

    Choose between an email campaign: Send to a list of contacts or an individual mailing: Send to individual email contacts.

    Check out this guide for more information on sending email campaigns via Delivery Hub.

    How can I export my Mail Designer 365 email design as a webpage or an HTML file?
     
    Mail Designer 365 allows you to export your email templates as HTML files containing your design. You can reuse your design with other services or publish a copy as a webpage.
    ‣ Open your design
    ‣ Choose “Share" > "Website /HTML...” from the menu bar.

    ‣ Choose a location to save your design.
    ‣ Optional: Enter a custom name for the exported .HTML file
    ‣ Optional: If you plan on uploading your images to a separate web server, you can enter an absolute URL prefix for the images.

    Please refer to the following page for more information on how to export your email design as a webpage:


    I need help with choosing a font for my Mail Designer 365 email design. Do you have any suggestions for fonts?
     
    We have multiple favorites that we are sure will keep your email newsletters in style. Raleway, Work Sans, and Montserrat are just a few of the font styles you can try in your next email design.

    Check out our video tutorial for more font inspiration:





    Also, please refer to the following page for a step-by-step guide on how to download more fonts in Mail Designer 365:



    Can I create newsletters with Mail Designer 365 on my iPad Pro?
     
    No. Currently, Mail Designer 365 is only available for Mac (macOS) computers.
    How can I purchase additional stamps?
     
    Additional stamps can be purchased at any time, either through a Mail Designer Campaigns plan, which provides new stamps monthly, or through a one-time purchase of stamps:
    Monthly Stamps Plan
    One-Time Stamp Purchase
    How do I create transparent effects with Mail Designer 365?
     
    Mail Designer 365 lets you add backgrounds to several areas within your email template. When you have added a main background picture but want to have transparent backgrounds within your text blocks, then you must delete the background of different areas within the text block.
    ‣ Make sure to click on the padding area of a text block.

    ‣ Click "Delete Background" on the right side.

    ‣ Afterwards, click on the outer area of the same text block.
    ‣ Then, click "Delete Background."

    ‣ Your text block should now have a transparent effect.


    Please refer to the following page for more information on how to create transparent effects:
    How do I redirect with Apple Mail?
     
    To use the redirect function in Apple Mail, try the following:

    ‣ Choose "Message" > "Redirect"

    ‣ Type the recipient's email address
    ‣ Click the "Send" button


    For more information, please read Apple's support page here.

    Note: We always recommend that you use the "redirect" feature rather than to forward your Mail Designer 365 email design.
    I'm getting an error message uploading to Mailchimp
     
    Mailchimp no longer supports the old APIs used by previous Mail Designer versions.

    Please update to Mail Designer 365 1.7 or later to use the latest Mailchimp 3.0 API.

    Mail Designer 365 1.7 is included with all Mail Designer 365 plans, owners of previous Mail Designer versions can purchase an upgrade plan.
    Does third party security software affect Mail Designer 365? How can I fix this?
     
    Mail Designer 365 uses a lot of web technology under the hood which could be picked up by your security software. Some security software, for example such as Avast, may therefore come into conflict with Mail Designer 365 - potentially causing the app to stop responding.

    To fix this, you could try white-listing Mail Designer 365 from the security software or exempting it from the checks. Otherwise, we recommend you get in touch with your security software's support team to find a possible solution.
    I can't see all of my connections when I sign in to VPN Tracker on iOS
     
    VPN Tracker syncs VPN connections between your Mac and iOS devices - provided they are saved in Personal Safe or TeamCloud. This means existing connections will automatically appear when you sign in to VPN Tracker on your iPhone or iPad.

    Important note: VPN connections using PPTP or L2TP will not appear on iPhone or iPad as they are currently not supported on iOS.

    Tip: Not sure which protocol your connection uses? Check the black protocol badge displayed in VPN Tracker 365 on your Mac.



    Accessing connections on iOS


    When you sign in to VPN Tracker for iOS with your equinux ID and password, your Personal Safe and TeamCloud connections will show up in the app.

    Use the filter in the top left corner of the app to only see TeamCloud connections from your team or personal connections from Personal Safe.



    Important: If you have connections which you have only saved locally on your Mac, these will not be available on your other devices. To get those connections onto your iPhone or iPad, right click the connection and choose "Add to Personal Safe" or "Share with TeamCloud".



    Those connections will show up on your iPhone or iPad.


    Mail Designer 365 startup takes a long time
     
    Mail Designer 365 usually starts within a few seconds. If the startup process takes longer, please check whether you have installed a virus scanner or other endpoint security software (e.g. from Sophos).

    This software can severely affect the startup process. If possible, please add an exception for Mail Designer 365 or the following directory:

    ~/Library/Group Containers/C3HCD5RMD7.net.tower-one.MailDesigner/Documents

    The tilde (~) represents your home directory. This exception is only necessary for read operations; write operations can still be monitored.
    Is it possible to there a way to customize Newsletter text for the phone that does not affect the text for the computer screen?
     
    Sometimes text you add for the desktop version of your newsletter will be too large or too small for your mobile version. In Mail Designer 365 it's easy to modify the text size for the mobile version of your newsletter to make it just the right size.

    In our Mail Designer 365 Manual we have detailed instructions on how to modify the text size for the mobile version of your newsletter.
    My newsletter looks wrong in Windows 10 Mail. What can I do?
     
    HTML/CSS newsletters cannot differentiate between Windows 10 Mail and Outlook, even though Windows 10 Mail and Outlook have different behavior and render the same content differently.

    This means that it's only possible to have a newsletter render correctly in either Windows 10 Mail or Outlook 2013, not both. Due to Outlook 2013 being in more widespread use, we decided to provide correct rendering in Outlook 2013.
    What videos can I use in video placeholders in my Mail Designer 365?
     
    With Mail Designer 365, you can choose from a variety of different video placeholders.
    This allows you to link to online videos directly within your email design. Please note that Mail Designer 365 does not support embedding videos directly within your email designs.


    After you have added a video placeholder from the Contents panel, copy the link to the video into the link field.


    Mail Designer 365 allows you to use links from Youtube and Vimeo. In addition, you can upload your own MP4 files to your server or Dropbox account and copy the public link to this file into the video placeholder.

    If you are using your own MP4 files, the video will be played directly in the email application. However, this is only true if this functionality is supported by the email client. Videos will not be played directly in the email. Instead, your subscribers will be led to the online video.

    Please note that video clips you want to use in video placeholders must be uploaded to a third-party hosting website like YouTube or Vimeo. Video files that are only available on your Mac cannot be used in your email design.
    How do I sign up for MailChimp?
     
    You can sign up for a MailChimp account here.

    Please refer to the following page for a step-by-step guide on how to sign up for MailChimp:


    Is it possible to send emails that are created in Mail Designer 365 via Outlook?
     
    Yes, but not directly. You will need to add a mail account in Mail Designer 365 using your own server. It is not possible to do an HTML export and then send via Outlook because Outlook does not support this.

    This guide shows you how to configure your own email address to send directly from Mail Designer 365.
    Can I use Mail Designer to convert a Photoshop image into an HTML email?
     
    There are exisiting tools on the market which claim to be able to convert Photoshop designs into HTML emails but the end result is essentially just an email made up entirely of images.

    In general, we recommend that customers avoid creating all-image designs, as this has a negative impact on the deliverability and loading speed of your email, as well as affecting your compatibility with various email clients. For example, some email clients do not automatically display images within emails and, if this is the case, your email will appear to readers as a blank page.

    In order to get your design noticed by your recipients, we strongly recommend that you use real text and images in your emails, as these types of designs will load quicker and also look good in all email clients. Use your Photoshop design as a reference and re-create it using Mail Designer 365's built-in layout blocks and design features.
    How can I cancel my Mail Designer plan?
     

    You can easily turn off the automatic renewal for your Mail Designer 365 plan in your my.maildesigner365 account.

    1. Log in to your account.
    2. Go to “Purchases & Plans” under Settings.
    3. Disable the automatic renewal for your plan.

    Important:
    By turning off automatic renewal, you may lose any existing price advantages.
    Once your current plan expires, it can’t be reactivated — however, you can purchase a new plan at the then-current price at any time.

    How do I add an app into my Applications folder?
     
    ‣ Download the app.
    ‣ Go to your downloads folder and find the app.
    ‣ Drag the app that you downloaded and drop it into the Applications folder.


    Why can't Mail Designer 365 open Mail Designer Standard documents and get the same results?
     
    Mail Designer 365 has been developed especially for creating responisve newsletters
    Templates, which has been created with Mail Designer standard are perfect for custom layouts such as synopses and templates with your CI. Because of this, it is not possible to open Mail Designer standard documents in Mail Designer 365 and get the same results.

    Since Mail Designer Standard templates are not responsive, it's not possible to open them through Mail Designer 365 and get the same results. You can manually import Mail Designer 2 templates into Mail Designer 365 by dragging a template (or several templates) out onto your desktop. Then, drag them into the Design Chooser in Mail Designer 365. Unfortunately, we cannot guarantee that your design will remain intact.
    Is Mail Designer 365 a paid upgrade?
     
    Yes, Mail Designer 365 is a paid upgrade for everyone who is upgrading from Mail Designer 1, Mail Designer 2, or Mail Designer Pro. After you have purchased a Mail Designer 365 plan, all updates are covered without additional cost for the duration of your Mail Designer 365 plan.

    Mail Designer Standard and Mail Designer Pro users can find out more about what's new in Mail Designer 365 on this page.

    Step-by-step: How do I store DKIM, SPF and DMARC information on my domain so that my emails reach the recipient and are not marked as spam.
     

    To send your first email campaign, you first need to set up your email address and domain, so it's ok for Mail Designer 365 Delivery Hub to send emails on your behalf.

    There are a few technical steps involved during setup. These steps are crucial, as leading email service providers will check that DKIM, SPF and DMARC authentication are configured in order to prevent spam.

    Rest assured we've done all we can to make the setup process as simple and fuss free as possible for you. We recommend that you add all three methods to your domain so that your emails reach all recipients. If you require assistance at any point, reach out to your IT admin or get in touch with our support team.

    Ready? Let's get started!

    Step 1: Add and Verify your Email Address

    Before you start, make sure that you have already set up a Mail Designer team. (If you have not done so already, check out our easy team setup guide).

    • Go to Settings > "From: addresses"
    • Under "From: addresses for Campaigns", add a new sender by entering the "From Name" and email address your campaign will be sent from


    • You'll now receive a verification email. Click the link to confirm you own the email address:




    Step 2: To avoid to get marked as spam: Set up DKIM

    For this you'll need to create a DNS entry for DKIM (DomainKeys Identified Mail) (more details about DKIM and why it's essential. You should definitely set up DKIM if you want to avoid your mailings ending up in the spam folder.

    • Stay in "From: addresses" and scroll down to "Domain verification". You will now see the domain for the email address you just set up
    • Now it's time to determine the DNS provider for your domain. Most likely, our system has already identified the provider and displayed it as a "Potential Provider," along with a link to the provider's guide. Tip: We've also compiled a list of links to setup guides for common providers in this article.
    • Click on the "DKIM" icon in the "Domain verified" column:


    • A DKIM record will be generated for your domain, along with the necessary type, name, and value of the record. Please use the exact information shown to set up the DNS record (including any special characters such as " or . ).


    • Depending on your DNS provider, it may take up to 48 hours for the changes to propagate. Delivery Hub will periodically perform automatic checks. Alternatively, click the refresh icon to update results in real time:


    • Once you've completed the setup, and the verification is successful, you'll see a green checkmark next to the DKIM icon:


    Step 3: To avoid to get marked as spam: Set up SPF

    Now, let's ensure your emails are properly authenticated with SPF (Sender Policy Framework), which prevents email spoofing (more details on SPF).

    • Go back to your domain under "Domain Verification" and click "SPF":


    • Next, go to your DNS provider and create an SPF record for your domain. The exact steps vary depending on your provider, so follow their guidelines.
    • Note: If you or your company have already created an SPF record, our system will try to include the required part and display the full record value respecting your previous content. If you feel confident and know what you are doing, you can also manually edit your existing record and add the following part: include: spf.welovemails.com.
    • Once the verification has successfully completed, you'll see a green checkmark next to the SPF icon:


    Step 4: Set up DMARC

    Although not mandatory, setting up DMARC (Domain-based Message Authentication, Reporting, and Conformance) is recommended to add an extra layer of security to your emails (more details on DMARC).

    • Click on the "DMARC" icon under "Domain Verification":


    • Then, create a DMARC DNS record for your domain
    • Feel free to use the suggested record, or your own values. If you're unsure, check your organization's policies or ask your IT team
    • Just like with SPF and DKIM, once the DMARC verification has successfully completed, you'll see a green checkmark next to the DMARC icon:


    Congratulations! You've now set up and verified your from address and can start sending email campaigns to your audience.

    Why are some links in my design not showing up after export?
     
    Every area of text in your Mail Designer 365 email design should have a dedicated text style applied. This ensures your text will be formatted correctly after you have exported your template.

    If you add a text link to your email without also applying a text style, this could result in the link not being applied correctly after export.

    If your links are not displaying correctly following export to Mailchimp or another service, please open your design in Mail Designer 365, check every text area has a text style applied, then re-export your design.

    You can find out more about text styles in the Mail Designer 365 Manual.
    Can email provider domains be verified?
     
    No, we are unable to verify domains from public email providers such as Gmail or Yahoo, as these domains are not unique to individual users or organizations. For verification purposes, we recommend using a custom domain associated with a specific organization or business.
    Is it advisable to use SendX as a newsletter service in conjunction with Mail Designer 365?
     
    No. We have found that SendX struggles with some HTML implementations, even with official HTML standards. Therefore, it is better to choose a delivery service that supports all common HTML standards. For example, you can use the integrated mailing service of Mail Designer 365.
    I added MailChimp placeholders into my Mail Designer 365 email design. Can I preview them in MailChimp before sending?
     
    You can use MailChimp placeholders in your Mail Designer 365 email designs. For example, you can use placeholders in order to personalize your mailings with the first or last name of the recipient. You can also preview the final result via the MailChimp website.

    To do so...
    ‣ Please go to the MailChimp website and log in. When you are ready, upload your design to MailChimp by creating a new campaign.
    ‣ Select the email design you just uploaded and click "Preview and Test."
    ‣ Next, click "Enter preview mode."
    ‣ Click the button for "Enable live merge tag info". You will now see your information for the placeholder you have entered.

    Do you offer monthly Mail Designer 365 plans?
     
    We currently only offer Mail Designer 365 as an annual plan. You can purchase a plan here.
    How can I insert a MailChimp or Campaign Monitor placeholder in my Mail Designer 365 email design?
     
    Placeholders can be used to insert subscriber details or unsubscribe link into your newsletter automatically when you send it via MailChimp or Campaign Monitor.

    To use a placeholder, please try the following:
    ‣ Select a text area
    ‣ Please choose "Insert" > "MailChimp" or "Campaign Monitor"
    ‣ Choose a placeholder



    Note: A placeholder cannot be used on text within an image area, you'll need to place your cursor in a text area to use placeholders.
    After sending out an email campaign, the text is sometimes displayed wrong in certain email clients such as gmail. How can I fix this?
     
    Not all email clients have all fonts that we offer in Mail Designer available for the display of your newsletter. In order to prevent your design from getting broken on various email clients, you have the option to define fallback fonts that will be used in case the actual font you chose for your newsletter is not available. You can choose several fallback fonts to ensure that the style as close as possible.

    In our Mail Designer 365 Manual we have detailed instructions on how to set up a fallback font for your newsletter.

    Can I use Mail Designer 365 to make a section where customers can submit their information or feedback and send it back to me after I sent the email?
     
    Currently, Mail Designer 365 does not directly support forms embedded within your email design. To make sure that your recipients are getting the optimal design that you created, we decided to leave out the HTML forms feature. Most email clients do not support HTML forms, which is why Mail Designer 365 was designed to not support HTML forms. If you were to add forms in your email design, there is no way that we could make sure that your recipients will get a functional survey that you created, since we have no control how email clients read and interpret your newsletter.

    However, if you needed to add a form to get feedback from your recipients, then we suggest linking to an outside form maker like Google forms. You can use an image or a specific text and add a link to your form.
    How can website visitors sign up to my email list?
     
    Want to offer your customers an easy way to subscribe to your email newsletters?

    Mail Designer Delivery Hub can be conveniently connected to your website, offering your website visitors a direct way to sign up to your email list. Here's how it works!

    Create a signup form


    The signup form builder in Delivery Hub is easy to use and a great way to grow your email list.

    Good to know: Signup forms are available in all Mail Designer 365 Campaigns plans. The number of forms you can create depends on your plan tier.

    Setting up your form


    To get started, go to https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/contacts/signupForms to set up your new signup form.

    You can begin by giving your form a name, e.g. Website Signups. This helps you identify where the contacts came from and is not visible to customers.

    Additionally, you can add a catchy title which will be visible on your site.



    Form fields


    The next step is setting up the fields of your form. This is an important step, as it determines how contacts will be categorized later in Delivery Hub.

    First and last name
    You have the option to allow subscribers to enter a first and last name into your form. This can be helpful if you wish to send personalized emails, but also adds an extra step to the signup process.



    Automatic placeholders
    These placeholders will be automatically assigned to new contacts who sign up via this form. Subscribers will not be able to see the placeholder name when they sign up.

    Choose an existing placeholder from the list or enter a new one, for example "Origin", then click "Create new placeholder...":



    Following this, enter a placeholder value. For example, "Website", then click "Click to create new value...":



    New signups via this form will now be automatically assigned this placeholder, meaning you can see how many contacts came via your website and even create tailored content for them.

    Customer placeholders
    In many cases, it's helpful for customers to self assign placeholders to help show you what type of content they are interested in.

    Let's say you are a clothing store and regularly create newsletters with news and offers on women's, children's and men's fashion. You can include these as options in your signup form to let your subscribers determine which newsletters they want to receive.

    This is a great way to make sure your email content stays relevant and reduces the risk of contacts unsubscribing later.

    Again, you can choose an existing placeholder from your list, or enter a new one as described in the previous step. Here, we are using the placeholder "Newsletter Type" with the values "Women", "Children", and "Men". These will be the options your website visitors can choose from.



    As soon as you've specified these placeholders, you can also customize how they are displayed to users.

    Check the box "Show placeholder label" to enter a text which best describes the choices shown to users – e.g. "I'm interested in offers for"



    You can now choose a display type. In most cases, "Checkbox" makes sense, i.e. if you want to offer multi selection. However, if users should only choose one option (e.g. location) or can input their own values (e.g. birthday), you can select the appropriate option from the dropdown menu.



    Finally, you can enter a custom button text for your signup form in the field provided:



    Double Opt-In


    A double opt-in email is essential for all new sign ups, as it helps ensure your newly obtained email addresses are genuine – a good measure for preventing email bounces later on. Therefore we recommend keeping this option active.

    The Delivery Hub signup form generator allows you to customize your double opt-in emails. Fill out the fields for email subject line, body text, and button.

    In this section, you can also specify a custom landing page (e.g. a thank you page) for new subscribers.



    Layout & Preview


    In the final setup step, you can choose between different layout options for your signup form. For example, light or dark design.

    To preview a design option, select your design settings, then click the refresh icon to see the latest version of your form. This also includes a preview of all the form fields selected in the previous step:



    Once you're happy with the design, remember to save the form by clicking "Save Form":



    Adding a signup form to your website


    Adding your finished form to your website is super easy, thanks to Delivery Hub's code generator.

    1. Click on "Generate code" to create the code needed for your form
    2. Click "Copy code" to copy the form code to your clipboard




    You can then paste this code into the desired area of your website and start collecting new subscribers!

    Your next step - creating an audience


    If you have not done so already, now is a good time to set up your email list(s). We call these audiences.

    You can base your audiences on certain criteria, known as placeholders i.e. the placeholders you specified in your signup form. For example, our clothing store needs at least three audiences for their newsletters: for women's, children's, and men's fashion.

    Audiences can be created at: https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/contacts/targetgroups

    Creating a new audience


    We will start off with the newsletter for women's fashion. Create a new audience and give it a name (i.e. "Women".)

    Now, select the placeholder (i.e. “Newsletter Type”) that you created during form setup.

    Next, select the corresponding value (e.g. "Women"):



    Now all contacts with the placeholder value "Newsletter Type = Women" will be displayed below. Click to save your new audience.

    Create additional audiences


    These steps can also be carried out for the “Men” and “Children” lists by selecting the appropriate placeholder values, providing you with dynamic audiences for each newsletter type.

    Whenever a subscriber signs up via your website form, they will be automatically added to the respective audience(s) based on the categories they select.

    If you want to create one audience with all your website signups, follow the steps above using the placeholder and value that you specified during form setup, i.e. "Source" and "Website". All new subscribers will be automatically added to this list – even if they don't select one of your optional fields.
    What should I do before I try a beta version of Mail Designer 365?
     
    Since Beta versions are meant to test features and compatibility, Mail Designer 365 will remind you to have a backup of your app and designs.
    I want to send specific campaigns to different email lists. How can I do this?
     
    Scenario: Suppose we run a jeans shop that offers three different fashion newsletters: one for women, one for men and one for children's fashion. The shop already has lists of email addresses for the respective groups.

    What is the best way to import these email lists into Mail Designer Campaigns in order to send newsletters to them?

    1. Add new email contacts

    Add contacts in Mail Designer Campaigns:
    https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/contacts/add

    Email addresses can be added via copy and paste or via CSV file.

    Add contacts via copy and paste

    Insert your email addresses into the field separated by a comma or return. To start with, we are only using the newsletter addresses for the “Women” newsletter.



    Then select below:
    "Add placeholder"



    Now you can assign a placeholder name.
    What are placeholders? Placeholders are used so that we can later filter contacts according to their characteristics - for example, if we want to identify all contacts who are interested in women's fashion. Placeholders can be understood like columns in an Excel table.

    In this example, we will call the placeholder “Newsletter Type”. The new placeholder is then created by clicking on “New placeholder: + Newsletter Type”.



    We can now assign a placeholder value: “Women”:



    Finally, click on “+ Add Contacts” to import all contacts and assign them the placeholder value “Women”. This way, we can later see that these contacts are interested in women's fashion.

    Add more contacts

    We can now repeat the entire process for the “Men” and “Children” newsletters. Use the “Newsletter Type” placeholder we created in the previous step, but this time use the placeholder values “Men” and “Children”.

    Important information:

    • If an email address already exists in your saved contacts, it will not be re-imported, but the placeholder and its value will still be added. This means you can safely add email addresses again and again without ending up with duplicates in your list.
    • A placeholder can have multiple placeholder values.
      Example: Grace Müller with the email address mueller@example.com is interested in both women's and children's fashion and therefore appears on both lists. If you import the contact once with the placeholder "Newsletter Type" and the value "Women" and then again with the placeholder "Newsletter Type" and the value "Children", both placeholder values will appear in your search results:


    We have now finished importing our contacts and can proceed to create target groups in the next step.

    2. Create target groups


    Once you've added contacts and assigned placeholders to them, you can create your first audiences. These are the email lists (or target groups) your newsletters will later be sent to.

    Audiences can be created at: https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/contacts/targetgroups

    Creating a new audience


    We will start off with the newsletter for women's fashion. Create a new audience and give it a name (i.e. "Women".)

    Now, select the placeholder (i.e. “Newsletter Type”) that you created during the contact import from the menu.

    Next, select the corresponding value (e.g. "Women"):



    Now all contacts with the placeholder value "Newsletter Type = Women" will be displayed below. Click to save your new audience.

    Create additional audiences


    These steps can also be carried out for the “Men” and “Children” lists by selecting the appropriate placeholder values.

    Good to know:


    • Mail Designer audiences are dynamic. This means that if you add new contacts later on, they will automatically be added to the appropriate audience, provided the same placeholder value was assigned during import.


    3. Sending newsletters


    We refer to each sent newsletter as an individual campaign. This means that there is one campaign per target group.

    Have you created your email template for the women's fashion campaign on your Mac in Mail Designer 365? Excellent! Click Start Campaign to get started.



    Plan a campaign


    When you prepare a new campaign, the subject line and sender address fields are automatically filled out for you. Assuming you don't want to change anything here, you can immediately go to "Who?" and select your audience.

    Here you can choose the audience (i.e. “women”) that we created in the last step:



    Choose a time for delivery or click on "Now" to send the email right away. Afterwards, you can check over your email one last time by selecting "Queue this email for delivery".



    You are now ready to send!

    Ready for the next one? Repeat these steps for any additional newsletters and their respective email lists.
    I have scheduled a Newsletter Campaign and I need to change the design, what do I do?
     
    When you schedule a Newsletter campaign, it always gets sent with the exact version of the design you created it with. If you make changes to your design after creating your campaign, you will need to open the scheduled campaign and save it again for your changes to take effect.

    Detailed instructions for changing the design on a scheduled campaign:
    1. Open up your template in Mail Designer 365 and make the changes in your design
    2. Go to Delivery Hub and open your scheduled campaign
    3. The new version of your template will be picked automatically.
    4. Press Save to save your campaign with the new design
    5. Repeat for other scheduled campaigns using the same design


    Please remember, changing a template is only possible while a campaign is in the Scheduled State. If it has already been sent, the design cannot be changed.

    Mail Designer Campaigns does offer a link change service in case you accidentally used the wrong link in your design: How to edit a link in an email after sending
    Why do my emails go to spam if I only use image areas or too many images, and how can I improve this?
     

    Emails that contain only images are often flagged as spam because spam filters rely on text to evaluate the content's legitimacy. Without text, the filters may assume the email is hiding suspicious or harmful content, a tactic commonly used by spammers. Additionally, image-only emails can load slowly, frustrating recipients and increasing the likelihood that they will mark your email as spam.

    To improve your email's chances of landing in the inbox, follow these best practices:

    1. Avoid image-only layout blocks: Instead of using layout blocks that consist only of images, opt for blocks that combine text and images. This ensures your text gets displayed as actual text, not as part of a large image, which helps filters and recipients better understand your content.
    2. Include relevant text: Clearly explain the purpose of the email using text. This gives spam filters context to analyze and helps your audience engage with your message.
    3. Use alt text for images: Add descriptive alt text to each image. This ensures that even if the images don’t load, recipients (and spam filters) can still understand the email’s content.
    4. Maintain a good text-to-image ratio: A balanced approach, where there’s more text than images, can reduce the chances of your email being flagged as spam. The text gives spam filters more material to evaluate.
    5. Use a combination of image and text blocks: Combining both elements not only enhances readability and engagement but also prevents spam filters from interpreting your email as an attempt to hide important information in images.
    6. Use a reputable email service provider like Mail Designer 365 Campaigns: Many email service providers such as Mail Designer 365 Campaigns help optimize email structure and offer authentication protocols like SPF, DKIM, and DMARC to enhance deliverability.

    By following these guidelines and ensuring your email contains a mix of well-placed text and images, you can improve its deliverability and reduce the risk of it being sent to the spam folder.

    Can I adjust the opacity of my photos with Mail Designer 365?
     
    Yes, you can easily adjust the opacity of any photo in your newsletter.

    ‣ Select the photo that you want to turn semi-transparent
    ‣ This will prompt Mail Designer 365 to open the "Style" section on the right side
    ‣ At the bottom, you will find the "Opacity" section
    ‣ Adjust the opacity slider to adjust the opacity of the photo you selected

    I switched off the “Auto-Renewal” option for my plan. Why do I now see a different price after expiration?
     
    Plans that are set to auto-renew may keep pricing benefits ("grandfathered pricing").

    By deactivating the auto-renewal option, you will automatically lose any of your existing price benefits (i.e. promotions or introductory offers.) This action cannot be reversed. Should you then wish to renew your plan at a later point, you will be billed at the regular plan price.

    Please be aware that your plan will also end if your payment method cannot be charged at the time of renewal (i.e. expired, lost or stolen). If you need to update your payment method, you can do so at any time in your my.maildesigner365 or my.vpntracker account.
    Can I see how my email campaign performed?
     
    So you've sent out your email campaign and now want to see how well it has performed – no problem! Mail Designer Delivery Hub offers you a detailed performance report for all your sent campaigns.

    How it works

    You can access performance reports for any given campaign under https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/campaigns/finished.

    Find your chosen campaign and click the statistic icon to open its performance report:



    During the delivery
    As soon as an email campaign is sent, you can use Delivery Hub's live reporting tools to track the progress of your newsletter in real time. This includes email deliveries, bounces, and opens.

    The numbers in the overview will be updated live as your email is delivered to your target group.

    After the delivery
    Once delivery has completed, you can view an overview of all campaign statistics.



    Tip: For best results, we recommend carrying out your final analysis from 24 hours after delivery. This helps ensure all recipients have had time to read and interact with your campaign.

    Interpreting email metrics

    The performance report covers a wide range of analytics data which aim to help you better understand how your campaign did and what you can improve on next time.

    Here is a breakdown of the most important email metrics, what they represent and some current industry benchmarks:
    • Open Rate: The number of times your email was opened compared to the amount of successful deliveries. The benchmark for this can vary depending on industry but anything above 25% can be considered a good result
    • Click-Through Rate: The number of email link clicks compared to the number of successful deliveries. This value is often quite low, with an average of around 2-3% across all industries
    • Click-To-Open Rate: The number of email link clicks compared to the number of email opens. This helps you understand how your email content resonated with readers. A good benchmark to aim for here is 10%
    • Bounce Rate: The percentage of emails which were not successfully delivered to the recipient – e.g. because the email address is incorrect or inactive. Here, the lower the number, the better. Anything above 3-5% should be cause for concern.
    • Unsubscribe Rate: The percentage of recipients who unsubscribed from your email list after receiving this email. Again, you want this number to be as low as possible – ideally 0! However, anything under 0.5% can be considered a good result.
      Tip: If you are noticing higher unsubscribe rates, you should take a look at the type of content you are sending, the frequency of your emails, and also consider segmenting your audience appropriately

    Other useful statistics
    These metrics are also worth a mention and shouldn't be overlooked in your email analysis:
    • Complained Rate: This calculates the number of recipients who marked your email as spam. This is never a good sign and if you notice your emails being marked as spam, check out this post for our tips →
    • Rejected Rate: This calculates the number of times your email was rejected by an email provider (e.g. Gmail, Outlook, Yahoo, etc.) and can indicator for a more serious issue. If your emails are being rejected, please ensure you are sending from a verified email domain. More information →
    How can I uninstall Mail Designer?
     
    If you wish to uninstall Mail Designer from your Mac, you can start by removing any associated files.

    To get started, go to Finder. In the menu bar, choose "Go" > "Go to Folder ..."



    Enter this path into the search box:
    ~/Library/Containers/net.tower-one.MailDesigner
    to locate and then delete.

    Following this, enter this path into the search box:
    ~/Library/Group Containers
    and delete the Mail Designer folder.

    Finally, to uninstall Mail Designer from your Mac, go to the Applications folder (or wherever you stored the app) and move it to the trash.

    This will completely remove the app and all files from your Mac. To also remove its settings, open Terminal.app (from Applications > Utilities) and enter the following command:

    defaults delete net.tower-one.MailDesigner

    When I copy & paste my images from Apple Pages, Mail Designer always tells me that they are low resolution.
     
    Mail Designer is warning you that the images are low resolution because Apple Pages does not copy its images in retina quality.

    To work around this, we recommend the following:
    ‣ In Apple Pages, double the size of your graphic. For example, if you had a shape that has the dimensions 100x100, please increase that to 200x200.
    ‣ Copy and paste it into an image area in Mail Designer.
    ‣ Then, select the image.
    ‣ Right-click (or Ctrl+click) on the image.
    ‣ Choose "Original Size (Retina)" from the drop-down menu. This automatically shrinks the image but becomes retina quality.




    How can I check my Mail Designer 365 email template for any issues?
     
    Mail Designer 365 has a handy checking button that you can find on the top left.



    While you are designing and creating your newsletter, Mail Designer 365 continuously scans your email template for any issues as they occur. You will notice a number appear on the checking button in cases when Mail Designer 365 has found issues or potential errors in your email design.



    You can also click on the checking button whenever you want to check for design issues.

    Please refer to the following page for more information on the Checking feature in Mail Designer 365:


    Which software could be responsible for Mail Designer 365 not working properly on my system?
     

    Some kinds of software may cause issues with Mail Designer 365:

    1. Personal Firewalls
    2. Protection Software (e.g Virus Scanners, Malware Protection)

    Personal Firewalls usually ask the user, if an app should be allowed to send network traffic. It’s important to grant Mail Designer full network access. If you have already added rules for Mail Desinger, please whitelist Mail Designer.

    Protection Software often sees authentication traffic as a potential source of threat, as it isn’t able to analyze that traffic because of its very strong encryption. Please ensure Mail Designer is ignored by any protection software running on your Mac and allow this traffic to pass through.

    Here are some common examples of the types of apps mentioned above. If you are uncertain whether any of these applications may be installed on your system, try the following:

    • Open the app “Terminal”
    • Copy and paste the following command: kextstat | grep -v com.apple

    You’ll get a list of all kernel extensions that are not from Apple. Just compare that list with the identifiers in parenthesis below:

    • Little Snitch
      (at.obdev.nke.LittleSnitch)
       
    • Sophos Anti Virus
      (com.sophos.kext.oas, com.sophos.nke.swi)
       
    • Symantec Endpoint Protection / Norton AntiVirus
      (com.symantec.kext.SymAPComm, com.symantec.kext.internetSecurity, com.symantec.kext.ips, com.symantec.kext.ndcengine, com.symantec.SymXIPS)
       
    Why am I seeing Mailchimp campaigns with strange names like MailDesigner365-Temporary-188997-574102002.966161?
     
    During the export to Mailchimp, Mail Designer needs to create a temporary campaign which usually is deleted after the upload. However, in rare cases, it's possible that something went wrong and these temporary campaigns are left over. You can safely delete them without it impacting your actual campaign. They start with MailDesigner365-Temporary-.
    Can I import my Campaign Monitor lists to use with Mail Designer 365 Campaigns?
     
    Making the switch from Campaign Monitor to Mail Designer 365 Campaigns? Mail Designer 365 combines flawless HTML email design with easy to use sending tools and tailor-made audiences based on smart and adaptive placeholders.

    Mail Designer 365 Delivery Hub makes it super straightforward for you to import your existing email lists directly from Campaign Monitor so you can get started right away. All you need is your Campaign Monitor API key!

    Check out our simple, step-by-step guide to get started →
    I would like to send a mailing with Gmail or another public email service as the sender address through the Mail Designer delivery service. Why is that not a good idea?
     
    No SPF/DKIM Protection: Public email domains do not allow custom authentication protocols like SPF and DKIM to be set up, increasing the likelihood of emails being marked as spam.

    Gmail's Terms: Gmail does not permit mass emails to be sent through third-party services, which often leads to automatic spam detection.

    Lower Deliverability: Emails from public providers like Gmail often end up in spam folders, as many email providers consider these addresses less secure.

    Limited Brand Perception: A Gmail address appears less professional, which can undermine trust in the credibility of the business.
    Unrecognized charge from equinux
     

    If you have a charge from equinux on your credit card that you do not recognize, it may be for one of the following products offered through the equinux Online Store:

    • VPN Tracker (VPN software for Mac, iPhone and iPad)
    • Mail Designer 365 (email newsletter design software for Macs)
    • tizi (iPhone and iPad accessories)

    Common scenarios

    Auto-renewing products

    VPN Tracker and Mail Designer 365 are offered as subscriptions. When a plan has been configured to auto-renew, the associated payment method will automatically be charged.

    Additional team-members added

    If multiple employees are using one of our products, they may have configured team billing. This means the associated credit card may have been charged, in order to add a new team member to an account.

    Invoices and other questions

    You can download your invoices from our website:

    If you have checked with your team and still have additional questions regarding a charge, please contact our support team. Be sure to include the details from your credit card statement and the last 4 digits of your card.

    Can I connect to my Cisco AnyConnect SSL VPN connection on my iPhone?
     
    VPN Tracker is available for iOS! Use the brand new VPN Tracker for iOS to securely connect to your Cisco AnyConnect SSL VPN on the go on your iPhone or iPad.

    Discover VPN Tracker for iOS now.
    I have installed a certificate under iOS, but it is not evaluated!
     
    On iOS you need two steps to trust a certificate. The second step is often forgotten. So here are both steps again so that a certificate works under iOS.

    Assuming you have created a certificate for your VPN connection and want to use it on iOS (so as not to get a certificate error message when starting the connection).

    Send the certificate to your iPhone/iPad:
    > Send the certificate to you by email or transfer it via Airdrop. Open it on iOS. A message appears asking whether you want to install it on the device. Confirm this message. The question is a bit misleading because it isn't installed at all, it's just loaded onto the device.

    Then you have to carry out two steps:

    First step: Install certificate
    > Home screen > Settings > General > VPN and device management > Loaded profile > Tap profile name
    > Tap “Install” profile (top right)

    afterwards (this step is often forgotten!)

    Second step: Trust the certificate
    > Home screen > Settings > General > Info > Certificate settings > Set the switch next to the certificate to green
    When should you choose Direct Mail versus a Mail Designer 365 Campaign?
     
    Many of our users design personalized offers, exposés, or greetings with Mail Designer 365. Alternatively, they may want to test a direct mail to a colleague before a mass mailing. This is what 'Direct Mail' is intended for.

    The Direct Mail feature is not designed for newsletters. For newsletters, please create a Mail Designer 365 campaign and send it directly to your target audience.
    How can I access different versions of my Mail Designer 365 email designs?
     
    With the versions feature of macOS, you can access different versions of your Mail Designer 365 email designs.

    To do so, please follow these steps:
    ‣ Open one of your Mail Designer 365 email design
    ‣ Choose "File" > "Revert To"
    ‣ Select a version or click "Browse all versions"

    How can I use certain MailChimp features with my design?
     

    The Mail Designer manual has information on how to create your design and export it to MailChimp. Once you have sent your design to the big monkey in the sky, you can create campaigns, manage subscribers, track clicks and more with MailChimp's tools.

    There are so many different MailChimp features, that we can't describe them all in the Mail Designer manual. But don't worry: the MailChimp team have created webinars, how-to manuals, guides and tips to help you get started.

    I need to change something on my Mail Designer 365 invoice.
     
    If you need something changed on the invoice, please contact us via our support page.
    You also have the option of sending us a direct message.

    Note: We cannot guarantee that we will be able to make any changes after the invoice has been issued. This depends on a case-to-case basis. Thank you for your understanding.
    Mail Designer 365 Plain text export to Campaign Monitor & MailChimp
     
    If you have created a customized plain text version of your message, you'll need to add it to your MailChimp or Campaign Monitor newsletter separately.

    Simply copy Mail Designer 365's plain text version and paste it into your newsletter service's plain text section.


    Please refer to the following page for further information on plain text:


    I use Filezilla or another FTP service. How can I make sure that my images work?
     
    If you use an FTP service like Filezilla, you will need to make sure that you export your email design to a specific folder on your FTP account.

    ‣ First, open your email design in Mail Designer 365.
    ‣ Choose "File" > "Export as HTML..."

    ‣ Give your folder a specific name
    ‣ Connect to your server

    ‣ Upload your folder on your FTP account. With Filezilla, you can type the location of your folder within your Mac under "Local site."

    ‣ Or you can find the specific folder within the Filezilla window and then right click the folder. Choose upload from the drop down menu.

    ‣ Make sure all of the files are added to the folder, including the images used for the email design.
    ‣ Find the specific location path of your folder. With Filezilla, you will need to click on where your folder is within the server. The specific location path of your folder will be found under "Remote site:"

    ‣ Click the paper airplane icon on the top right of Mail Designer 365

    ‣ Choose "Website / HTML..."

    ‣ Check the box where it says "Prefix image URLS with:"
    ‣ Add the specific location path URL of your folder

    ‣ Click "Export"


    Whether you are using Filezilla or another FTP service, it is important to make sure that the location path URL of the folder is correct. Mail Designer 365 will rewrite all image paths and insert this URL in front of the image URL. This happens automatically for each image.

    Download warning in Safari?
     
    Safari may ask for confirmation the first time you download a file from a website. So when you download an app from our website, choose "Allow" when prompted to start the download.



    Note: All of our apps are digitally signed and verified for security, so you can download with confidence.
    Is it possible to activate Family Sharing for Mail Designer?
     
    Apple Family sharing is not activated for our products.
    Can I import my designs from other providers into Mail Designer 365?
     
    Due to compatibility reasons, it is not possible to directly copy HTML code from other ESPs (email service providers) such as Mailchimp into Mail Designer 365.

    However, due to the user friendly nature of Mail Designer, it is easy for you to copy elements of an external design into one of our templates and recreate your original design.
    How can I spell check based on a language I choose in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Mail Designer 365 allows you to choose your own preferred language. You have several options of languages to choose from like American English, British English, etc.
    ‣ Select a text area. 
    ‣ Choose "Edit" > "Spelling and Grammar" > "Show Spelling and Grammar" from the menu bar.

    ‣ A pop up will appear that will let you choose a language.
    ‣ Just click on the "Automatic by Language."
    ‣ You can choose your preferred language from the different options from the drop down menu.


    Please refer to the following page for more information on how to choose your spell check language:

    Can I edit my newsletter text outside of Mail Designer 365 if I want to change something?
     
    So you've already exported your email design to MailChimp, Campaign Monitor, Direct Mail etc, and you notice a mistake in your text or something you want to adjust. It may seem like the quick and convenient option to do this within the ESP in question's HTML editor, but in reality, it's not as straightforward.

    Because HTML is so complex when it comes to emails, even the slightest change could have drastic consequences for your email design. This is why we meticulously test every line of code used in the Mail Designer 365 app, so we can ensure compatibility with practically all email clients.

    Editing text, or any other element of your design, outside of Mail Designer 365 can have an impact on your newsletter's code and cause it not to be displayed as you intended it to once you've hit send. For this reason, we strongly advise all changes to be made within the Mail Designer 365 editor to ensure compatibility.
    Can I connect to my SonicWALL SSL VPN on my iPhone?
     
    VPN Tracker is now available on iPhone and iPad! Use brand new VPN Tracker for iOS to securely connect to your SonicWALL SSL VPN on the go on your iPhone or iPad.

    Get early access here.'>Discover VPN Tracker for iOS.
    How do I print my Mail Designer 365 email design?
     
    You can easily print all of your email designs with Mail Designer Pro.
    ‣To print a document, choose ”File" > "Print…” from the top menu bar.

    Please refer to the following page for more information on how to print:

    Which Mailchimp API version does Mail Designer 365 use?
     
    Mail Designer 365 version 1.7 and onwards uses Mailchimp's API 3.0. Earlier versions of Mail Designer use API 1.3, which Mailchimp announced they would be switching off on 2nd April 2019 and thus may not be able to export to Mailchimp after that date.
    How can I add an Unsubscribe Link to my template for uploading it to MailChimp?
     

    All templates you want to upload to MailChimp have to contain an unsubscribe link. By adding the Unsubscribe Link to your template you can ensure that your design will look correct on mobile devices and desktop clients and the MailChimp footer will be added at the end of your message.

    Add a MailChimp unsubscribe link

    To add an unsubscribe link to your template, please follow these steps:

  • Choose the text area you want to insert the unsubscribe link to.
  • Please choose "Insert" > "MailChimp" > "Unsubscribe Link" from the top menu bar.


  • Add a MailChimp Rewards badge

    You have a free MailChimp account and want to send a MailChimp campaign without the grey MailChimp Footer?
    Simply add the additional "Rewards" placeholder to your design together with the unsubscribe link and your campaign will be send without the MailChimp footer.
    You can add the "Rewards" placeholder by choosing "Insert" > "MailChimp" > "Rewards" from the top menu bar.

    Do you have a paid MailChimp account?
    In this case you don't have to add a MailChimp Rewards badge to your Mail Designer Pro document.

    Can I add video links into the mobile version of my Mail Designer 365 email design?
     
    Yes, you can add video links into the mobile version of your Mail Designer 365 newsletter. Mail Designer 365 allows you to edit the mobile version of your email template independently from the desktop version, if you choose.
    ‣ Click on the smartphone icon on the left side to open the mobile version of your template.

    ‣ Drag a border line of an image area or text area.
    ‣ Mail Designer 365 will then give you the option to detach your mobile and desktop versions from each other.

    ‣ You can add a preview picture for your video adding a video placeholder within an image area by clicking "Contents."
    ‣ Then click the video placeholder icon:

    ‣ You will be able to add preview images with our video icons or with your own player overlays.


    Please refer to the following pages for further information on how to add video links into the mobile version:


    Can I share my Mail Designer 365 email newsletter as an email attachment?
     
    Mail Designer 365 gives you the option of sharing your email design with others via email. This option will send an email to a recipient with your template attached as a Mail Designer 365 document.

    ‣ Open the template you want to export.
    ‣ Choose ”Share" > "Share design document via Email...“ from the top menu bar.

    Please refer to the following page for more information on how to share your email design as an attachment:


    Does Adobe style snap alignment work in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Currently, Mail Designer 365 does not offer an automatic snap alignment tool for design elements. However, guide lines are a great workaround that you can use to align text and images more precisely.

    Using guide lines


    Guide lines act as a visual guide to help you align different elements within your design.
    To insert a guideline, go to "Insert" > "Horizontal/Vertical guideline":



    Drag guidelines across your design to position them where you want to align objects, then use the line as a guide to align images, shapes, text, graphics, etc. throughout your design or just in one layout block:



    To hide the guidelines once you are done aligning, click on the "Hide layout outline" icon at the top right of the page:

    Some emails from my campaign went to spam; what do I do now?
     
    If some emails from your campaign ended up in the spam folder, there are several steps you can take to address the issue and improve future deliverability:

    1. Set Up a New Email List: Create a new email list with recipients who did not open your original email. Resend the email to this group after a short delay, ideally with a different subject line or slight modifications to the content. This can help re-engage those who may have missed the first message.

    2. Review Email Content: Analyze the content of the emails that went to spam. Look for elements that could trigger spam filters, such as excessive use of images, spammy keywords, or poor formatting, and make necessary adjustments.

    3. Engage with Your Audience: Foster a positive relationship with your recipients by providing valuable content and encouraging interaction. Engaged recipients are less likely to mark your emails as spam.




    How do I convert my Mail Designer 365 email design to a JPG or PNG file?
     
    Although there is currently no direct way to save your email template as a JPG or PNG file, we'll show you how you can still do that by following these simple steps:
    ‣ First, export your Mail Designer 365 template as a PDF file. 
    ‣ Choose “File" > "Export as PDF…”

    ‣ Save your document as a PDF file.
    ‣ Now, open your PDF file.

    ‣ Go to your menu bar at the top.
    ‣ Choose “File" > "Save As…”

    ‣ A popup window will appears, and you can choose the format you want. You can decide if you want to convert the PDF into a JPG or PNG file.

    Please refer to the following page for more information on how to convert your email design as a JPG or PNG file:



    How does Mail Designer Campaigns handle FROM email addresses like Gmail or Mac.com addresses?
     
    Mail Designer Campaigns automatically replaces free email addresses like Gmail or Mac.com with a modified format to prevent emails from going directly to spam. For example, an email address such as address@gmail.com would be converted to address.gmail.com@sentwithmaildesigner365.com. This replacement ensures that your emails are not flagged by recipient mail servers, as using free email addresses like Gmail or Mac.com directly would likely result in your emails being sent to spam.

    To improve deliverability and maintain a professional image, it's recommended to use a custom domain email address (e.g., yourname@yourcompany.com) that matches the domain of your business. This not only avoids the replacement issue but also ensures proper authentication with protocols like SPF, DKIM, and DMARC, which helps prevent your emails from being marked as spam or rejected by recipient mail servers.

    It is possible to send campaigns from Gmail or Mac.com addresses using Mail Designer 365 Campaigns; however, there is a higher likelihood that your email will be marked as spam compared to sending campaigns from your own domain. Therefore, it is advisable to use a custom email address to improve deliverability and reduce the risk of spam markings.
    I'd like to send more emails via Direct Mail. How can I purchase additional Email Stamps?
     
    Each campaign plan comes with monthly allocations of new Stamps. For instance, our basic plan 'Roma' includes 5,000 Stamps per month for your direct mail needs. In addition to this monthly option, you can also purchase Stamps as one-time buys, available in packages of 500, 1,500, or 4,000 Stamps.
    Looking for your invoice?
     

    You can view a copy of all your invoices in our Online Store:

    You will find the invoices for your VPN Tracker 365 purchases in the section "Invoices", here:

    http://my.vpntracker.com

    You work in accounting and need access to the VPN Tracker invoices for your company? Please ask your VPN Tracker Team manager to invite you to you company's team with the role "Accounting". Afterwards you will receive emails as soon as a new invoice is available and you can dowload this from the web portal


    You will find the invoices for your Mail Designer 365 purchases in the section "Orders", here:

    https://my.maildesigner365.com

    You will find the invoices for your tizi products in the section "Orders", here:

    http://my.tizi.tv

    Other invoices can be found at http://www.equinux.com/goto/invoice
    ‣ If you would like to save a PDF copy of your invoice, then do the following:
     Press "Command + P"  
     Choose "PDF" > "Save as PDF"

    How do I save my email design? Where can I find my saved design?
     
    To save, please try the following:
    ‣ Choose "File" > "Save"
    ‣ A pop up will appear.
    ‣ Give your email design a name.
    ‣ Choose a category or create a new category by choosing "Custom" from the drop-down menu. Then, type in the name of your new category.


    Once you save your email design, it will be saved in Mail Designer app. You can access it from the Design Chooser. You can click on "My Designs" or search for it in "My Library."


    Note: In the demo version of Mail Designer Pro 3, saving of designs is only possible after your purchase.

    How do I use Mail Designer 365's Design Ideas page?
     
    With Mail Designer 365, you can choose any of the templates from the Design Ideas page as your email design starting point. Just click on any template and then click on the "Use this design" button to get started.

    You can also access any of the templates you have purchased within the "In-App Purchase Designs" found on the bottom right.

    When saving your design, you will have the option of creating different categories for your email designs. You will find them under your "My Library."

    Please refer to the following page for a brief overview of Design Ideas:


    How do I turn on automatic hyphenation in Mail Designer 365?
     
    You can change whether your text is automatically hyphenated in your text areas. To turn off the hyphenation, try the following:
    ‣ Go to "File" > "Design Options."

    ‣ Add a check mark from the "Force hyphenation."

    ‣ Click "Ok."


    Please refer to the following page for further information on how to turn on and off text hyphenation:
    Can I use external images with Mail Designer 365?
     
    When you use Mail Designer 365's HTML export feature, it exports separate HTML and image files. In order for the images to be displayed correctly to your recipients, they'll need to be hosted on a webserver.

    Many newsletter services take care of image hosting for you. You just upload the HTML file and images and they manage the rest.

    If you newsletter tool or service doesn't offer image hosting, you will want to upload images to your own web server. Mail Designer 365 has an option to enter your web server's URL during HTML export that lets you reference images that way.

    Can I hotlink to images from my website?

    No: Mail Designer 365 needs to adjust the dimensions of images precisely to work correctly with all email clients, so hotlinking to images on your website isn't supported. However you can export the images in your design and host them on your website's server as described above.
    My SonicWall connection fails with “Negotiation Failed (PPP)”
     
    SonicWall's SonicOS 6.5.4.15-116n update breaks SSL-VPN connections with SonicWall Mobile Connect and VPN Tracker 365.
    In VPN Tracker's log, you can also see the error message:
    LCP: PPP peer accepted proposal but also modified it which isn't allowed.

    Please update your Sonicwall to at least SonicOS 6.5.4.15-117n to fix this problem. For more information, please visit: https://www.sonicwall.com/support/knowledge-base/mobile-connect-breaks-after-upgrade-to-sonicos-6-5-4-15/240903132324983
    How Can I Address Email Deliverability Issues and Improve Gmail Deliverability?
     

    If you're struggling with email deliverability—especially with Gmail users—there are proven strategies to improve sender reputation and ensure your emails land in inboxes rather than spam folders. Follow these steps to get back on track:

    Steps to Improve Email Deliverability:

    1. Warm Up Your Email Lists Gradually
      • Treat the process as if warming up a completely new account.
      • Divide your mailing into smaller batches and send them on different days. For example, start with 500 emails on Monday, 1,000 on Tuesday, 2,000 on Wednesday, and so on.
    2. Focus on Engaged Recipients First
      • Begin by sending emails only to contacts who have opened your emails recently (e.g., within the last 30 days for weekly senders).
      • Gradually increase this timeframe as your deliverability improves.
    3. Leverage Google Postmaster Tools
      • Set up Google Postmaster Tools to monitor spam rates, domain reputation, and other deliverability metrics.
    4. Create Test Gmail Accounts
      • Subscribe a test Gmail account to your email campaigns.
      • Monitor where emails land. If emails go to spam, interact with them (e.g., open, click, and reply) but do not move them out of the spam folder. This helps train Gmail’s algorithms.
    5. Adjust Based on Metrics
      • Use Google Postmaster Tools to track your spam rates. If spam rates are too high, reduce the timeframe of your engaged recipients or maintain the current level of sending until the rates stabilize.
    6. Monitor Progress
      • As Gmail deliverability improves and emails stop landing in spam, expand your email list incrementally to include less recently engaged recipients.

    How Mail Designer Campaigns Can Help:

    Mail Designer Campaigns provides several built-in features to optimize email deliverability and improve your sender reputation:

    • Professional Email Authentication: Ensure your emails are authenticated with SPF, DKIM, and DMARC, reducing the likelihood of being flagged as spam.
    • Engagement Tracking: Identify active and inactive recipients in your mailing list, allowing you focus on your most engaged contacts first.
    • Custom Domain Support: Addd your own domain to Mail Designer Campaigns to reinforce trust with email providers like Gmail.
    • Clean and Optimized Designs: Mail Designer 365 helps you to create email content that is visually appealing while avoiding spam-triggering elements, increasing inbox placement rates.
    • Advanced Segmentation: Mail Designer Campaigns allows for advanced segmentation, such as creating lists of only people who have opened the email in the past X days, and options for sending to only a portion of your subscriber list. This ensures that your emails reach the most engaged recipients first, improving overall deliverability.

    By following these best practices and leveraging Mail Designer Campaigns' tools, you can rebuild your sender reputation, enhance Gmail deliverability, and achieve more successful email marketing campaigns.

    I have already set up VPN connections with VPN Tracker on my Mac. Can I use them on my iPhone or iPad?
     
    Absolutely! VPN Tracker for iOS is powered by TeamCloud and Personal Safe, meaning your existing VPN connections show up instantly – zero setup required!

    Discover VPN Tracker for iOS now.
    Can I connect to WireGuard VPN?
     
    Great news: WireGuard® VPN support is available in VPN Tracker for Mac, iPhone and iPad!

    WireGuard® is a registered trademark of Jason A. Donenfeld.
    Why does my Internet stop working after connecting to my VPN?
     
    This usually has one of two main causes:
    1. If your VPN connection is configured to be Host to Everywhere, all non-local network traffic is sent over the VPN tunnel once the connection has been established. All non-local traffic includes traffic to public Internet services, as those are non-local, too. Those services will only be reachable if your VPN gateway has been configured to forward Internet traffic sent over VPN to the public Internet and to forward replies back over VPN, otherwise Internet access will stop working.

      A possible workaround is to configure a Host to Network connection instead, where only traffic to configured remote networks will be sent over VPN, whereas all other traffic is sent out like it is when there is no VPN tunnel established at all. In case the remote network are automatically provisioned by the VPN gateway, this has to be configured on the VPN gateway, automatic provisioning has to be disable in VPN Tracker (not possible for all VPN protocols), or the Traffic Control setting has to be used to override the network configuration as provided by the gateway (Traffic Control is currently not available on iOS).

      A Host to Everywhere setup may be desirable for reasons of anonymity or to pretend to be in a different physical location (e.g. a different country), since all your requests will arrive at their final destination with the public IP address of the VPN gateway instead of your own one. Also that way you can benefit from any maleware filters or ad blockers running on the VPN gateway, yet it also means that the gateway can filter what services you have access to in the first place. If Host to Everywhere is desired but not working, this has to be fixed on at the remote site, since what happens to public Internet traffic after being sent over the VPN is beyond VPN Tracker's control.

    2. If the connection is configured to use remote DNS servers without any restrictions, all your DNS queries will be sent over the VPN. Before any Internet service can be contacted, its DNS name must be resolved to an IP address first and if that isn't possible, as the remote DNS server is not working correctly or unable to resolve public Internet domains, the resolving process will fail and this quite often has the same effect in software as if the Internet service is unreachable.

      A possible workaround is to either disable remote DNS altogether, if not required for VPN usage, or to configure it manually, in which case it can be limited to specific domains only ("Search Domains"). By entering a search domain of example.com, only DNS names ending with example.com (such as www.example.com) would be resolved by the remote DNS servers, for all other domains the standard DNS servers will be used as configured in the system network preferences.

      Using a remote DNS server may be desirable to filter out malicious domains, to circumvent DNS blocking of an Internet provider, to hide DNS queries from local DNS operators (since DNS is typically unencrypted), or to allow access to internal remote domains that a public DNS server cannot resolve, as they are not public. For the last case, configuring the internal domains as search domains is sufficient. For all other cases, the issue must be fixed at the remote site, since what happens to DNS queries after being sent over the VPN is beyond VPN Tracker's control.

    Why does my connection sometimes work and sometimes not, especially when using personal hotspots or LTE/5G routers?
     
    When your IPsec connection is often able to establish a connection, but sometimes times out because there was no response to the first packet, the problem might be due to host name resolution. This is often the case in IPv6-based networks such as cellular connection, e.g. also when using the Personal Hotspot function on the iPhone.

    Some host names can resolve to both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, but depending on your current network location and VPN gateway it's possible that only IPv4 addresses work correctly.

    You can enforce resolving to IPv4 addresses only for your connection:

    • Edit your connection.
    • Navigate to the “Advanced Options” section.
    • In “Additional Settings”, change the setting “Connect using IPv4 or IPv6” to “Use IPv4”.
    • Save your connection and start your connection.



    Another way to completely disable IPv6 for Wi-Fi on macOS:

    1. Open the Terminal app from the Utilities folder.
    2. Enter the following command:
    sudo networksetup -setv6off Wi-Fi


    Note: If your Wi-Fi interface has a different name (e.g., `en0`), replace "Wi-Fi" with the correct name. You can check the name of the interface using this command:
    networksetup -listallnetworkservices


    3. After entering the command, you'll be prompted to enter your admin password.

    This will completely disable IPv6 for your Wi-Fi connection.
    I am confused by the new VPN Tracker Plans, how do I choose which one best fits my needs?
     
    Our goal with the new licensing model was to facilitate the selection of an appropriate license. Instead of a variety of other factors, we now primarily limit licenses based on the number of connections a user has. We have developed the Basic license specifically for individual users who only need access to one VPN connection.

    The license options we offer are as follows:
    • VPN Tracker for Mac BASIC - 1 Connection
    • VPN Tracker for Mac PERSONAL - 10 Connections
    • VPN Tracker Mac & iOS EXECUTIVE - 15 Connections
    • VPN Tracker Mac & iOS PRO - 50 Connections
    • VPN Tracker Mac & iOS VIP - 100 Connections
    • VPN Tracker Mac & iOS CONSULTANT - 400 Connections


    To upgrade your existing licenses, please go to the subscriptions tab in your my.vpntracker.com account and press the "Upgrade" Button. You can then choose a a suitable license from the dropdown link under "New Plan".

    We hope that this licensing model will make the licensing more clear moving forward.
    When will VPN Tracker for iOS be available?
     
    VPN Tracker for iOS is now available!

    Find out more
    Which iOS versions are compatible with VPN Tracker?
     
    VPN Tracker for iOS is compatible from iOS 15, including iOS 16.

    Test VPN Tracker for iOS here.
    What Is PPTP VPN? (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
     
    PPTP VPN, or Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol Virtual Private Network, is a widely used protocol for implementing virtual private networks. It enables secure data transfer over the internet by creating a private, encrypted tunnel between your device and a VPN server. Here's a breakdown of key aspects:
    1. Protocol Explanation:
      • Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP): PPTP is a protocol that facilitates the secure transfer of data between a user's device and a VPN server. It creates a tunnel through which data is encapsulated, providing a secure connection.
    2. Encryption and Security:
      • Encryption: PPTP employs various encryption methods to secure the data transmitted through the tunnel, making it difficult for unauthorized parties to intercept or decipher.
    3. Ease of Setup:
      • User-Friendly Setup: PPTP is known for its simplicity and ease of setup. It's often the preferred choice for users who prioritize a straightforward configuration process.
    4. Compatibility:
      • Widespread Compatibility: PPTP is compatible with a wide range of devices and operating systems, including Windows, macOS, Linux, iOS, and Android, making it accessible for users across different platforms.
    5. Speed and Performance:
      • Performance Considerations: PPTP is recognized for its relatively fast connection speeds, making it suitable for activities like streaming and online gaming.
    6. Considerations for Security-Conscious Users:
      • Security Concerns: While PPTP offers a convenient solution for many users, it's important to note that some security experts have raised concerns about its vulnerability to certain types of attacks. Users with high-security requirements may want to explore alternative VPN protocols like OpenVPN or L2TP/IPsec.
    7. Choosing the Right VPN Protocol:
      • Consider Your Needs: When selecting a VPN protocol, it's essential to consider your specific requirements, including the balance between ease of use and the level of security needed for your online activities.

    In summary, PPTP VPN is a widely accessible and user-friendly protocol suitable for various devices. However, users should be mindful of their specific security needs and consider alternative protocols if stronger encryption is a priority.

    Did you know? VPN Tracker is the only VPN Client for Mac for PPTP VPN under macOS Sonoma and macOS Sequoia.
    I set up a WireGuard connection on my Fritzbox and imported it into VPN Tracker. When I connect to the Fritzbox via VPN, all internet traffic is routed through the Fritzbox. How can I prevent this?
     
    1. Open the connection in VPN Tracker and go to “Edit > Setup > Advanced Settings”.
    2. Navigate to “Traffic Control” and add the Fritzbox’s IP range, e.g., 192.168.178.0/24, under “Use VPN for the following addresses only”.

    “Use VPN for the following addresses only”
    192.168.178.0/24

    3. If your Fritzbox uses a different IP range, enter the corresponding range instead.
    I upgraded my Sonicwall to 6.5.4.13. Now I have problems with my IPsec connections. What can I do?
     
    SonicWALL listed a known issue in the release notes of 6.5.4.13:

    An established IPSEC VPN tunnel intermittently fails in a NAT environment. (GEN6-2296)

    Please contact Sonicwall for more information on when Sonicwall plans to fix this issue.
    Why would OpenVPN connections to Zyxel USG FLEX firewalls always fail with early timeout?
     

    By default Zyxel creates firewall policies to allow traffic to flow from SSL VPN to LAN zone and from LAN to SSL VPN zone. Those rules are required to allow VPN traffic flow once the connection has been established. But there is no policy that actually allows VPN management traffic at the WAN port, client requests arriving at the WAN port are discarded by the firewall.

    To allow an OpenVPN connection on the WAN port, you first have to create an own policy. In the main navigation, select Security Policy > Policy Control, click on the + Add button and create a policy that allows traffic for the service SSLVPN to flow from WAN to ZyWALL. Please see screenshot below.

    I’m having issues with a Cisco AnyConnect gateway. What can I do?
     
    In AnyConnect gateways, the case sensitivity of the gateway address can sometimes matter. gateway.example.com and Gateway.example.com are treated differently. Please ensure that the case exactly matches the AnyConnect gateway settings.
    How do all the OpenVPN keep-alive, activity, and alive checks settings work together?
     
    • Send keep-alive ping every

      This option controls whether and how often VPN Tracker sends keep-alive pings. A keep-alive ping is not a normal ping, and is not considered tunnel traffic by the VPN gateway, so it does not keep the connection alive at the gateway. The sole purpose of these pings is to keep the connection alive through firewalls and NAT routers between VPN Tracker and the gateway when no other tunnel traffic is being sent.

    • Disconnect if inactive for

      This option controls if and after how long VPN Tracker will disconnect due to inactivity. Only tunnel traffic is considered activity, keep-alive pings sent from either side and protocol management traffic are not considered tunnel traffic.

    • Consider the peer dead if no sign of liveliness for

      This option controls if and after what time VPN Tracker will disconnect due to no sign of life. Any traffic from the gateway is considered a sign of life, regardless of whether it is tunnel traffic, keep alive ping, or protocol management traffic.

      This option has no effect if the gateway is not configured to send pings (--ping option or ping in the server configuration file), because without pings enabled, there may be no tunnel or management traffic for quite some time, but this is not proof that the gateway is no longer alive, since it won't send anything if there is nothing to send. With ping enabled, the gateway would at least send keep-alive pings in such a situation, and if those don't arrive either, the gateway has most likely dropped the connection or gone offline.

    My credit card didn't work and my plan has expired. Why do I now see a different price after expiration?
     
    The possibility of grandfathering pricing is exclusively available for customers using the automatic renewal option. In cases where your plan cannot be renewed due to a problem with the payment method (i.e. expired, lost or stolen), the plan will be canceled after a few tries. You are then free to re-obtain your plan at any time you wish for the then current price tier.

    In order to profit from your existing price, please ensure you update your payment method prior to the renewal date.
    What is DKIM and why should I use it?
     

    The Anatomy of an Email

    Before diving into DKIM, let's briefly understand how emails work. When you send an email, it's like sending a digital letter. It travels through various servers and networks before reaching its intended recipient. Each server it passes through can potentially be a point of vulnerability where malicious actors might tamper with the email's content or disguise themselves as legitimate senders.

    Enter DKIM: The Email's Digital Signature

    DKIM, which stands for DomainKeys Identified Mail, is a security protocol designed to verify the authenticity and integrity of an email message. It does this by adding a digital signature to the email before it leaves the sender's server. This signature is like a seal of approval, assuring the recipient that the email has not been tampered with and genuinely comes from the claimed sender.

    How DKIM Works

    DKIM relies on a pair of cryptographic keys: a private key kept by the sender and a public key published in the sender's DNS (Domain Name System) records. Here's how it works:

    1. Email Signing: When an email is sent, the sending server uses the sender's private key to generate a unique digital signature based on the email's content. This signature is added to the email's header.
    2. Recipient Verification: Upon receiving the email, the recipient's email server retrieves the public key associated with the sender's domain from the DNS records.
    3. Signature Verification: The recipient's server uses this public key to verify the email's digital signature. If the signature matches the email's content and has not been altered in transit, the email is considered authentic.
    4. Filtering and Delivery: If the email passes DKIM verification, it's more likely to be delivered to the recipient's inbox. If not, it may be flagged as suspicious or sent to the spam folder.

    The Importance of DKIM

    1. Protection Against Spoofing: One of the most significant benefits of DKIM is its ability to prevent email spoofing. Without DKIM, cybercriminals can easily forge email headers and pretend to be someone they're not. DKIM ensures that the email you receive from a trusted sender is indeed from that sender.
    2. Email Integrity: DKIM safeguards the integrity of your emails. It guarantees that your message hasn't been altered during transit, ensuring that the recipient receives the content exactly as you intended.
    3. Enhanced Deliverability: When your emails are DKIM-signed, email providers are more likely to trust them. This means your legitimate emails have a better chance of landing in your recipients' inboxes rather than getting lost in spam folders.
    4. Reduced Phishing: By reducing the effectiveness of phishing attacks, DKIM helps protect individuals and organizations from falling victim to scams that could result in data breaches or financial losses.

    Conclusion

    In an era where email fraud and phishing attacks are prevalent, DKIM serves as a crucial line of defense. It's like a digital fingerprint that assures the authenticity and integrity of your emails. While it may operate behind the scenes and go unnoticed by most email users, DKIM is a vital tool in the ongoing battle against cyber threats. Its use should be encouraged and embraced by individuals, businesses, and email service providers to create a safer digital communication environment for everyone. So, the next time you receive an email, remember that DKIM might be silently working to protect you from potential harm in the vast digital landscape.
    Why does my design need an unsubscribe link?
     
    As an email sending service, Mail Designer 365 Campaigns is required to enforce spam prevention measures, such as GDPR in the EU and CAN-SPAM in the US. By law, marketing emails must provide a way for recipients to opt out of future emails.

    For this reason, all email campaigns sent via Delivery Hub must contain an unsubscribe link.

    Further benefits of including a clear unsubscribe link:
    • Automatic unsubscribe handling (Delivery Hub will remove unsubscribed contacts for you)
    • Clean email list – your campaigns are only being sent to engaged subscribers
    • Fewer spam complaints
    • Campaign-based unsubscribe rate tracking

    How to insert an unsubscribe placeholder in your email design
    To add an unsubscribe link to your email, click inside a text area in your design (e.g. in the email footer), then go to the app menu and select Insert > Mail Designer 365 Campaigns > Unsubscribe Link:



    When you send your campaign via Delivery Hub, recipients will see the unsubscribe option in the footer of your email:



    Learn more about Delivery Hub →
    Importing contacts to Mail Designer 365 campaigns using CSV Files
     
    You can import email addresses to Mail Designer 365 Campaigns using the CSV import tool. It is available at:
    https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/addContacts

    The first three column names are Email,First Name,Last Name

    You can also add additional keys/columns/placeholders and their values per entry as you go. The importer will automatically add the placeholders to your contact database. All you need to do is define the placeholders you plan to import in the first line.

    Example:

    You want to add a favorite color and a location for each of your contacts. In order to do so, define the first row of the CSV file with the following placeholder names:

    Email,First Name,Last Name,Favorite Color,Location
    miller@example.com,Peter,Miller,blue,New York
    smith@example.com,Jody,Smith,red,San Francisco


    Good to know: You can re-import the CSV at any time with additional columns to enhance your contacts. All new placeholders will then be attached to your contacts.

    Need help? Download an example CSV file here for reference:
    Mail_Designer_365_Campaigns_Email_Import_Example.csv
    How to determine good/bad unsubscribe rate for newsletters?
     
    Ideally, we recommend keeping your unsubscribe rate below 0.5% for optimal performance.

    Rates above 1% can be a warning sign, as only a fraction of people who want to unsubscribe will actually click the unsubscribe link—many others will mark your emails as spam instead. This means a 1% unsubscribe rate could result in 2–3% of your emails being flagged as spam by providers like Google or Hotmail. Over time, this can harm your sender reputation and cause all your emails to land in spam folders.

    To reduce your unsubscribe rate, focus on sending emails only to engaged subscribers. Start by targeting those who have opened your emails within the past 365 days, and adjust this timeframe based on your audience’s behavior. Additionally, segmenting your audience to deliver more tailored, relevant content can significantly improve engagement and reduce unsubscribes.
    I sent an email campaign with Mail Designer 365. Where can I view the statistics and reports for the campaign?
     
    To view the statistics of your email campaign in Mail Designer 365, follow these steps:
    1. Log in to my.maildesigner365.com
    2. Navigate to Campaigns and select Delivered.
    3. Select the desired campaign – the statistics will then be displayed.
    What is an API key?
     
    An API key stands for an application programming interface key. The API key is similar to a password. Your email service provider may require you to enter an API Key before you can integrate it with Mail Designer. This is a way to add extra security. It requires you, the user, to enter additional authentication credential aside from your username and password.

    Why does the Mail Designer 365 system not recognize my VAT number even though it is recognized by VIES (VAT Information Exchange System)?
     
    Sometimes the VAT verification servers are temporarily not reachable, which can cause the error when trying to upgrade or purchase a Mail Designer 365 plan.

    In order to upgrade to Mail Designer 365 with your VAT, please try the following:
    ‣ Visit our  upgrade page.
    ‣ Purchase your Mail Designer 365 plan.
    ‣ Log in to your account
    ‣ Click on the button "Buying for a business?"
    ‣ Add a VAT ID
    ‣ Enter your full VAT number
    ‣ Click on "Validate VAT ID"
    What is DMARC and why should I use it?
     

    Email is the lifeblood of modern communication, but its ubiquity also makes it a prime target for cybercriminals seeking to deceive, defraud, or disrupt. To safeguard against these threats and ensure the integrity of your email communications, there's a powerful tool known as DMARC, or Domain-based Message Authentication, Reporting, and Conformance.

    The Challenge of Email Impersonation

    Before we dive into DMARC, it's essential to understand the challenges of email communication. Emails pass through multiple servers and networks on their way to the recipient, creating numerous opportunities for malicious actors to tamper with or impersonate senders.

    DMARC: Your Email Security Guardian

    DMARC, which stands for Domain-based Message Authentication, Reporting, and Conformance, is a comprehensive email authentication protocol designed to combat email impersonation, phishing attacks, and other email-based fraud.

    How DMARC Works

    DMARC builds on the foundations of SPF and DKIM but takes email authentication to a whole new level:

    1. Policy Declaration: The domain owner (the sender) publishes a DNS record that specifies how email from their domain should be handled if it fails SPF or DKIM checks. This DNS record contains DMARC policy settings.
    2. Email Reception: When an email is received by the recipient's email server, it performs SPF and DKIM checks as usual. If these checks fail, the server consults the sender's DMARC record.
    3. DMARC Verification: DMARC instructs the recipient's server on how to handle emails that fail SPF or DKIM checks. The sender can choose to monitor these failures, quarantine suspicious emails, or reject them outright.
    4. Reporting: DMARC provides valuable feedback by generating reports about email authentication activity. These reports help domain owners monitor and improve their email security.

    The Significance of DMARC

    1. Protection from Impersonation: DMARC is a formidable defense against email impersonation. It ensures that emails claiming to be from your domain are indeed legitimate, making it exceedingly difficult for cybercriminals to impersonate you.
    2. Enhanced Email Trustworthiness: Implementing DMARC enhances the trustworthiness of your emails. Email providers are more likely to recognize your emails as safe and deliver them to the recipient's inbox.
    3. Reduced Phishing Risks: DMARC is a powerful deterrent against phishing attacks. By reducing the success rate of such attacks, it safeguards individuals and organizations from potential harm.
    4. Reputation Management: DMARC helps protect your domain's reputation. It ensures that your legitimate emails are not diluted by fraudulent ones, preserving trust in your brand or organization.

    Conclusion

    In an era where email threats are prevalent and sophisticated, DMARC emerges as the ultimate guardian angel of email authenticity. Although it operates discreetly in the background, DMARC is a potent tool in the fight against cyber threats. Its implementation is highly recommended for individuals, businesses, and email service providers, as it offers a robust defense against email impersonation and enhances the overall security of email communications. The next time you send or receive an email, know that DMARC is diligently working to protect you from email-based deception and fraud in the vast digital landscape.

    Can I send email blasts without using my own domain?
     

    If you don’t have a warmed domain or custom email address, Mail Designer 365 offers a professional solution for sending email campaigns without the need for your own domain.

    How does it work?

    Mail Designer 365 uses its Mail Designer Delivery service, which ensures that your campaigns are sent reliably and securely from a trusted, pre-configured email domain. This avoids potential issues like deliverability problems caused by an unprepared domain or emails landing in spam folders.

    Why choose Mail Designer Delivery?

    • No Setup Hassle: You don’t need to purchase, warm up, or configure your own domain.
    • Trusted Reputation: Mail Designer’s sending infrastructure is optimized to ensure high deliverability.
    • Professional Appearance: Your emails are sent with an authenticated domain, giving a polished and professional look to your campaigns.
    • GDPR-Compliant Sending: All data is handled in compliance with GDPR, ensuring the privacy of your recipients.

    What’s the catch?

    While using a shared domain is a quick solution, a custom email domain (e.g., yourname@yourbusiness.com) is always recommended in the long term. This gives you full control and enhances your brand image. Mail Designer 365 supports this setup with tools to configure SPF, DKIM, and DMARC authentication for maximum deliverability.

    Ready to get started?

    Mail Designer 365 is perfect for sending individual emails or thousands of recipients quickly and professionally. Start your campaign with our delivery service today and reach your audience without worrying about technical setup or deliverability!

    Is it possible to use WorldConnect with other VPN clients?
     
    VPN Tracker World Connect may be used with the World Connect own Clients for Mac and iPhone/iPad. The VPN Tracker World Connect Clients contains several Features which are not available in regular VPN Clients, for example the automatic selection of the fastest VPN Endpoint.

    It is of course also possible to use World Connect with the VPN Tracker 365 App.
    How do I embed a "Subscribe" link in MailChimp?
     
    In case you want to include a "Subscribe" link in the newsletters but MailChimp only shows HTML code that you cannot embed, here's a quick way:

    In Mail Designer 365, select "Custom" as link type. Then, insert the MailChimp subscribe tag. Remember, you must insert a link and not the login form for web pages. Forms can not be embedded in mails.



    Why am I seeing a Mail Designer 365 banner under my email campaign?
     

    As part of the free Campaigns plan included with your Mail Designer 365 design plan, a Mail Designer 365 banner is displayed in the footer of emails sent via Delivery Hub:



    These banners can be removed after switching to any paid Campaigns plan. Log in to your my.maildesigner365 account to explore the Mail Designer Campaigns plan options.

    Is email marketing dead?
     

    Email marketing isn’t dead—it has simply evolved. While it’s true that inboxes are busier than ever, email marketing remains one of the most effective ways to connect with audiences when done right. Here’s why:




    1. People value quality over quantity: Subscribers are more selective about the emails they sign up for, so it’s crucial to offer valuable, engaging, and relevant content that stands out. Generic or repetitive emails won’t cut it anymore.
    2. It’s a personal choice: Unlike unsolicited messages on platforms like WhatsApp, email gives recipients control—they’ve opted in to hear from you. For many people this makes emails far more welcome than intrusive messages on other channels.
    3. Still an ROI powerhouse: Email marketing continues to deliver one of the highest returns on investment (ROI) in digital marketing. When you focus on personalization and value, email can drive conversions better than almost any other medium.


    While automation and messaging apps like WhatsApp are growing, they serve different purposes. Instead of replacing email, they complement a well-rounded marketing strategy. So, no—email marketing isn’t dead. It’s just more competitive, and that’s a good thing because it pushes brands to be better.

    What is SPF and why should I use it?
     

    Email has become an integral part of our daily communication, from personal conversations to business dealings. However, with this convenience comes the constant threat of email-based fraud and phishing attacks. To combat these threats and ensure the authenticity of your emails, there's a simple yet crucial tool known as SPF or Sender Policy Framework.

    The Vulnerabilities in Email Communication

    Understanding SPF requires a brief insight into how email communication functions. When you send an email, it travels through multiple servers and networks before reaching its intended recipient. At each stop, malicious actors can potentially intercept, modify, or impersonate the email.

    SPF: The Guardian of Email Authenticity

    SPF, which stands for Sender Policy Framework, is a security protocol that acts as a guardian, protecting your email domain from being used by cybercriminals to impersonate you. SPF helps verify the legitimacy of incoming emails by checking if they originate from authorized servers associated with the sender's domain.

    How SPF Works

    SPF is relatively straightforward in its operation:

    1. Sender Declaration: The domain owner (you or your organization) publishes a DNS record specifying which servers are authorized to send emails on its behalf. This record is known as the SPF record.
    2. Email Reception: When an email is received by the recipient's email server, the server checks the SPF record of the sender's domain to see if the server that sent the email is authorized to do so.
    3. Validation: If the sending server's IP address matches one of the authorized IP addresses listed in the SPF record, the email is considered legitimate and is accepted for delivery. If not, it may be flagged as suspicious or rejected.

    The Significance of SPF

    1. Protection Against Spoofing: SPF plays a crucial role in preventing email spoofing. It ensures that emails claiming to be from your domain indeed originate from authorized servers, making it harder for cybercriminals to impersonate you.
    2. Enhanced Email Deliverability: When you implement SPF, email providers are more likely to trust your emails, leading to better deliverability rates. Your legitimate emails are less likely to end up in spam folders.
    3. Reduction in Phishing: By making it more difficult for cybercriminals to impersonate trusted senders, SPF contributes to reducing phishing attacks, protecting individuals and organizations from potential harm.
    4. Branding and Reputation: SPF helps maintain your email domain's reputation. It assures recipients that your emails are legitimate, strengthening trust in your brand or organization.

    Conclusion

    In an age where email is a primary mode of communication and email-based threats are prevalent, SPF serves as a reliable shield against impersonation and fraud. Although it may work silently behind the scenes, SPF is a powerful tool in the fight against cyber threats. Its implementation is highly recommended for individuals, businesses, and email service providers alike to bolster the security of email communications. So, the next time you send or receive an email, remember that SPF is working diligently to protect you from potential email impersonation in the vast digital landscape.

    CleanMyMac X claims Mail Designer 365 is infected by XCSSET
     
    Luckily, this is an incorrect report.

    The XCSSET malware is a trojan that replicates project files via Xcode; it targets mostly developers. To get it, you would need to download an infected Xcode project and build it. It creates fake apps and also downloads and installs payload (adware and similar things). So it does not infect existing apps.

    An interesting property of XCSSET is that it's mostly implemented in AppleScript. The generated fake apps contain a folder "Contents/Resources/Scripts" in which those AppleScript files reside. You can right-click on VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 in Finder, then click on "Show Package Contents" to check whether this Scripts folder or any AppleScript files (*.scpt) can be found; VPN Tracker 365 and Mail Designer 365 do not contain AppleScript files.
    How can I manage Apple AppStore or Google Playstore subscriptions?
     
    If you want to view and manage your subscriptions on the Google Playstore, proceed as follows:
    Cancel, pause or change subscriptions on Google Play

    If you want to view and manage your subscriptions on the Apple AppStore, proceed as follows:
    View or cancel subscriptions
    I would like a refund of my purchase
     
    We offer every customer a no-strings-attached trial period of Mail Designer 365 before purchase. The trial can be downloaded free of charge from our website. This allows users to test the vast range of features and tools included in a full plan before making any financial commitments to the software.

    For this reason, we cannot offer refunds once a plan has been purchased. This information is also clearly stated in the terms & conditions which must be accepted before completing the checkout process.
    I reinstalled VPN Tracker into a new Mac, but it keeps asking me to buy the software again.
     
    First, log in to VPN Tracker with your equinux account. If VPN Tracker still asks you to buy the software, then:

    ‣ Go to "VPN Tracker" > "Refresh My Account"


    Then, try to activate your VPN Tracker again.
    I can't complete my order via credit card
     
    For the protection of our customers, all payments in our store are processed with 3D Secure technology. 3D Secure is an additional security mechanism that works with 2-factor authorization. After entering the card details, the transaction is passed on to the credit card company and must be explicitly approved by the customer. The approval is usually done via SMS, app or email. With the explicit approval before the transaction, we can help prevent credit card fraud.

    In order to use your card with 3D Secure, it needs to be actived for your card. Please contact your bank for this. Registration is often possible on the bank's website or via your banking app. Please see the links below for more details:

    With the 3D Secure procedure, authentication communication takes place directly between your computer and your bank. We have no influence on this. If you have any problems, please contact your bank or try to pay with another card or PayPal.
    Can I use VPN Tracker on my iPad or iPhone?
     
    VPN Tracker is now available on iPhone and iPad!

    Connect to your VPN on the go on your iPhone or iPad using the new VPN Tracker for iOS app.

    • Multiprotocol VPN support
    • High speed connections
    • Zero-config VPN - thanks to TeamCloud & Personal Safe technology

    Test VPN Tracker for iPhone and iPad.
    How can I cancel my subscription on the App Store?
     
    To cancel or manage a subscription in the App Store, open the App Store, sign in, and click on your account icon in the bottom left corner of the window.

    Then, click "View information" in the top right of the window, enter your password if prompted and scroll down until you see the subheading "Manage". Here you will be able to see how many subscriptions you have associated with your account.



    Click on "Manage" to view and edit your subscriptions on your Mac.

    You can find out more information from the Apple Support website.
    How can I start a VPN Tracker demo/trial?
     
    We offer a free 30-day demo of VPN Tracker 365, no credit card required.

    To get started, you just need to

    Then, once you have configured your connection, you'll see a free demo option in the store window that pops up.

    Note: If you don't see the free demo option, please click the account popover at the top left of your screen to verify your email address first.

    My credit card payment was denied?
     
    Some banks may have trouble processing credit card renewals which can cause your card to be denied.

    Generally, this can be resolved by a quick phone call to your bank. This should be your first port of call.

    Alternatively, you could also try the following:
    - Please try updating your card directly on our store page
    - Try a card issued by another bank (our store supports Mastercard, Visa and American Express)
    - Use PayPal (tip: often a problematic credit card will work when added to PayPal)

    You can manage your payment methods under http://store.equinux.com/storefront/subscriptions/.
    What is Mail Designer 365 Campaigns?
     
    Mail Designer 365 Campaigns offers multiple ways to work together as a team:

    Mail Designer 365 TeamCloud
    Save your design to TeamCloud to give other designers in your Team access, so they can edit and make changes to your design. Designs saved in TeamCloud are also automatically made available to use with Crew Chat and Delivery Hub for the rest of your team.

    Mail Designer 365 Crew Chat
    Use Crew Chat to upload your Mail Designer 365 design as a web-based preview. Team members can preview your work and post comments and feedback from any device – including iPhone, iPad, Windows, Android. It's the fastest way to get everyone's input.

    Mail Designer 365 Delivery Hub
    Access your team's Mail Designer 365 designs in Delivery Hub to send as targeted email campaigns to your audience. Manage email contacts and lists, schedule and send campaigns, and benefit from detailled post campaign analytics.

    Discover Mail Designer 365 Campaigns

    CleanMyMac X or another tool is warning me that VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 contain malware
     
    Viruses that infect existing applications are very rare on macOS, but they do exist. However, warnings that VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 are infected are very likely false-positives, meaning the tool has incorrectly identified malware in these apps that is actually not there.
    Is it possible to activate Family Sharing for VPN Tracker?
     
    Apple Family sharing is not activated for our products.
    How do I get my activation code?
     
    Activation codes are only used for older products like VPN Tracker 8 or lower or for retail products during the first activation. For current products, the software is exclusively activated using your equinux ID.

    Please refer to the following FAQ for more information on how to activate without an activationcode:


     
    No answer available
    How do I take a screenshot on the Mac?
     
    There are three main ways to take a screenshot on your Mac:
    • Press "Shift" (⇧) + "Cmd" (⌘) + "4" then click and drag the mouse cursor to capture a specific area of your screen.
    • Press "Shift" (⇧) + "Cmd" (⌘) + "4" and then the space bar to capture a specific window or element on your screen.
    • Alternatively, press "Shift" (⇧) + "Cmd" (⌘) + "3" to capture your full screen.
    How do I perform a force quit on the Mac?
     
    If you need to force quit your software for any reason (e.g. your screen has frozen or the app is not responding) please do one of the following:
    • If the app you want to quit is in your dock, hold the "Option" (⌥) key and right-click on the app icon, then, select "Force Quit" from the menu.
    • You can also hold down "Option" (⌥) + "Cmd" (⌘) + "Esc" which will trigger a window with a list of apps you have running. To force quit one or more of these apps, simply select it from the list and click the "Force Quit" button.
    How can I verify the safety of my copy of Mail Designer 365 or VPN Tracker 365?
     
    Especially so-called "clean up tools" that also scan for malware can report false-positives. If you suspect VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 to be infected, we recommend to upload your copy of the app to www.virustotal.com which is a free service that scans your uploaded files using several reputable virus scanners. If any of the virus scanners on this site flags the app, please contact us.

    How can I verify that my copy of VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer has not been modified?


    All our apps are properly code-signed by Apple, so macOS can verify that the app has not been tampered with. You can check the integrity by opening Terminal.app and entering the following command:
    spctl --assess "/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app"

    Please note that double quotes around the path are required because the path contains spaces. If your copy is in a different location, please replace "/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app" with the proper path to the app.
    The output may look like this:
    /Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app: accepted
    source=Notarized Developer ID

    If the app has been modified, an error message like this is printed:
    Mail Designer 365.app: invalid signature (code or signature have been modified)

    Please contact us if your copy of VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 has an invalid signature.

    How can I verify that my copy of VPN Tracker 365 or Mail Designer 365 was signed by equinux?


    All our apps are properly code-signed by Apple, so macOS can verify that the app has not been tampered with. You can review this signature by opening Terminal.app and entering the following command:
      codesign -d -vv "/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app" 

    Please note that double quotes around the path are required because the path contains spaces. If your copy is in a different location, please replace "/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app" with the proper path to the app.
    The output may look like this:
    Executable=/Applications/VPN Tracker 365.app/Contents/MacOS/VPN Tracker 365
    Identifier=com.vpntracker.365mac
    Format=app bundle with Mach-O universal (x86_64 arm64)
    CodeDirectory v=20500 size=81953 flags=0x10000(runtime) hashes=2550+7 location=embedded
    Signature size=9071
    Authority=Developer ID Application: equinux AG (MJMRT6WJ8S)
    Authority=Developer ID Certification Authority
    Authority=Apple Root CA
    Timestamp=1. Jun 2021 at 17:22:51
    Info.plist entries=42
    TeamIdentifier=MJMRT6WJ8S
    Runtime Version=11.1.0
    Sealed Resources version=2 rules=13 files=684
    Internal requirements count=1 size=216

    The important parts to look out for here are the lines starting with "Authority": They list the chain of trust. The last entry must always be "Apple Root CA", the entry above must either be "Developer ID Certification Authority" or "Apple Worldwide Developer Relations Certification Authority" for App Store versions. The first entry must either be "Developer ID Application: equinux AG" (VPN Tracker 365), "Developer ID Application: Tower One GmbH" (Mail Designer 365 non-App Store), or "Apple Mac OS Application Signing" (Mail Designer 365 App Store).
    Again, if you see a different entry, please contact us.
    How can I send a test email to my second email address?
     
    To send a test email to another email address of your own, use the teamwork capabilities of Mail Designer. To do this, invite your other email address to your Mail Designer team:
    1. Open team management and invite another member.
    2. Then log out of your current Mail Designer account (top right)
    3. Now open the invitation link from the email from your second email address.
    4. Create a new account with the second email address.
    5. When you start the test send now, select the bottom option “Team”.
      This will send the test email to all members of the team, including your second email address.
    You can repeat these steps for other email addresses. Up to 10 team members or additional email addresses can be added.
    Can I still send SMTP Mails to multiple recipients with the new DKIM limitations?
     
    Sending out an email blast via SMTP to a larger group of recipents will potentially cause problems with the new procedures put in place. This means that if you continue to use this process, your emails will most likely get blocked by the recipient email provider (Gmail, Yahoo, etc.). This will result in only a few of your recipients actually receiving the emails.

    The thing triggering these blocks of email transmissions is not the nature of the email. Even personal Christmas Greetings will potentially get blocked if sent to a large enough audience. After all, how would the email provider know what nature the content of the email is? They block emails purely based on the number of emails being sent at the same time from the same origin.

    Here is how Mail Designer Campaigns can help in this situation:
    - When you don't have your own domain email address, we replace the From Address automatically with one of our verified Domains
    - This address replacement would look as follows: Original Address - supercoolmails@yahoo.com New Address: supercoolmails.yahoo.com@sentwith.maildesigner365.com
    - Since the Domain @sentwith.maildesigner365.com is fully DKIM certified, these emails would not be blocked due to DKIM issues.

    Alternatively if you do have your own Domain, Mail Designer Campaigns allows you to DKIM verify your send address, so you can send from your own Domain without being blocked by the providers.

    Are you new to Mail Designer? Why don't you try the Mail Designer Free Demo for Mac users.
     
    No answer available
    On your page I see the prices in USD but in the store it says Euro. Can I pay in USD?
     
    Our prices and the currency you purchase in vary depending on which country you are purchasing from. We are headquartered in Germany and our default billing is in Euros. In order to see your final price and currency including VAT where applicable, please go to our Online Store and select your country. We are unable to accept payments in a different currency than what is displayed in the Online Store.
    Am I eligible for a refund?
     
    We offer a free trial for the Mail Designer 365 App and a free plan for testing Mail Designer Campaings. These trials can be used to test all functionality of the app and the service, helping users identify the best fit for their needs. After this trial period, all sales are final upon subscription, in accordance with our Terms and conditions.
     
    Please be aware that we cannot process refunds in the following scenarios:
    • Non-usage of the app or service
    • Failure to cancel your account within the cancelation period
    • Lack of features or functionality on your subscribed plan
    • Purchases made in error
    • Exceptional circumstances beyond our control
    • Violations to our Terms of Use
    Is it possible to send to email Groups using Mail Designer Campaigns?
     
    When emailing a group of people, there have traditionally been several methods to do so. Examples of traditional "small group sending" include:
    • Regular email with several contacts in the To field
    • Regular email with several contacts in the BCC field
    • An email to a predefined group, such as an Outlook Group

    In recent years, email service providers have gradually increased email sending requirements. Once you approach 30 or more recipients for a single email, several problems can arise if you try to send that message using traditional email methods.
    • Your email service provider or the recipient's email service provider may raise suspicions of SPAM (unsolicited junk emails) sending, potentially leading to your account's suspension or temporary freeze.
    • Receiving an email with an extensive list of recipients often diminishes its perceived relevance to individual recipients, making it seem impersonal and more likely to be classified as junk mail.
    • Messages sent to a large number of recipients are often flagged by Junk Mail Filtering systems as Spam, increasing the risk of your message being blocked and not reaching its intended recipients.

    Especially with the latest Spam guidelines implemented by major email providers like Google and Hotmail, it's increasingly easy for your email address or domain to be blacklisted. This could result in your account being "Spam blocked," causing all your emails to be directed to recipients' spam folders. Removing this type of Spam block is a cumbersome process, so it's essential to avoid it.

    How can Mail Designer Campaigns assist you?
    • Mail Designer Campaigns enables you to fully verify your domain, ensuring optimal verification for your emails to reach recipients' inboxes.
    • If you don't have your own domain or prefer not to undergo the verification process, we can provide you with a custom address from a fully authenticated domain, significantly reducing the risk of your emails being marked as Spam.
    • We offer intelligent list management for your contact lists, allowing you to either send emails to all contacts or create targeted groups tailored to your audiences.

    In summary, recent Spam requirements have tightened regulations on small group sending. Therefore, if you regularly send emails to 10 or more people, we highly recommend using a mailing service like Mail Designer Campaigns.

    Begin your journey with Mail Designer Campaigns by uploading your contact list.
    What is an Activation Code, what do I need it for and where can I find it?
     

    If you purchased your equinux software product in our Online Store, you don't need an activation code in order to activate your application.

    During the purchase process the license will be automatically added to your equinux ID, so you can activate your app using just your equinux ID and password.

    You entered your equinux ID but still get asked to enter an Activation Code?

    This can have two reasons:

      ‣ You might have purchased your application using another equinux ID. Please open the invoice you received for your purchase. You will find here the equinux ID you used for your order.
      ‣ The other reason ist that you might have purchased your license via the Mac App Store. In this case, please delete the application version you have downloaded from our website and download your application via the "Purchases" tab of the Mac App Store.
    How can I try the Stationery Pack templates?
     

    Our Stationery Pack delivers a set of more than 100 high-quality templates for Apple Mail. You can always preview the designs in the enclosed application, or test the stationery feature using Apple Mail's built-in templates.

    To actually use Stationery Pack templates for your email communication, they have to be added to Apple Mail. This process requires activating the software.

    Stationery Pack emails appear to be in Latin?
     
    Stationery Pack templates contain placeholder text, which shows you where text can be typed in your email. The placeholder text appears in Latin (for example, ‘lorem ipsum’) in the email body.
    When composing a new message, simply select the placeholder text and then type your own text to replace it. The text you type will have the same style and formatting as the placeholder text.
    Are emails sent with a Stationery Template displayed in clients other than Apple Mail?
     

    Stationery templates are sent as HTML e-mails that should be compatible with a variety of clients on different platforms. We tested the templates with the most common webmail services (including Google Mail, Yahoo, MobileMe, etc.) and with offline clients such as Apple Mail, Outlook Express, Windows Mail (Vista), Thunderbird, etc. on Mac, Windows and Linux systems.

    The stationery templates are not compatible with AOL webmail, Outlook 2007 and Lotus Notes which is not capable of rendering complex HTML messages.

    Why can't I change the equinux ID?
     

    If your software has already been activated using a different equinux ID, you must use this same ID to activate further stationery packs.

    E.g. If you already own Stationery Pack and have recently bought Summer Spirit Cards using a different equinux ID, you won't be able to use both stationery packs at once.

    If you want to use both at once, simply transfer your new stationery pack license from your new equinux ID to your old equinux ID (or vise-versa) using your equinux License Manager.

    If you've forgotten your password, you can retrieve your login details here.

    Alternatively, if you no longer own the previous stationery pack installed, please uninstall it. You can then install your new stationery pack with your new equinux ID.

    Why can't I change my equinux ID in Stationery Pack?
     

    Stationery Pack was previously activated using the equinux ID shown in the activation dialogue. Additional Stationery Packs need to be activated using the same equinux ID.

    To activate an additional Stationery Pack, please log in to the equinux ID shown using your password. If you forgot your password, please try click here

    When prompted, enter the activation code you received in your order confirmation email.

    I have already bought and installed Stationery Pack, but it says that I have to buy it again?
     
    We offer multiple Stationery Packs, so when you buy and activate one of the Packs, you'll only be able to access the templates from the specific pack you purchased.

    If you purchased Stationery Pack 2 for example, you won't be able to use the templates from Stationery Pack 1 until you purchase that Pack separately as well.

    You can view the Packs you've already purchased by logging into my equinux with your equinux ID and password.
    Where can I download Stationery Pack?
     
    You can download Stationery Pack Browser here: http://www.equinux.com/goto/stationery/download/us

    This download works as both the free demo and the full version.

    The Stationery Pack Browser application will allow you to browse and access templates from both Stationery Pack 1 as well as Stationery Pack 2 and the new Stationery Collections.

    So whether you're an existing Stationery Pack customer, or even if you're just interested in exploring both Packs before you buy, just download Stationery Pack Browser and discover the next generation of e-mail.
    How can I activate using an Activation Code?
     
    To activate your software using an Activation Code:
    ‣ Open the software on your mac, and select the name of application from the menu bar. 
    ‣ Click on "Activate" (e.g. "SongGenie" > "Activate SongGenie…") 
    ‣ If you already have an equinux ID, please sign in using this ID.
    ‣ If this is your first equinux product, click Create equinux ID and enter the required information.
    ‣ Finally, enter your Activation Code.

    Your software license will then be added to your equinux ID and activated on your Mac. The next time you need to install the product you can simply do so with your equinux ID and password – you won‘t need the Activation Code any longer. Please store your equinux ID and your password in a safe place.

    How can I install and activate Stationery Pack?
     

    Installing Stationery Pack can be done in a few simple steps! Whether you have Stationery Pack 1, 2, Season Greetings or Summer Spirit Cards, the process is always the same.

    First

    After downloading Stationery Pack from our website, install the correct pack by clicking the installer (e.g. Summer Spirit Cards).

    Next

    During the installation, the Stationery Pack Browser will be installed. Stationery Pack Browser will automatically open after installation and you will be asked to activate your software.

    If you bought your product from our Online Store, then you do not need to use an activation code! When you bought your software, you created an equinux ID. Simply enter your equinux ID and press Login to continue. Your product should activate automatically as the license is stored on your account!

    If you bought your product in a retail store and this is the first equinux product you have ever owned, please first create a new equinux ID. Once you have done this, you will be asked to enter the activation code you received when you bought the product (it should be printed inside the box). Continue and enjoy using your equinux software!

    How can I make sure everyone can read my stationery message?
     

    Some email users may choose not to display HTML email messages in their email software. To make sure that even they are able to read your messages, you can create a PDF copy of your mail, place it in your Dropbox and put a link to the PDF in your message.

    To include a PDF link:
    ‣ Open your message in Mail and select "File" > "Print".
    ‣ In the print dialog, select "PDF" > "Save as PDF".
    ‣ Move the file into the "Public" folder of your Dropbox and copy the public link of your file.
    ‣ Go back to your message in Mail and include a note with your PDF's public link (e.g: "View a PDF copy of this message on the web at http://...").
    Can I use my own signature with Business Edition stationery?
     

    Sure! To attach your own signature you will need a digital copy. If you already have one, simply drag the signature image file to the dropzone found at the bottom of the email. If there is an example signature already in place, this will be overwritten.

    If you do not currently have a digital signature, we can offer a few tips on how to create one. Why not try writing your signature clearly with a thick pen on a piece of paper and take a picture of it using your Mac's iSight camera? Alternatively you can always use a pro tool such as Adobe Photoshop and draw the signature with your mouse.

    Why aren't the image dropzones shown?
     

    In Business Edition, the image dropzones are intentionally left blank.

    This prevents cluttering your messages with undesired placeholders. Instead, we've included "blank" placeholders, which can be either be replaced by your images, or left "as is".

    If you move your mouse cursor around the template, you'll soon find all the various dropzones your template offers.

    How can Outlook 2010 users view my Stationery email?
     

    Due to technical limitations, Outlook 2010 can't display certain advanced HTML messages. This means that certain Stationery designs may not look quite as good as they do on your Mac.

    However, there is an easy workaround that will allow Outlook 2010 users to view your Stationery email correctly.

    In Outlook 2010:

    ‣ Select a received Stationery email
    ‣ A yellow information message should appear above the email
    ‣ Choose "Click here to view it in a web browser" and the Stationery email will be opened in a new window

    Now your message will be displayed as was originally intended.

    Tip: If you are sending emails to many Outlook 2010 users, you may want to include the line below in your message:

    Using Outlook 2010? Click "View in web browser" for optimized viewing.

    Can I send Stationery Pack emails with Outlook, Entourage or Thunderbird?
     

    Stationery Pack works with the stationery feature built-in to Apple Mail. Other email programs don't have this feature, so you use other programs to send stationery messages.

    However, most other email applications will of course be able to open and view your stationery messages sent with Apple Mail.

    Can I access the Stationery I've already purchased on Picture Mails?
     

    You can! We’ve created our Picture Mails app so that you can link it directly with the templates on your Mac.

    This means that you have access to every Stationery Pack you’ve already bought! On your iPad!

    You will need to make sure you’re running the most up-to-date version (simply log into the App Store and select ‘Updates’ from the bottom right tab on your screen).
    When that’s all sorted; the next time you launch Picture Mails you will be asked for your equinux ID and password and then it will automatically sync all your Stationery Packs running on your Mac.

    An important point to remember is that you will need your actual equinux ID and password upon getting the App to sync. Just your email address won’t work.
    You can find your equinux ID by clicking on "Stationery Pack" > "About Stationery Pack" on your Mac.

    Forgot your password? Enter your email address and we'll send you your details.

    Can I add videos to my Mail Designer template?
     

    With Mail Designer you can add dedicated video placeholder to your design. You will find all available placeholders in the "Video Placeholder" section of the Contents panel.

    After you have added a video placeholder, enter the link to your video. Mail Designer will automatically load a preview image for the video, which you can use as thumbnail in the placeholder. Note: YouTube Shorts does not allow fetching of a preview image right now.

    You have your own MP4 movie clip that you want to use without uploading it to Youtube or Vimeo?
    Move your movie file into the public folder of your Dropbox and copy the public link to the video into the Video Placeholder to share it with your recipients.

    If you don't see a Public folder in your dropbox account, your share links will beginn with "https://www.dropbox.com/…". This is not a direct link to the file. Please replace "https://www.dropbox.com/…" with "https://dl.dropboxusercontent.com" and use this link in Mail Designer. This is a direct link to the video.

    Please note that the videos need to be available from the internet and get not attached as files to your message.

    How can I install my Stationery Packs on my Mac?
     

    If you have already purchased one or more Stationery Packs via the equinux Store, please follow these steps to install your templates on your Mac:

    ‣ Download the Stationery Pack Application here.
    ‣ Please double click the .dmg file.
    ‣ Double-click the Stationery Pack you have purchased. If you bought more than one Stationery Pack, please double click one of your Stationery Packs.
    ‣ Follow the on screen steps to finish the installation.
    ‣ Afterwards choose in the app "Stationery Greeting Cards" > "Preferences" from the top menu bar and log in using your equinux ID and password.
    ‣ All of your licenses are now activated and you can use your templates.

    How does Spot Maps find devices on my network?
     

    Spot Maps uses ping, TCP and UDP scans to find and detect computers, printers, servers, smartphones, routers and other network-enabled devices on your network.

    What does Live Mode do?
     

    Live Mode lets you see at a glance which devices in your document are online or offline.
    Spot Maps will continuously monitor your devices for changes and update their status accordingly.

    Why are devices from different networks all mixed together?
     

    Use separate documents to create maps of different networks.
    Spot Maps will let you scan multiple networks within one document, enabling maps that include multiple offices or departments for example.

    Can I export Spot Maps documents?
     

    Yes, Spot Maps supports sharing your document over iMessage, AirDrop or email and can export as JPG, PNG, PDF or CSV.

    Simply choose "Share" from the top menu bar and select via which way you want to share your document or the file type you want to export your map to.

    How can I filter by network?
     

    Spot Maps makes it easy to filter search results by network. Simply type your network range in the search field.

    How can I quickly delete all the devices in my document?
     

    You can easily delete all the devices in your document by selecting all of them and pressing Cmd+Delete on your keyboard.

    Select individual devices by clicking them while holding down Shift key.

    How can I add a floor plan to my Spot Maps document?
     

    Spot Maps allows you to add a floor plan of your office to a Spot Maps document. The floor plan can be in different file formats such as PDF, PNG or JPG.

  • Please drag your floor plan into your Spot Maps document.
  • Change the size of the image and position it in your map.
  • Lock the image, so it cannot be moved around anymore.
  • Change the background color of your map so your floor plan fits perfectly to your floor plan.
  • Where can I see the animation for the templates of Holiday Motion Cards?
     

    In the Stationery Pack Application you will see the animation for a template of Holiday Motion Cards by selecting an animated template.

    To see the animation in Apple Mail, you can send yourself an email with an animated template.

    Your recipients will see the animation directly after opening your message.

    Can I buy Holiday Motion Cards and Text Perfect - Holiday Greetings together?
     

    In our Online Store you can purchase Holiay Motion Cards and Text Perfect - Holiday Greetings together.

    Please click here to visit our Online Store.

    If you want to take a look at the different templates before purchasing, please download the Stationery Pack Application here.

    You can purchase all of the Stationery Packs we offer directly in the Stationery Pack Application.

    Can I take a look at the different templates of each pack before buying?
     

    You can take a look at all the different templates we offer in each Stationery Pack before buying.
    To do so, please download and install the Stationery Pack Application via this link.
    After the installation has finished, select a Stationery Pack and double click a template to see a preview.

    We also have step by step instructions for installing and downloading the templates you have purchased.

    After purchasing a Stationery Pack in the Mac App Store I cannot use my templates. What can I do?
     

    If your Stationery Pack license didn't get activated after purchasing a template pack in the Mac App Store version of the Stationery Greeting Cards App, please follow these steps:

    ‣ Open the Stationery Greeting Cards App.
    ‣ Choose "Stationery Greeting Cards" > "Restore Purchases…" from the top menu bar.
    ‣ Enter the Apple ID and password you have used for the purchase.
    ‣ After the restore has been processed, you will see a new window, where you can save your purchase into your equinux ID.

    How can I add custom placeholders?
     
    The formatting of the custom placeholders can differ depending on the email service provider (ESP) that you are using. For name placeholders, many ESPs will use [NAME] as the placeholder. [NAME] will then be replaced with the name of the recipient. However, this can vary. Some may require you to use [FULLNAME] or a completely different formatting. Please make sure to double-check with your email service provider.

    For detailed information of how you can add placeholders for MailChimp, please visit the following page:

    For detailed information of how you can add placeholders for Campaign Monitor, please visit the following page:

    Will Stationery Packs work with newer macOS versions? My Stationery has disappeared in Mail!
     
    Starting with macOS Mojave (10.14), macOS Mail no longer supports email stationery. Apple has removed the stationery feature from their mail app. We did not like Apple's move, if you don't like their change as well, please give Apple direct feedback:

    https://www.apple.com/feedback/mail.html

    Because of this, the Stationery app does not work with this version of macOS. If you are looking to upgrade your Mac, please bear in mind that you will no longer be able to use the Stationery Packs you have already purchased.

    For business customers looking for an alternative to Stationery Pack, Mail Designer 365 is a great solution for building responsive HTML email designs. Learn more.

    We retired Stationery Pack some time ago and will not be releasing any new Packs going forward. We'd like to thank all of our customers who have sent amazing Greeting Cards over the years for their loyalty.
    Can I still use my Stationery Packs?
     
    After more than 10 years, we've had to retire the Stationery Packs app. In the upcoming macOS Mojave release, Apple will no longer be providing support for stationery items in Apple Mail; meaning Stationery Packs will not work under macOS 10.14.

    Your existing Greeting Cards will continue to work on older macOS versions up until macOS 10.13 (High Sierra.) However, please note that if you are looking to update your Mac to macOS 10.14. you will unfortunately not be able to continue using your Stationery Packs.

    For business customers looking for an alternative to Stationery on macOS Mojave, Mail Designer 365 is a great solution for building responsive HTML email designs. Learn more.
    Is 2FA available for my account?
     
    All equinux accounts support secure two-factor authentication (2FA) as an additional layer of security for your sensitive data.

    To set up 2FA for your account, log in to id.equinux.com and go to the tab Multifactor Authentication. Here you will find the QR code / authentication key needed to set up 2FA for your equinux account with your OTP solution.




    equinux 2FA supports all major authentication and password apps, including:
    • Google Authenticator
    • Microsoft Authenticator
    • Twilio Authy
    • 1Password
    • FreeOTP
    • Bitwarden
    Legacy products: End-of-support Spot Maps
     
    In the following overview, you'll find the end of support dates for legacy products:

    Spot Maps
    Spot Maps is a legacy product and is no longer supported.

    How to get support & updates
    There is no successor product for Spot Maps. Certain features of SpotMaps are available in VPN Tracker Pro and VIP:
    VPN Tracker network scanner

    What happens to unsupported products?
    As they are no longer being updated, they may stop working due to changes on your operating system, server or other technical requirements.
    I am having trouble with a World Connect connection. What can I do?
     

    If you're experiencing issues with your World Connect connection in VPN Tracker, here's what to do:

    1. Contact Support

    In VPN Tracker, go to the Help menu and select "Contact Support".
    In the window that opens:

    • Enter "World Connect Issue" in the subject line.
    • Describe the problem you're having so our support team can help you quickly.

    2. Try These Steps in the Meantime

    • If you're using a country-specific connection (e.g. "United States"), try unchecking the "Fastest Destination" option.
    • Once unchecked, you can manually choose from the available cities (e.g. New York, Los Angeles, Miami, etc.).
    • Try connecting to a different city to see if the issue is specific to one location.

    These steps often help resolve temporary connection issues.

    What is DynDNS or DDNS and why do I need this for my VPN connection?
     

    Dynamic DNS (DynDNS or DDNS) is a service that assigns a fixed domain name (like yourname.dnsprovider.com) to your home internet connection. This is especially useful when your internet provider assigns you a dynamic IP address – meaning your address can change at any time, such as after a router reboot or every 24 hours.

    Why does this matter for remote access?

    If you’re trying to connect to your home network remotely (via VPN, remote desktop, file server, etc.), these changing IP addresses can make it difficult to reach your router reliably. DynDNS solves this problem by keeping track of your current IP and automatically updating your domain name to match.

    In simple terms

    Think of DynDNS like a postal forwarding service when you move — instead of sending your VPN request to an outdated address, it always forwards it to your current one. That way, you can connect to your home network even if your IP has changed, without needing to check or reconfigure anything manually.

    What happens when using Dynamic DNS?

    • You connect using the same hostname every time (e.g. yourname.dnsprovider.com)
    • Your current IP address is updated automatically in the background
    • You avoid connection issues caused by changing IPs
    • Remote access becomes stable and hassle-free
    What is the Mail Designer 365 FileMaker Integration API?
     
    Regularly sending booking confirmations, quotes, invoices, welcome emails? Use the API to seamlessly integrate Mail Designer 365 with your FileMaker database and send flawlessly designed transactional email templates to customers, clients, and staff – directly from FileMaker.
    How does the integration work with FileMaker?
     
    Create a FileMaker string with all your existing database variables so they correspond with the placeholders in your Mail Designer 365 template. Then, relay these to the FileMaker send script (cURL-based) to enable one-click emails directly from your records. It's that easy!
    Which Mail Designer 365 license do I need for the FileMaker Integration API?
     
    A Mail Designer 365 Design License is required to create the templates.
    A Mail Designer 365 Campaigns Plan is needed to send emails later from your Filemaker solution.
    Does the Mail Designer 365 FileMaker Integration API work on iPhone and iPad?
     
    Yes, you can try out the integration in the FileMaker Go iOS app to send emails using your iPhone or iPad.
    Which FileMaker versions can I use the Mail Designer 365 FileMaker API with?
     
    The API integration is also compatible with from FileMaker 12 onwards, as well as with the FileMaker Go iOS app. When using attachments, at least FileMaker 18 is required.
    Which kinds of emails can I send using the Mail Designer 365 FileMaker Integration API?
     
    The API is super versatile and lends itself to a number of professional use cases. If you are regularly sending transactional emails such as order confirmations, reservation details, welcome emails, appointment reminders, invoices, quotes, portfolios, etc., you can easily utilise the Mail Designer 365 FileMaker API to save time and send beautifully designed emails directly from your FileMaker database.

    The API documentation can be found here:
    https://my.maildesigner365.com/docs/api
    Can I use image placeholders in Mail Designer 365?
     
    Currently, the API only supports text placeholders. Image placeholders are on our roadmap for a future release.y
    Can I see if my email was opened? Email tracking & campaign stats in Mail Designer 365
     

    Yes, with Mail Designer 365 you can track whether an email was opened. The built-in Mail Designer Delivery email tracking features give you detailed statistics for every email and campaign you send.

    Whether you're using Direct Send or sending a newsletter campaign: If you send your email using the built-in delivery service in Mail Designer 365, you'll get access to detailed analytics – including open rate, click rate, and many other important metrics.

    You can view analytics for your newsletter campaigns here:
    https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/campaigns/finished

    Detailed tracking is also available for Direct Send emails. You can find the relevant statistics here:
    https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/direct/finished

    No matter which sending method you choose, Mail Designer 365 provides the following analytics:

    • Open rate and total opens
    • Click rate and total clicks
    • Delivery status and bounces
    • Unsubscribes (unsubscribe rate)
    • Detailed link click tracking
    • Recipient-level statistics

    This performance analysis helps you better understand the success of your email campaigns and improve your content accordingly.

    Tip: For accurate results, we recommend checking your statistics at least 24 hours after sending. This ensures your recipients had enough time to open and engage with your email.

    Is it possible to integrate Mail Designer with other apps or services? Does it offer an API?
     
    Yes – the Mail Designer API lets you fill placeholders in your designs and send emails automatically. For instance, you can send personalized messages to customers straight from FileMaker.

    Use the Template ID to target a specific design. You’ll find the Template ID in the Placeholder Inspector: simply select a placeholder in your design and copy the Template ID from the bottom of the sidebar.

    The API documentation can be found here:
    https://my.maildesigner365.com/docs/api
    Why do I need placeholders in my contacts?
     
    With placeholders, you can easily create target groups or personalize your emails. In third-party apps like FileMaker, you can create fields to use as placeholders in your designs. This allows you to send automated, personalized emails directly from FileMaker.

    A placeholder (e.g., “Country”) can have multiple values (e.g., “Germany”, “USA”).

    Add placeholders to your contacts to create target groups based on them (e.g., “Send newsletter only to users in the USA”).

    Or use the Mail Designer 365 app to insert these placeholders into your emails for personalization (e.g., “All of ‘Germany’ is Celebrating the Super Sale!”).

    Learn more in the handbook
    I’m a consultant — how can I keep my client connections organized in VPN Tracker?
     
    With VPN Tracker, you can easily create a dedicated Team for each client. This way, only the connections shared within that team are visible to its members, keeping your personal and other client connections completely private and separate.

    Here's how to set it up →
    How can I map FileMaker field names to Mail Designer 365 placeholders?
     

    Step 1: Create the $AttributeFields Variable

    Start by creating a variable named $AttributeFields. This variable will contain the text string that defines the placeholder content used in your Mail Designer 365 email template. All values must be separated by commas.

    Scenario A: FileMaker Field Names Match the Email Placeholders

    Method:
    Use FileMaker field names that directly match the placeholders in your email design. Build the $AttributeFields variable by listing these field names, separated by commas.

    In Mail Designer, you simply use the field name as the placeholder.

    Format:
    $AttributeFields = "Table::Field1,Table::Field2,Table::Field3"

    Example Definition of $AttributeFields in FileMaker:
    $AttributeFields="CityHotel::GUEST_FIRST_NAME,CityHotel::GUEST_LAST_NAME,CityHotel::GUEST_EMAIL,CityHotel::BOOKING_METHOD"

    In Mail Designer 365, you can reference the values later using these placeholders:
    GUEST_FIRST_NAME
    GUEST_LAST_NAME
    GUEST_EMAIL
    BOOKING_METHOD




    Scenario B: FileMaker Field Names Do Not Match the Email Placeholders in Mail Designer

    Method:
    Build the $AttributeFields variable by manually mapping each placeholder name to the corresponding field or variable using the format:
    $AttributeFields = "PLACEHOLDER_NAME:" & FieldName_or_Variable & "," …

    Example Definition of $AttributeFields in FileMaker:
    "BOOKING_DATE:" & RESERVATION_DATE & "," &
    "BOOKING_TIME:" & RESERVATION_TIME & "," & …



    Scenario C: Using FileMaker Variables as Placeholders

    Method:
    If your FileMaker variable has the same name as the placeholder in Mail Designer 365, you can directly assign it like this:
    $AttributeFields = "$city,$country"
    This tells Mail Designer to use the value of $city for the placeholder named “city”.

    Example:
    The FileMaker variable $city contains “Munich”. If your Mail Designer template includes a placeholder named “city”, then define:
    $AttributeFields = "$city"
    The script will reveal the content “Munich” and pass it to Mail Designer to populate the “city” placeholder.



    The Best Scenario D: Mixing All Methods

    You can combine the approaches above into a single $AttributeFields string.

    Method:
    Mix matching field names, manually mapped fields, and variables in the $AttributeFields variable.

    Example:
    $AttributeFields = "BOOKING_DATE:" & RESERVATION_DATE & "," &
    "CityHotel::BREAKFAST_TYPE," & "$city"

    In Mail Designer 365 you can then reference them with the name BOOKING_DATE, BREAKFAST_TYPE and city
    How do I define the FROM addresses that I can use in my FileMaker / Mail Designer 365 integration?
     
    You need to define the From address — you can only use addresses that have been set at:
    https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/deliveries/domains
    How do I set the Mail Designer 365 Template ID?
     
    To specify an email design to use with your FileMaker integration, go to:

    https://my.maildesigner365.com/team/designs

    On the template you want to use, click the three dots icon and select “Mail Designer 365 API: Copy Template ID.”

    You will then use this ID to define the variable $EMailTemplateID.
    How do I get started with the Mail Designer integration?
     
    It’s simple: You only need two key files.
    The MailDesignerIntegrationExample file in FileMaker walks you through the required scripts step by step (.fmp12 FileMaker file):
    MailDesignerIntegrationExampleV4.fmp12

    And in the Mail Designer 365 template, you’ll find placeholders that show how your FileMaker fields come to life directly in the design (Mail Designer file):
    Open Demo Design Idea

    Open this Mail Designer file and then go directly to File > Save to save it in your project.

    Don’t have the Mail Designer app yet?
    Mail Designer 365 Download
    How is the integration technically implemented? Is it a FileMaker plug-in?
     
    The integration of Mail Designer does not require any additional installation of FileMaker plug-ins or similar components. Technically, the integration is handled via a CURL request to the API endpoint of our Mail Designer delivery service. This is executed using the appropriate FileMaker script step.

    Thus, usage with FileMaker Go for iPhone and iPad is possible.

    By providing a FileMaker demo file, all relevant steps can be easily followed, see FAQ "How do I get started with the Mail Designer integration?"
    Can I add attachments (like PDFs) to my Mail Designer templates using the FileMaker API?
     
    Yes, it’s possible. You need FileMaker 18 or later to add attachments using our API.
    I’m a FileMaker developer creating custom solutions for my clients. How can I use Mail Designer 365 to offer attractive HTML emails directly from my FileMaker solution?
     
    You need a Mail Designer 365 Design License to create email templates for your clients. You set up a separate project in Mail Designer 365 for each client and manage their templates there. If a client wants to regularly customize the templates themselves, they will also need a Design License.
    For sending emails, each of your clients requires their own Mail Designer Sending License. Every client must have their own Mail Designer 365 sending plan.
     
    No answer available
    I’m a FileMaker developer. Can I manage all my clients within a single Mail Designer 365 team?
     
    No, you need to create a separate team for each client. Do not mix clients within one team — this is important to keep email history and other client-specific data clearly separated, especially for data protection reasons.
    Of course, you can be the administrator of all teams yourself.
    Create a new team for each client here:
    https://my.maildesigner365.com/teams/new
    I have questions about the Mail Designer 365 API integration. Who can I contact?
     
    We’re happy to assist with any questions or feedback via our support form.
    I would like to send Mail Designer templates via API. How can I do that?
     
    The API documentation can be found here:
    https://my.maildesigner365.com/docs/api
    How do I choose the right Mail Designer plan for use with the Mail Designer API?
     
    Each Mail Designer plan includes a monthly allowance of “stamps.” One stamp is used per email sent to an individual recipient—for example, sending to an audience of 10,000 requires 10,000 stamps.

    When using the Mail Designer API, each delivery counts as 25 stamps.

    Example: The “Paris” plan includes 15,000 stamps per month, which allows for up to 600 API emails.
    Overview of the Mail Designer Delivery plans
    I’d like to test Mail Designer 365 together with the API integration / FileMaker API integration. Is there a trial license available?
     
    All our licenses include a free 7-day trial – perfect for exploring all features at your own pace and making a well-informed decision.

    Visit our Mail Designer 365 Store.

    Can I update the email design later?
     
    Absolutely. The API integration (from your web scripts or a FileMaker solution) only links to the Mail Designer template ID, so you can change the design anytime—logos, texts, seasonal styles—without touching a single script. Just edit in Mail Designer 365 and save. Done.
    Our current email integration hard-codes the template into the scripts—every change requires a developer. How does it work with the Mail Designer integration?
     
    With Mail Designer 365, that’s a thing of the past. Design updates can be made anytime directly by your marketing or design team—no developers, no coding. Your API or FileMaker solution simply references the Mail Designer template ID. Just open Mail Designer 365, make your changes (logos, texts, seasonal elements), save—and you’re done. That’s modern, efficient collaboration.
    Why am I getting an error with the Mail Designer Filemaker integration despite following the instructions?
     
    Our own tests have shown that often the Filemaker script wasn’t saved before trying again. You can recognize this by the asterisk:

    I’ve created a WireGuard connection. Can I share it with multiple employees or use it on multiple devices at the same time?
     
    No, that’s not possible. Due to how WireGuard works, each person needs their own personal connection. Sharing a connection between multiple users is not allowed and will lead to connection issues. Similarly, if an employee wants to use the VPN on more than one device (e.g. Mac and iPhone), they will need a separate connection for each device.

    With my.vpntracker.com, you can manage all your connections centrally: For example, you can create 100 WireGuard connections in advance, upload them, and assign them to employees and their devices as needed (e.g. Mr. Miller/Mac and Mr. Miller/iPhone).
    Can I configure WireGuard connections with 2-Factor Authentication?
     

    The WireGuard protocol itself does not support 2-Factor Authentication (2FA) for VPN connections. However, when using WireGuard connections with VPN Tracker, you can enhance your overall security by enabling 2FA for your VPN Tracker account.

    This means your VPN configuration and access are protected with an additional layer of security, while your WireGuard connections remain end-to-end encrypted for maximum protection.

    Using VPN Tracker is the best way to benefit from the performance and security of WireGuard, along with modern account-level protections like 2FA.

    Does VPN Tracker support NAT-Traversal?
     

    Yes, NAT-Traversal is supported by VPN Tracker. VPN Tracker supports the current version of NAT-Traversal that uses UDP encapsulated packets on port 4500 (RFC 3947), as well as previous draft versions that send UDP encapsulated packets on port 500. In addition, Cisco's UDP encapsulation is also supported.

    NAT-Traversal helps to establish VPNs from networks behind routers that perform Network Address Translation (NAT). Such routers can be found in many places: home DSL routers, wireless hotspots, Internet cafes, hotels, airports, etc. Many mobile ISPs (3G modems) also require NAT-Traversal to be used.

    VPN Tracker automatically recognizes if NAT-Traversal is needed, and turns it on and off accordingly. It can even test your local router to see what NAT-Traversal method works best with it.

    No recovery key? How to erase and rebuild your Personal Safe
     
    Disclaimer: Please be aware that resetting your Personal Safe will delete all of your VPN connections and passwords. You will need to start from scratch, building up your connections.

    Before you perform this step, please first review the following FAQ for possible restore options: I changed my password and now get an error message when I try to use my Personal Safe

    If you do not have your Personal Safe recovery key or can't retrieve your old equinux ID password, follow the recovery steps in VPN Tracker instead.

    1. If you have connections or Shortcuts on your Mac that are stored in your Personal Safe, deactivate Personal Safe in preferences and create a local copy of your connections
    2. Go to your Personal Safe webpage and delete your user keys: https://my.vpntracker.com/user/sync/keys
    3. Sign out from your VPN Tracker account on your Mac, open Keychain Access, and delete the entry "Connection Safe Master Key."
    4. Then sign back in and add a connection to your safe.
    5. Don't forget to write down the new recovery key and keep it in a safe place. This will enable you to log in if you ever lose your login details.